[go: up one dir, main page]

CN100385939C - Digital Broadcasting and Receiving Devices - Google Patents

Digital Broadcasting and Receiving Devices Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN100385939C
CN100385939C CNB2005100894791A CN200510089479A CN100385939C CN 100385939 C CN100385939 C CN 100385939C CN B2005100894791 A CNB2005100894791 A CN B2005100894791A CN 200510089479 A CN200510089479 A CN 200510089479A CN 100385939 C CN100385939 C CN 100385939C
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
information
unit
stream
navigation information
directory
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Lifetime
Application number
CNB2005100894791A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
CN1722817A (en
Inventor
下地达也
冈村和男
平位纯一
大芦雅弘
垣内隆志
楠见雄规
宫部义幸
南方郁夫
小塚雅之
三村义祐
井上信治
森俊也
高尾直弥
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Panasonic Intellectual Property Corp of America
Original Assignee
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd filed Critical Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd
Publication of CN1722817A publication Critical patent/CN1722817A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of CN100385939C publication Critical patent/CN100385939C/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Lifetime legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Landscapes

  • Two-Way Televisions, Distribution Of Moving Picture Or The Like (AREA)
  • Circuits Of Receivers In General (AREA)

Abstract

一种广播装置,该广播装置播送组成对话节目的多个目录被多路化了的多路化流,一目录包含多个表示与另一个或者多个目录链接的控制信息;所述控制信息与识别信息和版本号一起被多路化于所述多路化流中,所述识别信息表示多个控制信息中共同的流ID和表示所述控制信息中的各个控制信息个别的参数,所述版本号为与该控制信息所对应的有效的时间区域的版本号。

Figure 200510089479

A broadcasting device which broadcasts a multiplexed stream in which a plurality of contents constituting a dialogue program are multiplexed, and a directory contains a plurality of control information indicating a link with another or a plurality of contents; the control information and In the multiplexed stream, identification information is multiplexed together with a version number, the identification information indicates a common stream ID among the plurality of control information, and a parameter indicating individual control information among the control information, the The version number is the version number of the valid time zone corresponding to the control information.

Figure 200510089479

Description

数字广播装置和接收装置 Digital Broadcasting and Receiving Devices

本申请是申请号为03122908.5、申请日为1997年8月30日的专利申请的分案申请,该母案的在先申请号是JP96-230015,在先申请日是1996年8月30日。This application is a divisional application of a patent application with application number 03122908.5 and a filing date of August 30, 1997. The prior application number of the parent case is JP96-230015, and the prior application date is August 30, 1996.

技术领域 technical field

本发明涉及数字广播系统和接收装置。The present invention relates to a digital broadcasting system and a receiving device.

背景技术 Background technique

最近开始卫星数字广播,使用多信道提供多个节目。通过在一个频带中使多信道多路化来实现卫星数字广播的多信道化。该多路化使用称之为MPEG2(Moving Picture Experts Group 2)规格的变量器(トランスポ一トストリ一ム)的技术。具体来说,记载在ISO/EC标准13818-1(MPEG2系统)规格书中。Satellite digital broadcasting has recently started to provide multiple programs using multiple channels. Multiple channels of satellite digital broadcasting are realized by multiplexing multiple channels in one frequency band. This multiplexing uses a technique called a variable converter (transporter) of the MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group 2) standard. Specifically, it is described in the ISO/EC standard 13818-1 (MPEG2 system) specification.

然而,该卫星数字广播只是单向从发射台发射图像信息等,不与接收终端作对话性处理。接收终端用户根据发射的图像信息目录,本身若能作对话性选择其图像信息,则能欣赏丰富的节目。However, this satellite digital broadcasting only unidirectionally transmits image information and the like from the transmitting station, and does not perform interactive processing with the receiving terminal. If the receiving terminal user can select its image information in a dialogic manner according to the transmitted image information catalog, he can enjoy rich programs.

发明内容 Contents of the invention

本发明目的在于提供使用单向发射的图像信息等,宛如双向对话地进行图像信息通讯的数字广播装置、其接收装置、及适用于数字广播系统、接收装置的节目记录媒体。The object of the present invention is to provide a digital broadcasting device, a receiving device thereof, and a program recording medium suitable for the digital broadcasting system and the receiving device, which communicate image information using unidirectionally transmitted image information, etc., as in a two-way dialogue.

达到上述目的的数字广播装置,广播由相互连接的多个目录(信息的内容,contents)组成的对话节目,其特征是设有以下部分:目录存储部,存储多个目录,所述目录包括活动图像数据和表示成为其目录连接端(リンク先)的其他目录的控制信息;发射部,对一个活动图像数据和含在与该活动图像数据同一目录中的控制信息作多路重复,发射使控制信息多路的各活动图像数据。The digital broadcasting device that achieves the above-mentioned purpose broadcasts a dialogue program composed of a plurality of catalogs (contents of information) connected to each other, and is characterized in that the following parts are provided: a catalog storage unit stores a plurality of catalogs, and the catalog includes activities Image data and control information representing other directories that become its directory connection terminal (リンク first); the transmitting unit performs multiple repetition of a moving image data and the control information contained in the same directory as the moving image data, and transmits the control information Each moving picture data of information multiplex.

其中所述目录存储部也可备有以下部分:第一存储部,存储所述多个目录中包括的活动图像数据;第二存储部,存储所述的多个目录中包括的控制信息;结构表存储部,存储表示存储在第一存储部中的活动图像数据和存储在第二存储部中的控制信息对应关系的结构表。Wherein the directory storage unit may also be equipped with the following parts: a first storage unit for storing moving image data included in the plurality of directories; a second storage unit for storing control information included in the plurality of directories; The table storage unit stores a structure table indicating a correspondence relationship between the moving image data stored in the first storage unit and the control information stored in the second storage unit.

其中所述发射部也可备有以下部分:多路化部,把在第一存储部存储的多个活动图像数据和在第二存储部存储的多个控制信息分别作成数字数据流读出,生成使那些多路化了的多路化流;多路控制部,参照所述结构表,控制多路化部的读出,使得多个活动图像数据的多路化,同时为重复多路对应于各活动图像数据的控制信息;输出部,把多路化部中生成的多路化流置于数字广播波上发射。Wherein the transmitting unit may also be equipped with the following parts: a multiplexing unit, which reads out a plurality of moving image data stored in the first storage unit and a plurality of control information stored in the second storage unit as digital data streams respectively, Generate those multiplexed multiplexed streams; the multiplexed control unit refers to the structure table, and controls the readout of the multiplexed unit so that the multiplexed data of a plurality of moving images is simultaneously repeated for multiplexed correspondence. Control information for each moving image data; the output unit transmits the multiplexed stream generated in the multiplexer unit on digital broadcast waves.

其中所述目录存储部还备有存储对应于各活动图像数据的声音数据的第三存储部;Wherein the directory storage unit is further provided with a third storage unit storing audio data corresponding to each moving image data;

所述结构表存储部存储各目录中所含的声音数据和活动图像数据和控制信息的对应关系;The structure table storage unit stores correspondence between audio data, moving image data, and control information contained in each directory;

所述多路化部其构成也可使第三存储部的声音数据在多路化流中多路化。The multiplexing unit may be configured to multiplex the audio data in the third storage unit in the multiplexed stream.

根据所述构成,由于控制信息经活动图像数据的重放时间域重复多路化,同时发射活动图像数据,所以在接收装置中根据用户操作,可一边使目录作对话性转换一边重放。就是说,本数字广播装置用单向广播可提供交互节目。According to the above configuration, since the control information is repeatedly multiplexed in the reproduction time domain of the moving picture data and the moving picture data is transmitted simultaneously, playback can be performed while interactively switching the content in the receiving device according to the user's operation. That is, the present digital broadcasting apparatus can provide interactive programs by one-way broadcasting.

其中所述目录包括多个控制信息;Wherein the directory includes a plurality of control information;

所述各控制信息包括表示连接端目录的连接信息,和表示在对应有关控制信息的活动图像数据重放时间域内怎样的时间区间是有效的时间信息;The control information includes connection information representing the list of connection terminals, and time information representing what kind of time interval is valid in the playback time domain of the moving image data corresponding to the relevant control information;

在一个目录中所含的多个控制信息具有相应于对应的活动图像数据目录的连接信息及时间信息;A plurality of control information contained in one directory has link information and time information corresponding to the corresponding moving picture data directory;

所述多路控制部也可控制多路化部,以使经其有效时间区间在活动图像数据中使控制信息重复多路,The multiplexing control unit may control the multiplexing unit so that the control information is repeatedly multiplexed in the moving image data during the effective time interval,

根据该结构,数字广播装置因使在活动图像数据重放时间域内每个任意时间区间不同的控制信息重复多路,所以根据活动图像数据目录可动态地变更连接端目录及其数量等。各目录可有在每个活动图像场面相应其目录的适当连接端目录。According to this configuration, the digital broadcasting apparatus multiplexes different control information for each arbitrary time interval within the video data playback time domain, so that the connection destination list and its number can be dynamically changed according to the video data list. Each directory may have an appropriate linker directory corresponding to its directory at each moving picture scene.

其中所述多路控制部还可控制多路化部,使得从其有效时间区间的一定时间前在活动图像数据中使控制信息重复多路。The multiplexing control unit may control the multiplexing unit so that the control information is repeatedly multiplexed in the moving image data before a certain time period from the effective time interval.

根据该构成,由于从其有效时间区间的一定时间前在活动图像数据中使控制信息重复多路,所以在接收装置目录的重放中,从现在控制信息新接收有效时间区间不同的控制信息情况下,可有余量处理接受装置新的控制信息。According to this configuration, since the control information is repeatedly multiplexed in the moving image data from a certain time before the effective time interval, when the receiving device reproduces the content, it is possible to newly receive control information with a different effective time interval from the current control information. In this case, there is a margin to process the new control information of the receiving device.

其中所述多路控制部,进一步,其构成也可在目录中包括的多个控制信息上,根据所述有效时间区间附加方案号。Wherein the multi-channel control unit is further configured to add a plan number according to the effective time interval to a plurality of control information included in the directory.

根据该构成,接收装置就有关当前重放中的目录以方案号为线索,可取得有效时间不同的新的控制信息。According to this configuration, the receiving device can obtain new control information with a different effective time with respect to the content currently being reproduced, using the plan number as a clue.

其中在所述第二存储部存储的各控制信息,其构成可包括表示连接端目录的连接信息和表示每个连接端菜单项目的附助图像。The configuration of each control information stored in the second storage unit may include connection information representing a list of connection terminals and an auxiliary image representing menu items of each connection terminal.

根据该构成,可在每个控制信息中任意设定促使接收装置用户操作的菜单项目。According to this configuration, menu items that prompt the user of the receiving device to operate can be arbitrarily set in each piece of control information.

其中至少一个所述控制信息,其构成也可包括多个附加信息,表示在活动图像数据上重迭显示的文字或图形图像;和原本信息,反映接收装置的用户操作哪个附加信息为有效。The configuration of at least one of the control information may also include a plurality of additional information, representing text or graphic images superimposed on the moving image data; and original information, reflecting which additional information is valid for the user operation of the receiving device.

根据该构成,在控制信息中保持原本信息和多个附加信息,以此在接收装置中可对附加信息作对话性切换显示。例如活动图像显示天气预报,当附加信息作为有关活动图像目录的多个补充说明(文字或图形)情况下,用原本信息根据用户操作实施补充说明的切换。像这样,一组活动图像数据和控制信息实质上能表示多个目录。According to this configuration, the original information and a plurality of additional information are kept in the control information, whereby the additional information can be interactively switched and displayed on the receiving device. For example, a moving image displays a weather forecast, and when the additional information is a plurality of supplementary explanations (text or graphics) related to the moving image list, switching of supplementary explanations is performed according to the user's operation using the original information. As such, a set of moving image data and control information can substantially represent a plurality of directories.

在此,至少一个所述控制信息,其构成主要构成也可包括含有所述连接信息及辅助图像的位置的至少两个位置;和在含接收装置有关控制信息的目录重放初期状态表示有效位置的初期信息;和反映接收装置的用户操作变更有效位置的原本信息。Here, at least one of the control information, its main composition may also include at least two positions containing the connection information and the position of the auxiliary image; initial information; and the original information reflecting the effective position changed by the user operation of the receiving device.

根据该构成,把用原本信息能切换的多个所述位置保持在控制信息中,以此,实质上可使连接端目录数量增加。According to this configuration, the plurality of positions that can be switched by the original information are held in the control information, thereby substantially increasing the number of connection terminal lists.

其中,所述位置也可构成包括表示迭加在活动图像数据上的文字或图形图像的附加信息。Wherein, the position may also constitute additional information including text or graphic images superimposed on the moving image data.

根据该构成,由于在上述位置上使具有附加信息,所以利用一组活动图像数据和控制信息实质上可表示多个目录,再根据附加信息设置不同的连接端目录。According to this configuration, since additional information is provided at the above-mentioned position, a plurality of lists can be represented substantially by a set of moving image data and control information, and different connection end lists can be set according to the additional information.

达到上述目的数字广播装置,广播由相互连接的多个目录组成的对话节目,其特征是备有以下部分:图像存储部,存储多个活动图像数据和多个静止图像数据;控制信息存储部,作为以各活动图像,静止图像为基础的目录要素,存储包括通过该目录表示连接端目录的连接信息的多个第一、第二类型信息;结构表存储部,存储在每个目录中,表示活动图像数据和第一类型控制信息对应关系的第一结构表,和表示静止图像数据和第二类型控制信息对应关系的第二结构表;第一多路化部,生成这样的第一多路化流,使在第一结构表中显示的活动图像数据多路化,同时经活动图像数据的重放时间,使对应于其活动图像数据的第一类型控制信息重复多路;第二多路化部,生成这样的第二多路化流,与第二类型控制信息一起使在第二结构表中显示的多个静止图像重复多路;输出部,把由第一、第二多路化部生成的第一、第二多路化流置于数字广播波上发出。Achieving the above-mentioned object digital broadcasting device, broadcasting is made up of a plurality of mutually connected dialogue programs, it is characterized in that following parts are prepared: image storage unit, stores a plurality of moving image data and a plurality of still image data; Control information storage unit, As a directory element based on each moving image and still image, store a plurality of first and second type information including connection information indicating a connection end directory through the directory; the structure table storage unit is stored in each directory, indicating A first structure table of the corresponding relationship between moving image data and the first type of control information, and a second structure table representing the corresponding relationship between the still image data and the second type of control information; the first multiplexing unit generates such a first multiplexed Streaming, multiplexing the moving image data displayed in the first structure table, and simultaneously repeating the first type of control information corresponding to the moving image data through the playback time of the moving image data; the second multiplexing The demultiplexing section generates such a second multiplexed stream, and repeats the multiplexing of a plurality of still images displayed in the second structure table together with the second type control information; The partially generated first and second multiplexed streams are sent out on digital broadcast waves.

根据该构成,可广播包括两种目录就是说以活动图像为主体的目录和以静止图像为主体的目录的对话节目。第一、第二类型的控制信息由于不管哪一种目录都能作为连接端的目录,所以在接收装置中根据用户操作在两种目录之间能同时作切换重放,可广播有魅力的对话节目。According to this configuration, it is possible to broadcast a talk program including two types of content, that is, a content mainly containing moving images and a content mainly containing still images. The first and second types of control information can be used as the list of the connection end regardless of the list, so the receiving device can switch between the two lists according to the user's operation and play back at the same time, and can broadcast attractive dialogue programs. .

达到上述目的的数字广播接收装置,接收由相互连接的多个目录组成的对话节目,其特征是:A digital broadcast receiving device for achieving the above-mentioned purpose, which receives dialogue programs composed of multiple directories connected to each other, is characterized in that:

所述广播波包括在不同的多个活动图像数据中使表示在其他目录连接的控制信息重复多路化的多路流;The broadcast wave includes a multiplexed stream in which control information indicating links to other directories is repeatedly multiplexed among different pluralities of video data;

所述接收装置备有:提取部,从所述广播波提取一个活动图像数据和与其活动图像同一目录内的控制信息;保持部,保持提取的控制信息;重放部,重放提取的活动图像数据,输出图像信号;操作部,接收指示目录切换的用户操作;控制部,根据用户操作控制提取部,提取在保持部保持的控制信息中展示的其他目录。The receiving device is provided with: an extracting unit for extracting one moving picture data and control information in the same directory as the moving picture from the broadcast wave; a holding unit for keeping the extracted control information; a reproducing unit for reproducing the extracted moving picture The data output image signal; the operation unit receives user operation instructing directory switching; the control unit controls the extraction unit according to the user operation, and extracts other directories displayed in the control information held by the storage unit.

根据该构成,接收装置使用单向广播图像信息,由于所作的宛如对话性双向接收图像信息,所以用户能欣赏交互的广播节目。并且,因重复发射控制信息,所以不仅保持部保持一个目录的控制信息,而且以存储量小为佳。According to this configuration, the receiving device uses the one-way broadcast image information, and since the two-way reception of the image information is performed as if interactively, the user can enjoy an interactive broadcast program. In addition, since the control information is repeatedly transmitted, the holding unit not only holds one directory of control information, but also preferably has a small storage capacity.

其中,给所述活动图像数据和控制信息分别提供第一识别信息和第二识别信息;Wherein, first identification information and second identification information are respectively provided for the moving image data and the control information;

所述控制信息包括表示连接端目录的第一、第二识别信息;The control information includes first and second identification information representing the directory of the connection terminal;

所述提取部备有以下部分:第一辨别部,辨别给所述广播波中的活动图像数据提供的第一识别信息;第二辨别部,辨别给所述广播波中的控制信息提供的第二识别信息;取入部,当第一、第二辨别部的辨别结果是由控制部指示的特定识别信息情况下,取入该活动图像数据和控制信息;The extracting unit includes the following parts: a first distinguishing unit distinguishing first identification information given to moving image data in the broadcast wave; a second distinguishing unit distinguishing first identification information given to control information in the broadcast wave; 2. Identification information: the input unit, when the identification results of the first and second identification units are specific identification information instructed by the control unit, the moving image data and control information are imported;

所述重放部,使由取入部取入的活动图像数据重放,所述保持部的构成也可是保持由取入部取入的控制信息。The reproduction unit reproduces the moving image data acquired by the acquisition unit, and the storage unit may be configured to hold the control information acquired by the acquisition unit.

根据该构成,接收装置由于分别辨别取入活动图像数据和控制信息,所以能高效地仅接收应重放的目录数据。According to this configuration, the receiving device can efficiently receive only the content data to be reproduced since the receiving device discriminates and takes in the moving picture data and the control information.

其中,所述多路流使表示最初应重放的目录的第一、第二识别信息的进入信息多路;Wherein, the multiplexed stream multiplexes the incoming information indicating the first and second identification information of the content to be played back initially;

所述控制部在操作部中,一旦通过用户接受多路流的选择操作,则向提取部指示进入信息提取;The control unit instructs the extraction unit to enter information extraction once the user accepts the selection operation of the multi-channel stream in the operation unit;

所述提取部还具有:The extractor also has:

进入信息提取部,接受所述控制部的指示,从多路流提取进入信息;an entry information extraction unit, accepting an instruction from the control unit, and extracting entry information from the multi-channel stream;

进入信息存储部,存储由进入信息提取部提取的进入信息;The entry information storage part stores the entry information extracted by the entry information extraction part;

所述控制部其构成也可使得把包括在进入信息中的第一、第二识别信息作为所述特定识别指示给所述取入部。The control unit may be configured such that the first and second identification information included in the entry information are instructed to the import unit as the specific identification.

根据该构成,接收装置根据进入信息提取最初应重放的目录,能可靠地重放主菜单用等的重要目录。According to this configuration, the receiving device extracts the content to be reproduced first based on the entry information, and can reliably reproduce important content such as the main menu.

其中所述连接信息包括表示连接端目录的活动图像数据的标识符和控制信息标识符;Wherein the connection information includes an identifier representing the moving image data of the connection terminal directory and a control information identifier;

所述第一、第二识别信息是分别表示多路流中的活动图像数据、控制信息的数字数据流ID;The first and second identification information are digital data stream IDs respectively representing moving image data and control information in the multi-channel stream;

使表示活动图像数据标识符和第一识别信息的对应关系、控制信息标识符和第二识别信息的对应关系表多路化,向所述多路化流多路化重复发射;multiplexing a table representing the correspondence between the moving image data identifier and the first identification information, and the correspondence between the control information identifier and the second identification information, and multiplexing and repeatedly transmitting to the multiplexed stream;

所述控制部提取该对应表,所述活动图像数据提取控制部的构成应能参照该对应表,把包括在连接信息中的活动图像数据标识符变换成第一识别信息,把控制信息的标识符变换成第二识别信息,指示给提取部。The control unit extracts the correspondence table, and the moving picture data extraction control unit is configured to refer to the correspondence table, convert the moving picture data identifier included in the connection information into the first identification information, and convert the identification information of the control information into the first identification information. The symbol is converted into the second identification information, which is instructed to the extraction unit.

根据该构成,由于利用根据MPEG2规格的数字卫星广播发射本发明的对话节目,改良已有的数字卫星广播调谐器,这样可易于实施本发明的接收装置。According to this structure, since the talk program of the present invention is transmitted by digital satellite broadcasting conforming to the MPEG2 standard, the existing digital satellite broadcasting tuner can be improved, so that the receiving device of the present invention can be easily implemented.

其中所述控制信息包括:表示连接端目录的连接信息,和含有每个连接端的菜单项目图像的辅助图像;Wherein the control information includes: connection information representing a list of connection terminals, and an auxiliary image containing menu item images of each connection terminal;

所述重放部包括:活动图像数据重放部,重放由取入部取入的活动图像数据,和图像重放部,进行重放使得把保持在保持部的辅助图像重迭在所述活动图像数据上;The playback section includes: a moving image data playback section that plays back the moving image data taken in by the take-in section, and an image playback section that plays back the auxiliary image held in the holding section to overlap the moving image data. on the image data;

所述操作部接受对菜单项目图像的用户选择;The operation section accepts user selection of a menu item image;

所述控制部其构成也可使得根据由用户选择产生的菜单项目和连接信息,辨别连接端目录的第一识别信息和第二识别信息。The control unit may be configured so as to distinguish the first identification information and the second identification information of the connection terminal list based on the menu item and the connection information selected by the user.

根据该构成,在接收装置中由于显示菜单项目图像,所以促进用户对话操作,可实现产生有吸引力的节目。According to this configuration, since menu item images are displayed on the receiving device, interactive operations by the user are facilitated, and attractive programs can be produced.

其中所述控制信息还包括表示文字图像或图形图像的附加信息;The control information also includes additional information representing text images or graphic images;

所述重放部其构成也可使得重放为把在保持部保持的附加信息表示的文字图像或图形图像迭加在所述的活动图像数据上。The reproducing unit may be configured such that a character image or a graphic image indicated by the additional information held in the holding unit is reproduced so as to be superimposed on the moving image data.

根据该构成,由于在接收装置中加在活动图像数据上显示文字和图形等的附加图像,所以还能实现产生有吸引力的节目。According to this configuration, since additional images such as characters and figures are displayed on top of moving image data in the receiving device, attractive programs can also be produced.

其中所述控制信息包括其控制信息表示有效期间的有效时间信息;Wherein the control information includes valid time information whose control information indicates a valid period;

所述一个目录对应有效时间不同的多个控制信息;The one directory corresponds to a plurality of control information with different valid times;

所述重放部其构成也可使得在其有效期间重放在保持部保持的辅助图像。The playback unit may be configured such that the auxiliary image held in the holding unit is played back during its effective period.

根据该构成,由于使在活动图像数据重放时间内的任意时间区域不同的控制信息重复多路,所以可根据活动图像目录动态变更连接端目录及其数量。各目录在每个活动图像场面可根据其目录的适当连接端目录。其结果,接收装置的用户由于根据活动图像场面连接端变化,所以能欣赏更有吸引力的对话节目。According to this configuration, since control information different in arbitrary time zones within the playback time of moving picture data is multiplexed, the connection terminal list and its number can be dynamically changed according to the moving picture list. Each list can be listed according to the appropriate connection terminal of its list for each moving picture scene. As a result, the user of the receiving device can enjoy a more attractive dialogue program because the connection port changes according to the moving picture scene.

其中对应所述一个目录的多个控制信息具有根据有效期的方案(バ-ヅヨン)号;wherein the plurality of control information corresponding to the one directory has a scheme (バ-ヅヨン) number according to the validity period;

所述控制部也可构成使得控制取入部,当由取入部取入一个控制信息时,取入具有下一个方案号的控制信息。The control unit may be configured to control the acquisition unit to acquire control information having a next plan number when one piece of control information is acquired by the acquisition unit.

根据该构成,接收装置就有关当前重放中的目录,以方案号为线索可依次得到有效时间不同的下一个控制信息。According to this configuration, the receiving device can sequentially obtain the next control information with a different effective time with respect to the content currently being reproduced, using the plan number as a clue.

其中至少一个所述控制信息包括:多个附加信息,表示在活动图像数据上迭加显示的文字或图形图像,和原本(スクリプト)信息,反映接收装置的用户操作,使某个附加信息有效;Wherein at least one of the control information includes: a plurality of additional information, representing text or graphic images superimposed on the moving image data, and script information, reflecting the user operation of the receiving device to make certain additional information effective;

所述控制部通过解释执行在保持部保持的原本,确定有效附加信息;The control unit determines valid additional information by interpreting and executing the script held in the holding unit;

所述重放部也可其构成使得根据控制部的解释执行结果,对有效附加信息做文字或图形图像的重放。The playback unit may also be configured to play back text or graphic images of the effective additional information based on the interpretation and execution results of the control unit.

依据该构成,接收装置纵使没有取得新的控制信息,也能根据原本信息切换目录。根据原本信息的目录切换可对用户操作做高速响应。According to this configuration, even if the receiving device does not acquire new control information, it can switch directories based on the original information. Directory switching based on original information enables high-speed response to user operations.

其中所述多路流包括与活动图像数据对应的声音数据;Wherein the multiple streams include sound data corresponding to moving image data;

所述提取部还从所广播波中提出与活动图像数据对应的声音数据;The extraction section also extracts sound data corresponding to moving image data from the broadcast wave;

所述重放部也可其构成使得重放提取的声音数据。The playback section may also be configured so as to play back the extracted audio data.

根据该构成,能实现由包括活动图像、静止图像、声音的目录组成的对话节目。According to this configuration, it is possible to realize a dialogue program composed of contents including moving images, still images, and audio.

为了达到所述目的的记录适用于本发明接收装置的节目的记录媒体,所述接收装置包括以下部分:接收部,接收包括由相互连接的多个目录组成的对话节目的广播波;提取部,从所述广播提取一个数字数据流;重放部,重放活动图像数据输出图像信号;所述记录媒体记录包括以下步骤的程序:In order to achieve the purpose of recording the recording medium suitable for the program of the receiving device of the present invention, the receiving device includes the following parts: a receiving part, which receives a broadcast wave including a dialogue program composed of a plurality of contents connected to each other; an extracting part, A digital data stream is extracted from the broadcast; the replay unit replays the moving image data and outputs an image signal; the recording medium records a program comprising the following steps:

提取来自所述广播波的一个活动图像数据,和与其活动图像数据一样的目录中的控制信息;extracting a moving picture data from said broadcast wave, and control information in the same directory as the moving picture data;

把提取的控制信息存储在接收装置内部的存储器中;storing the extracted control information in a memory inside the receiving device;

使提取的活动图像数据重放,输出图像信号;replay the extracted moving image data, and output an image signal;

判断对接收装置是否实施指示目录切换的用户操作;Judging whether to perform a user operation indicating directory switching on the receiving device;

当实现指示目录切换的用户操作时,提取显示在存储于存储器中的控制信息中的其他目录。When a user operation instructing directory switching is effected, other directories displayed in the control information stored in the memory are extracted.

根据该记录媒体,在已有的接收装置(卫星广播调谐器)中装入该程序,可容易地作成本发明的接收装置。According to this recording medium, this program can be incorporated into an existing receiving device (satellite broadcast tuner), and the receiving device of the present invention can be easily produced.

附图说明 Description of drawings

通过以下描述,同时参照说明本发明特定实施例的附图,本发明的各种目的、优点和特征会很清楚。Various objects, advantages and features of the invention will become apparent from the following description, taken with reference to the accompanying drawings, which illustrate specific embodiments of the invention.

在这些附图中:In these drawings:

图1表示利用接收装置一边切换一边重放的多个目录例子;Fig. 1 shows a plurality of directory examples that are played back while being switched by a receiving device;

图2是图1的左视放大图;Figure 2 is an enlarged left view of Figure 1;

图3是图1的右视放大图;Fig. 3 is the enlarged right view of Fig. 1;

图4是本发明数字广播系统的数字广播装置和接收装置第一实施形式的结构;Fig. 4 is the structure of the first implementation form of the digital broadcasting device and the receiving device of the digital broadcasting system of the present invention;

图5表示构成对话节目的多个目录的一例;FIG. 5 shows an example of a plurality of categories constituting a dialogue program;

图6A、图6B表示在所述实施形式的展示(プレゼンテ-シヨシ)信息存储部中存储的活动图像数据的一例;FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B show an example of moving image data stored in the display (prevention-ヨシ) information storage unit of the above embodiment;

图6C、图6D表示在所述实施形式的展示信息存储部中存储的声音数据的一例;6C and 6D show an example of audio data stored in the presentation information storage unit of the above embodiment;

图7~图11分别表示在所述实施形式的导航(ナビゲ-シヨン)信息存储部中存储的导航信息的一例;7 to 11 respectively show an example of navigation information stored in the navigation (ナビゲ-ヨン) information storage unit of the embodiment;

图12表示在所述实施形式的结构信息存储部中存储的结构信息表的一例;FIG. 12 shows an example of a structure information table stored in the structure information storage unit of the embodiment;

图13表示在所述实施形式的结构信息存储部中存储的进入(ェントリ)信息的一例;FIG. 13 shows an example of entry (entry) information stored in the configuration information storage unit of the embodiment;

图14表示在所述实施形式的多路信息存储部中存储的多路信息表的一例;FIG. 14 shows an example of a multi-way information table stored in the multi-way information storage unit of the embodiment;

图15表示所述实施形式的多路控制部形成的目录标识符分配表的一例;FIG. 15 shows an example of a directory identifier allocation table formed by the multiplexing control unit of the embodiment;

图16表示所述实施形式的多路控制部形成的方案(バ-ジヨン)分配表的一例;FIG. 16 shows an example of a plan (ba-jiyon) allocation table formed by the multiplex control unit of the embodiment;

图17~图21分别表示在所述实施形式的导航信息表生成部中生成的导航信息表的一例;17 to 21 each show an example of a navigation information table generated by the navigation information table generation unit in the embodiment;

图22A、图22B、图22C、图23、图24分别表示在所述实施形式的系统信息表生成部中生成的NIT、SDT、EIT、PAT、PMT的一例;FIG. 22A, FIG. 22B, FIG. 22C, FIG. 23, and FIG. 24 respectively show an example of NIT, SDT, EIT, PAT, and PMT generated in the system information table generating unit of the embodiment;

图25表示在所述实施形式的系统信息表生成部中生成的PMT中Entry_Desriptor的详细部分;Fig. 25 shows the detailed part of Entry_Desriptor in the PMT generated in the system information table generating part of the embodiment;

图26A~图26D表示在所述实施形式的系统信息表生成部生成的PMT中的NE_Component_Descriptor详细部分;26A to 26D show the detailed part of NE_Component_Descriptor in the PMT generated by the system information table generation unit in the embodiment;

图27A、图27B表示在所述实施形式的系统信息表生成部生成的PMT中的stream_identifier_descriptor详细部分;FIG. 27A and FIG. 27B show the detailed part of stream_identifier_descriptor in the PMT generated by the system information table generation unit in the embodiment;

图28是在所述实施形式的多路化部中多路化了的输送流的示意图;Fig. 28 is a schematic diagram of multiplexed transport streams in the multiplexing section of the embodiment;

图29是在所述实施形式的发射部中多路化了的输送流的示意图;Figure 29 is a schematic diagram of multiplexed transport streams in the transmit section of the embodiment;

图30~图32是说明所述实施形式的数据发射装置工作的流程图;Fig. 30~Fig. 32 are the flow charts illustrating the work of the data transmitting device of the embodiment;

图33A图33B表示所述实施形式的TS译码部的滤波(フイルタ)条件存储部中存储的滤波条件的一例;33A and 33B show an example of filter conditions stored in a filter condition storage unit of the TS decoding unit in the above embodiment;

图34A~图34D表示在所述实施形式的显示部中显示的显示图像的一例;34A to 34D show examples of display images displayed on the display unit of the above embodiment;

图35A、35B表示在所述实施形式的显示部中显示的显示图像的一例;35A and 35B show an example of a display image displayed on the display unit of the above embodiment;

图36是表示对话节目接收处理示意的流程图;Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing a schematic diagram of receiving processing of a dialogue program;

图37是更详细地表示图36所示的目录切换处理的流程图;Fig. 37 is a flowchart showing in more detail the directory switching process shown in Fig. 36;

图38是更详细地表示图37所示的图像数据切换处理的流程图;Fig. 38 is a flowchart showing in more detail the image data switching process shown in Fig. 37;

图39是更详细地表示图37所示的声音数据切换处理的流程图;Fig. 39 is a flowchart showing in more detail the voice data switching process shown in Fig. 37;

图40是更详细地表示图37所示的导航信息切换处理的流程图;FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing in more detail the navigation information switching process shown in FIG. 37;

图41是表示由导航信息形成的对话控制处理的流程图;Fig. 41 is a flowchart showing dialog control processing formed from navigation information;

图42是表示由导航信息形成的用户I/F处理的流程图;Fig. 42 is a flowchart showing user I/F processing formed from navigation information;

图43是表示由4个目录10~13组成的其他对话节目例子;Fig. 43 shows other dialog program example that is made up of 4 catalogues 10~13;

图44~图47表示对应于目录10~13的导航信息;Figure 44~Figure 47 represent the navigation information corresponding to catalog 10~13;

图48表示对应于4个目录10~13的导航信息;Fig. 48 shows the navigation information corresponding to 4 categories 10-13;

图49表示在接收侧的显示画面上作为1帧显示的目录例子;FIG. 49 shows an example of a list displayed as one frame on the display screen on the receiving side;

图50示意性表示从发射侧发射的发射数据;Figure 50 schematically represents transmission data transmitted from the transmission side;

图51示意性表示从发射侧发射的发射数据的发射情况;Figure 51 schematically represents the transmission of transmission data transmitted from the transmission side;

图52是本发明第二实施形式的数字广播系统的数据发射装置和数据接收装置的结构;Fig. 52 is a structure of a data transmitting device and a data receiving device of a digital broadcasting system according to the second embodiment of the present invention;

图53A、53B分别表示存储在展示信息存储部的图像数据的一例;53A and 53B each show an example of image data stored in the presentation information storage unit;

图54、图55分别表示存储在导航信息存储部的导航信息的一例;54 and 55 respectively show an example of navigation information stored in the navigation information storage unit;

图56表示存储在结构信息存储部的结构信息表和进入信息的一例;FIG. 56 shows an example of a configuration information table and entry information stored in a configuration information storage unit;

图57表示存储的多路信息存储部的多路信息表的一例;Fig. 57 shows an example of the multi-way information table stored in the multi-way information storage unit;

图58表示多路控制部制成的目录标识符分配表的一例;FIG. 58 shows an example of a directory identifier allocation table created by the multiplexing control unit;

图59表示多路控制部制成的显示图像信息标识符分配表的一例;Fig. 59 shows an example of a display image information identifier allocation table created by the multiplexing control unit;

图60表示标识符信息附加部在图像数据位流专用区域上附加VE_id的状态;FIG. 60 shows a state where the identifier information adding unit adds VE_id to the image data bit stream dedicated area;

图61、图62分别表示在导航信息表生成部生成的导航信息表的一例;FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 each show an example of a navigation information table generated by the navigation information table generation unit;

图63A、图63B、图63C分别表示在流对应信息表生成部生成的流对应表的一例;63A, 63B, and 63C each show an example of a stream correspondence table generated by the stream correspondence information table generation unit;

图64是在多路化部多路化的输送流一模式;Figure 64 is a mode of transport stream multiplexed in the multiplexing section;

图65是在多路化部多路化的输送流其他模式;Figure 65 is another mode of the transport stream multiplexed in the multiplexing section;

图66A表示在系统信息表生成部生成的NIT一例;FIG. 66A shows an example of NIT generated by the system information table generation unit;

图66B表示在系统信息表生成部生成的SDT一例;FIG. 66B shows an example of SDT generated by the system information table generation unit;

图66C表示在系统信息表生成部生成的EIT一例;FIG. 66C shows an example of EIT generated by the system information table generation unit;

图67表示在系统信息青生成部生成的PAT一例;FIG. 67 shows an example of PAT generated by the system information generation unit;

图68表示在系统信息表生成部生成的PMT一例;FIG. 68 shows an example of the PMT generated by the system information table generation unit;

图69A表示在系统信息表生成部生成的PMT中的Entry_Descriptor详细部分;FIG. 69A shows the detailed part of Entry_Descriptor in the PMT generated by the system information table generation unit;

图69B表示在系统信息表生成部生成的PMT中的NE_Component_Descriptor详细部分;FIG. 69B shows the detailed part of NE_Component_Descriptor in the PMT generated by the system information table generation unit;

69C表示在系统信息表生成部生成的PMT中的E_Information_Component_Descriptor详细部分;69C represents the detailed part of E_Information_Component_Descriptor in the PMT generated by the system information table generation unit;

图69D表示在系统信息表生成部生成的PMT中的stream_idetifirer_descriptor详细部分;FIG. 69D shows the detailed part of stream_idetifirer_descriptor in the PMT generated by the system information table generation unit;

图70是在发射部多路化的输送流的模式;Figure 70 is a schema of transport streams multiplexed at the transmit section;

图71、图72、图73分别说明数据发射装置工作的流程;Fig. 71, Fig. 72 and Fig. 73 respectively illustrate the working flow of the data transmitting device;

图74A、图74B分别表示存储在TS译码器部的滤波条件存储器中的滤波条件的一例;74A and 74B respectively show an example of filter conditions stored in the filter condition memory of the TS decoder unit;

图75A、图75B、图75C分别表示在显示部显示的显示图像的一例;75A, 75B, and 75C each show an example of a display image displayed on the display unit;

图76是说明数据接收装置全部工作的流程图;Fig. 76 is a flowchart illustrating the overall operation of the data receiving device;

图77~图80是详细说明接收控制部的流程图;77 to 80 are flowcharts illustrating the receiving control unit in detail;

图81是本发明第三实施形式的数字广播装置构成的方框图;Fig. 81 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a digital broadcasting apparatus according to the third embodiment of the present invention;

图82A、图82B分别表示在结构信息存储部中存储的流基目录用的结构信息表、页基目录用的结构信息表;82A and 82B respectively show the structure information table for the stream-based directory and the structure information table for the page-based directory stored in the structure information storage unit;

图83表示包括流基目录连接的页基目录的导航信息的一例;Fig. 83 shows an example of the navigation information of the page base content including the flow base content link;

图84A~图84C表示活动图像的模式;84A to 84C show modes of moving images;

图85、图86表示导航信息和图1~图3的场面对应关系;Figure 85 and Figure 86 represent the corresponding relationship between the navigation information and the scenes in Figures 1 to 3;

图87~图95分别表示导航信息的具体例;87 to 95 respectively show specific examples of navigation information;

图96表示导航信息表NVT的具体例;Fig. 96 shows a specific example of the navigation information table NVT;

图97表示对由发射部多路化的输送流的说明;Figure 97 shows an illustration of a Transport Stream multiplexed by a Transmitter;

图98是表示本发明第三实施形式的数据接收装置的结构的方框图;Fig. 98 is a block diagram showing the structure of a data receiving apparatus according to the third embodiment of the present invention;

图99表示展示滤波条件存储部的存储目录的滤波条件表;FIG. 99 shows a filter condition table showing a storage directory of a filter condition storage unit;

图100、图101是表示接收控制部的控制目录的流程图。100 and 101 are flowcharts showing the control list of the reception control unit.

具体实施方式 Detailed ways

在说明本发明数字广播系统广播装置及接收装置各构成之前,首先就有关根据其广播实现的对话节目概要进行解说。Before explaining the configurations of the broadcasting device and the receiving device of the digital broadcasting system of the present invention, an outline of a talk program realized by broadcasting thereof will be explained first.

数字广播系统的广播装置广播由相互连接的多个目录组成的对话节目。另一方面,接收装置接收对话节目,使与用户对话的目录一边切换一边重放。A broadcasting device of a digital broadcasting system broadcasts a dialogue program composed of a plurality of contents linked to each other. On the other hand, the receiving device receives the interactive program and plays back it while switching the contents of the interactive program with the user.

其中所谓目录是成为对话节目构成要素的信息,称利用接收装置的用户对话操作可切换的重放单位。在该目录中有称为流基目录、页基目录的两种类型。流基目录是把活动图像作为主体的目录,页基目录是把静止图像作为主体的目录。Here, the content is information that becomes a constituent element of the interactive program, and is called a playback unit that can be switched by user interactive operation of the receiving device. In this directory, there are two types called flow-based directory and page-based directory. The stream-based directory is a directory whose main content is moving images, and the page-based directory is a directory whose main content is still images.

图1表示通过接收装置一边切换一边重放的多个目录。还有图2、3表示使图1的左、右侧分别放大的图。用A-A’线左右连接图2和图3。FIG. 1 shows a plurality of contents played back while being switched by the receiving device. 2 and 3 show enlarged views of the left and right sides of FIG. 1, respectively. Connect Figure 2 and Figure 3 left and right with A-A' line.

在这些图中,100S~105S、105S’、105S”分别表示流基目录,100~106分别表示页基目录。In these figures, 100S to 105S, 105S', and 105S" each represent a stream-based directory, and 100 to 106 represent a page-based directory, respectively.

目录100S表示由显示依次介绍中国、日本、埃及等世界各国的世界旅行指南的活动图像及声音,和由根据介绍中的国家的多个键(ボタン)图像(以下仅称键)组成的菜单。各键相应于连接端的其他目录成为用户对象。在该图中,按时间顺序示意性记载引导各国的活动图像中的一些场面(或帧)。例如场面100S1表示中国旅行指南,场面100S2表示日本旅行指南。与从场面100S1向场面100S2切换的同时,场面中的菜单也从中国用菜单切换成日本用菜单。还有菜单中的各键连接目录也从中国旅行指南(图外)用目录切换成日本旅行指南用目录。The table of contents 100S shows a menu composed of moving images and sounds displaying a world travel guide sequentially introducing countries in the world such as China, Japan, and Egypt, and a plurality of button images (hereinafter simply referred to as buttons) according to the countries being introduced. The keys correspond to other directories on the connection side as user objects. In this figure, some scenes (or frames) in moving images guiding countries are schematically shown in chronological order. For example, scene 100S1 represents a travel guide to China, and scene 100S2 represents a travel guide to Japan. Simultaneously with switching from the scene 100S1 to the scene 100S2, the menu in the scene is also switched from the Chinese menu to the Japanese menu. In addition, the link list of each key in the menu is also switched from the list for the Chinese travel guide (outside the picture) to the list for the Japanese travel guide.

目录101S、102S、103S表示与目录100S相同的活动图像及声音、相应介绍中的不同国家的各菜单、介绍中国家的捕捉说明等的文字图像。The catalogs 101S, 102S, and 103S represent the same moving images and sounds as the catalog 100S, and character images such as menus for different countries being introduced, capture explanations for countries being introduced, and the like.

目录104S表示显示依次介绍大阪、奈良等的日本国内各地的日本旅行指南的活动图像及声音、由根据介绍中地域的键组成的菜单。The table of contents 104S shows a menu composed of keys corresponding to the regions being introduced, displaying moving images and sounds of Japanese travel guides that sequentially introduce various places in Japan such as Osaka and Nara.

目录105S、105S’、105S”表示与目录104S相同的活动图像及声音、相应介绍中的地域不同的各菜单。The menus 105S, 105S', and 105S" show the same moving images and sounds as those in the menu 104S, and menus with different regions in corresponding introductions.

目录100P表示显示世界天气预报的静止图像和在国别中显示日本、中国、香港等的连接端目录的键。The list 100P represents a key for displaying a still image of the world weather forecast and a link list for Japan, China, Hong Kong, etc. by country.

目录101P~106P同样表示显示连接端目录国家和地域的天气预报的静止图像和由对应连接端的键组成的菜单。Tables 101P to 106P also represent still images showing weather forecasts for the countries and regions of the list of connection terminals and menus composed of keys corresponding to the connection terminals.

包括以上的目录对话节目在接收装置中对用户所要求的目录作对话性一边切换一边重放。上述图的各箭标线表示接收装置的目录切换例。The content interactive program including the above is reproduced while interactively switching the content requested by the user in the receiving device. Each arrow line in the above figure shows an example of directory switching in the receiving device.

例如,在场面100S1的重放中,当由用户操作选择及确定“天气”键情况下,接收装置可切换成连接端目录100P的重放,如图2的箭标线表示。以此可看到使得了解世界天气的静止图像的主菜单。在该状态下,当在目录100P的重放中由用户选择及确定“返回”键的情况下,如箭标线所示,接收装置在其时刻切换成广播的场面100S2的重放。For example, in the replay of the scene 100S1, when the user selects and confirms the "weather" key, the receiving device can switch to the replay of the connection list 100P, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. 2 . This will allow you to see the main menu of still images that allow you to understand the world's weather. In this state, when the user selects and confirms the "Back" key during playback of the content 100P, the receiving device switches to playback of the broadcast scene 100S2 at that time as indicated by the arrow.

象这样,作流基目录和页基目录间的切换。Like this, switch between the stream-based directory and the page-based directory.

还有例如,在场面101S1(带有把去日本的交通和住宿作为菜单项目的子菜单)的重放中,当由用户操作选择及确定“交通”键的情况下,如箭标线所示,接收装置切换成连接端的场面102S1的重放。在此。用户可得到表示有关去日本交通的捕捉说明的文字信息。在该状态下,当选择及确定场面101S2的“返回”键的情况下,接收装置切换成场面101S2的重放。Also for example, in the replay of scene 101S1 (with a submenu with transportation and accommodation to Japan as menu items), when the user selects and confirms the "transportation" key, as shown by the arrow line , the receiving device switches to playback of the scene 102S1 at the connected end. here. The user can get textual information representing capturing instructions about transportation to Japan. In this state, when the "return" key of scene 101S2 is selected and confirmed, the receiving device switches to playback of scene 101S2.

这样,在流基目录之间作切换。In this way, switch between stream-based directories.

还有例如,在图3中的目录104P(了解日本天气的主菜单)的重放中,选择及确定“大阪”键的情况下,如上述图的箭标线所示,接收装置切换成目录106P的重放。这样用户能获得大阪的天气预报。在该状态下,当选择及确定目录104P的返回键情况下,切换成目录104P的重放。Also for example, in the playback of the list 104P (the main menu for understanding the weather in Japan) in FIG. 106P playback. In this way, users can get the weather forecast of Osaka. In this state, when the return key of the list 104P is selected and confirmed, it switches to playback of the list 104P.

象这样,在页基目录之间作切换。Like this, switch between page base directories.

以上是本发明的简要说明。以下,说明在第一实施形式中实现由流基目录组成的对话节目的数字广播系统的构成;说明在第二实施形式中实现由页基目录组成的对话节目的构成;说明在第三实施形式中实现两种类型目录混合的对话节目的构成。The above is a brief description of the present invention. In the following, the constitution of the digital broadcasting system realizing the dialogue program composed of the stream-based content in the first embodiment is described; the constitution of the dialogue program composed of the page-based content in the second embodiment is explained; Realize the composition of the dialogue program in which the two types of catalogs are mixed.

1、第1实施形式1. The first implementation form

对于由流基目录(在本实施形式中只是简称为目录)组成的对话节目,在说明其数字广播系统构成之前,先说明其原理。Before explaining the composition of the digital broadcasting system, the principle of the dialogue program composed of the stream-based content (in this embodiment, simply referred to as the content) will be explained.

图1及图2所示的目录100S通过以下部分展示,显示表示世界旅行指南的活动图像及的活动图像数据及声音数据、和表示由根据介绍中国家的多个键组成的菜单和补充说明的多个导航信息。The catalog 100S shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is shown by the following parts, displaying moving images and moving image data and sound data representing a world travel guide, and representing a menu composed of a plurality of keys according to the countries being introduced and supplementary explanations. Multiple navigation messages.

其中导航信息可在每个任意区间反映活动图像的目录设置。例如,是包括场面1001的中国旅行指南场面区间用的导航信息(作为方案1),是包括场面1002的日本旅行指南场面的区间用的导航信息(作为方案2),是埃及旅行指南场面的区间用的导航信息(作为方案N)等。Wherein the navigation information may reflect the catalog setting of the active image in each arbitrary section. For example, it is the navigation information for the section of the China travel guide scene including the scene 1001 (as plan 1), the navigation information for the section of the Japan travel guide scene including the scene 1002 (as plan 2), and the section of the Egypt travel guide scene The navigation information used (as scheme N) and so on.

目录101S~目录103S都有表示与目录100S同样的世界旅行指南的活动图像数据及声音数据,可分别有在每个任意区间反映活动图像目录的多个导航信息。Contents 101S to 103S have moving image data and audio data representing the same world travel guide as directory 100S, and may have a plurality of navigation information reflecting moving image lists for each arbitrary section.

之所以在接收装置中可从现在重放中的目录切换到流基目录,是由于利用广播装置加在活动图像数据及声音数据上,如下广播的导航信息。The reason why the receiving device can switch from the content currently being played back to the stream-based content is that the navigation information broadcast as follows is added to the video data and audio data by the broadcasting device.

即,导航信息通过广播装置经活动图像数据的重放时间重复发射。这时,由于在每个活动图像数据区域准备导航信息,所以在其区间中重复发射导航信息。That is, the navigation information is repeatedly transmitted by the broadcasting device over the playback time of the moving picture data. At this time, since the navigation information is prepared for each video data area, the navigation information is repeatedly transmitted in the interval.

例如,在包括上述场面100S1的中国旅行指南场面区间,在其重放时间区域中,重复发射方案1的导航信息。还有,在包括场面100S2的日本旅行指南场面的区间,在重放时间区域中重复发射方案2的导航信息。在埃及旅行指南区间重复发射方案N的导航信息。For example, in the China travel guide scene section including the above-mentioned scene 100S1, in its playback time zone, the navigation information of scenario 1 is repeatedly transmitted. Also, in the section including the Japan travel guide scene of scene 100S2, the navigation information of scenario 2 is repeatedly transmitted in the playback time zone. The navigation information of plan N is repeatedly transmitted in the Egyptian travel guide section.

之所以重复发射导航信息是由于接收装置在目录切换发生和从对话节目广播中间开始接收时等,能即时接收切换后的导航信息。当在每个活动图像数据区间动态设定导航信息情况下,是由于在切换时能接收最新的导航信息。The reason why the navigation information is repeatedly transmitted is that the receiving device can immediately receive the switched navigation information when the content switching occurs and reception is started in the middle of the talk program broadcast. When the navigation information is dynamically set for each video data section, it is because the latest navigation information can be received at the time of switching.

这样,在原来单向的广播系统中,实现对于用接收装置的用户操作的流基本目录切换的交互性。In this way, in the original unidirectional broadcast system, interactivity with respect to the switching of the stream basic directory by the user operation of the receiving device is realized.

1-1数字广播系统1-1 Digital Broadcasting System

图4是表示第1实施形式的数字广播系统构成的方框图。Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the digital broadcasting system of the first embodiment.

本数字广播系统包括数字广播装置5101和多个接收装置。在该图中,作为多台接收装置,仅图示了1台接收装置5121。在本数字广播系统中,通过数字广播装置5101广播由相互连接的上述流基目录(在本实施形式中简称目录)组成的对话节目,在接收装置5121中其构成是对目录一边作对话性切换一边作重放。This digital broadcasting system includes a digital broadcasting device 5101 and a plurality of receiving devices. In this figure, only one receiving device 5121 is shown as a plurality of receiving devices. In this digital broadcasting system, the digital broadcasting device 5101 broadcasts an interactive program composed of the above-mentioned stream-based directories (referred to as directories in this embodiment) connected to each other, and the receiving device 5121 is configured to perform interactive switching on the directory. while playing back.

在本实施形式中,为了使说明易懂,使用由5所示的4个目录0~3组成的对话节目例子,说明数字广播装置5101及接收装置5121的构成。In this embodiment, in order to make the description easier to understand, the configuration of the digital broadcasting apparatus 5101 and the receiving apparatus 5121 will be described using an example of a talk program consisting of four categories 0 to 3 shown in 5 .

目录0由场面01a~01h组成,由知道关西地方的天气预报的活动图像和声音(未图示)表现。Content 0 consists of scenes 01a to 01h, and is represented by moving images and sounds (not shown) for knowing the weather forecast in the Kansai region.

场面01a是断开场面。Scene 01a is a disconnection scene.

场面01b在活动图像上重迭显示02b、03b键(图像键)。02b、03b键分别连接到目录1、2,成为接收装置5121的用户目录切换操作对象。场面01c~01h也一样。In scene 01b, keys 02b and 03b (image keys) are superimposed on the moving image. The 02b and 03b keys are connected to directories 1 and 2 respectively, and become the user directory switching operation objects of the receiving device 5121 . The same goes for scenes 01c-01h.

而且,目录1由场面11a~11h组成,加在与目录0的天气预报同样的活动图像、声音(未图示)上,如上述图追加的文字13b~13h信息。文字信息13b~13h是补充最高气温、最低气温、湿度、降水概率等活动图像场面的信息。Furthermore, the list 1 is composed of scenes 11a to 11h, and is added to the moving image and sound (not shown) similar to the weather forecast of the list 0, and the text 13b to 13h information is added as in the above figure. The text information 13b to 13h is information supplementing the scene of the moving image such as the highest temperature, the lowest temperature, the humidity, and the probability of precipitation.

场面11b的连接到目录0的键12b和文字信息13b显示在活动图像上。场面11c~11h也一样。The key 12b and text information 13b of the scene 11b connected to the list 0 are displayed on the moving picture. The same applies to scenes 11c to 11h.

目录2通过使了解关东地方天气预报的活动图像和声音(未图示)来表现。场面21b中的键22b、键23b分别连接到目录3、目录0。The content 2 is represented by moving images and sounds (not shown) for understanding the Kanto regional weather forecast. The keys 22b and 23b in the scene 21b are connected to the directory 3 and the directory 0, respectively.

目录3通过与目录2同样的活动图像和声音(未图示)表现,再追加文字信息。场面31b中的键32b与目录2连接。The list 3 is represented by moving images and sounds (not shown) similar to those of the list 2, and text information is added thereto. The key 32b in the scene 31b is linked to the directory 2 .

由所述的4个目录组成的对话节目在接收装置5121中,一边对用户所要求的目录作对话性切换一边作如下重放。The dialogue program composed of the above-mentioned four categories is played back in the receiving device 5121 as follows while interactively switching the categories requested by the user.

例如,在接收装置5121中,当接受在场面0场面01b的重放中选择和确定键02b的用户操作的情况下,接收装置5121把重放切换到连接端的目录1中。在该情况下,因各目录被多路化使重放时间重迭,所以目录1不从开头重放,从与目录0的切换时间同一时间的场面被重放。由于目录1包括与目录0同样的活动图像及声音,所以查看目录0的用户利用该切换,不改变活动图像和声音,得到根据文字信息的天气预服补充说明。For example, in the receiving device 5121, when accepting the user's operation of the selection and confirmation key 02b in the playback of the scene 0 scene 01b, the receiving device 5121 switches the playback to the list 1 of the connected terminal. In this case, since the content is multiplexed and the playback time overlaps, the content 1 is not reproduced from the beginning, but the scene at the same time as the switching time of the content 0 is reproduced. Since the directory 1 includes the same moving images and sounds as the directory 0, the user viewing the directory 0 can use this switch without changing the moving images and sounds, and obtain supplementary instructions for weather pre-service based on text information.

1-2、数字广播装置51011-2. Digital broadcasting device 5101

在图4中,数字广播装置5101备有:发射数据存储部5102、多路信息存储部5104、数据多路化部4103、系统信息表生成部5105、发射部5106,如上所述的对话节目置于发射波上广播。In FIG. 4, a digital broadcasting apparatus 5101 is provided with: a transmission data storage unit 5102, a multiplexing information storage unit 5104, a data multiplexing unit 4103, a system information table generating unit 5105, and a transmitting unit 5106. broadcast on the transmit wave.

发射数据存储部5102具有磁盘等记录媒体,存储构成对话节目的所有目录数据。一个目录数据用表示活动图像数据和声音数据等的展示(プレゼンテシ-ヨン)信息、往其他目录的高连接、键、表示文字信息等的导航信息表示。例如,图5各目录的活动图像及声音分别包括在展示信息中。还有,在活动图像上显示的键和文字信息、还有向键提供的高连接包括在导航信息中。The transmission data storage unit 5102 has a recording medium such as a magnetic disk, and stores all content data constituting the talk program. One category data is represented by presentation information indicating video data and audio data, and navigation information indicating links to other categories, keys, and text information. For example, moving images and sounds of each category in FIG. 5 are included in the presentation information. Also, key and text information displayed on the moving image, and hyperlinks provided to the keys are included in the navigation information.

数据多路化部5103生成使目录数据多路化的多路化流,而所述目录数据存储在发射数据存储部5102中。具体来说,数据多路化部5103对各目录的展示信息作多路化,使得重放时间重迭,同时,在同一目录的展示信息重放时间,使导航信息重复多路化。之所以使导航信息重复多路是由于不管在接收装置何时切换目录,也能可靠地接收切换端的目录的导航信息。The data multiplexing section 5103 generates a multiplexed stream that multiplexes the content data stored in the transmission data storage section 5102 . Specifically, the data multiplexing unit 5103 multiplexes the presentation information of each category so that the playback time overlaps, and at the same time repeatedly multiplexes the navigation information at the playback time of the presentation information of the same category. The reason for multiplexing the navigation information is to reliably receive the navigation information of the directory at the switching end no matter when the receiving device switches the directory.

所述多路化流根据DVB-SI规格、MPEG2系统规格的规定作为输送流的一部分生成所述多路化流。其中输送流是在数字卫星广播中一个载波频带内多路了的多个数字数据流的集合,在广播频道中有相当5~6个频道的频带。The multiplexed stream is generated as a part of the transport stream according to the DVB-SI standard and the MPEG2 system standard. Among them, the transport stream is a collection of multiple digital data streams multiplexed in one carrier frequency band in digital satellite broadcasting, and there are frequency bands corresponding to 5 to 6 channels in the broadcasting channel.

多路信息存储部5104在由数据多路化部5103形成的多路化流的生成中,存储必要的各种参数。The multiplexing information storage unit 5104 stores various parameters necessary for generating the multiplexed stream formed by the data multiplexing unit 5103 .

系统信息表生成部5105参照多路信息存储部5104,生成用于接收装置5121选择多路流所必要的(由多个表组成)系统信息表。The system information table generation unit 5105 refers to the multiplex information storage unit 5104 and generates a system information table (consisting of a plurality of tables) necessary for the receiving device 5121 to select a multiplexed stream.

发射部5106向输送流多路化发射由数据多路化部5103生成的多路化流、和由系统信息表生成部5105生成的系统信息表。这里所谓系统信息表是指这样的各种表类,记录用于通过输送流识别表示本发明对话节目的多路化流的信息。The transmitting unit 5106 multiplexes and transmits the multiplexed stream generated by the data multiplexing unit 5103 and the system information table generated by the system information table generating unit 5105 to the transport stream. Here, the system information table refers to various types of tables that record information for identifying the multiplexed stream representing the interactive program of the present invention from the transport stream.

1-2-1、发射数据存储部51021-2-1. Transmission data storage unit 5102

在图4中,发射数据存储部5102具有展示信息存储部5107、导航信息存储部5108、结构信息存储部5109,构成1个对话节目(应用)的多个目录数据被分成展示信息和导航信息存储,还存储表示展示信息和导航信息对应关系的结构信息。In FIG. 4, the transmission data storage unit 5102 has a presentation information storage unit 5107, a navigation information storage unit 5108, and a structure information storage unit 5109, and a plurality of catalog data constituting one dialogue program (application) is divided into presentation information and navigation information storage. , and store structural information representing the corresponding relationship between display information and navigation information.

1-2-1-1、展示信息存储部51071-2-1-1. Display information storage unit 5107

展示信息存储部5107存储用包括在各目录中的活动图像数据和声音数据等表示的展示信息。The presentation information storage unit 5107 stores presentation information represented by moving image data, audio data, and the like included in each directory.

图6A、图6B中,每个经过的场面(或帧)表示作为图5所示目录的展示信息使用的活动图像数据。In FIGS. 6A and 6B , each passing scene (or frame) represents moving image data used as presentation information of the list shown in FIG. 5 .

图6A所示的活动图像数据5201具有文件名“Video.0.m2v”表示记录关西天气预报指南的活动图像。该活动图像是在图5所示的目录0和目录1中公共的展示信息。The moving image data 5201 shown in FIG. 6A has a file name "Video.0.m2v" indicating a moving image recording a Kansai weather forecast guide. This moving image is common presentation information in the directory 0 and the directory 1 shown in FIG. 5 .

图6B所示的活动图像数据5202具有文件名“Video.1.m2V”,表示记录关东天气预报指南的活动图像。该活动图像是在图5所示的目录2和目录3中公共的展示信息。The moving image data 5202 shown in FIG. 6B has a file name "Video.1.m2V" and represents a moving image in which the Kanto weather forecast guide is recorded. This moving image is common presentation information in the directory 2 and the directory 3 shown in FIG. 5 .

这些活动图像数据5201、5202、分别根据ISO/IEC13818-2(MPEG2视频)规格等以压缩的形式,存储在展示信息存储部5107中。此外,图像数据的形式也可是其他的。These moving image data 5201, 5202 are stored in the presentation information storage unit 5107 in a compressed form according to the ISO/IEC13818-2 (MPEG2 video) standard or the like. In addition, the format of image data may be other.

还有图6C、图6D表示作为展示信息使用的声音数据之一例。6C and 6D show examples of audio data used as presentation information.

图6C所示的活动图像数据5203具有文件名“Aidio.0.m2a”,是与图6A所示的活动图像数据5201同步重放的声音数据。该声音是在图5所示的目录0和目录1中共用的展示信息。The moving image data 5203 shown in FIG. 6C has a file name "Aidio.0.m2a", and is audio data reproduced in synchronization with the moving image data 5201 shown in FIG. 6A. This sound is presentation information shared by the content 0 and the content 1 shown in FIG. 5 .

图6D所示的活动图像数据5204具有文件“Aidio.1.m2a”,是与图6B所示的活动图像数据5202同步重放的声音数据。该声音是在图5所示的目录2和目录3中共用的展示信息。The moving image data 5204 shown in FIG. 6D has the file "Aidio.1.m2a", and is audio data reproduced in synchronization with the moving image data 5202 shown in FIG. 6B. This sound is presentation information shared by the content 2 and the content 3 shown in FIG. 5 .

这些声音数据分别根据ISO/IEC 13818-3(MPEG2视频)规格等以压缩的形式存储着。此外,声音数据的形式也可是其他的。These audio data are stored in a compressed form according to the ISO/IEC 13818-3 (MPEG2 video) standard or the like. In addition, the format of the audio data may be other.

1-2-1-2、导航信息51081-2-1-2, navigation information 5108

导航信息存储部5108存储构成各目录的导航信息。在导航信息中,包括往其他目录的高连接信息、和其导航信息表示有效时间的有效时间信息。高连接信息作为用于实现接收装置的用户对话操作的目标记述着。并且有效时间信息的附加是用于能够根据活动图像数据等的展示信息内依次更新修改导航信息的目录。The navigation information storage unit 5108 stores navigation information constituting each category. The navigation information includes hyperlink information to other content and effective time information indicating the effective time of the navigation information. The high connection information is described as an object for realizing the user's interactive operation of the receiving device. Furthermore, the addition of valid time information is for sequentially updating and modifying the contents of the navigation information in the presentation information such as moving image data.

图7表示对应于图5所示的场面01b(更正确为场面01b~01d)的导航信息的一例。该导航信息5301具有文件名(Navi0-0.nif),包括:目标定义表(Object Definition Tavle)5302、处理器定义表(HsndlerDefinition Table)5303、高连接表(Hyperlink Table)5304、位标志表(Bitmap Table)5305、有效时间表(Time Information Table)5306。FIG. 7 shows an example of navigation information corresponding to the scene 01b (more precisely, scenes 01b to 01d) shown in FIG. 5 . The navigation information 5301 has a file name (Navi0-0.nif), including: a target definition table (Object Definition Tavle) 5302, a processor definition table (HsndlerDefinition Table) 5303, a high connection table (Hyperlink Table) 5304, a bit flag table ( Bitmap Table) 5305, effective time table (Time Information Table) 5306.

目标定义表5302是表示重迭在展示信息中所含的活动数据上显示的目标类别和属性的信息一览表,具体包括以下各栏。The object definition table 5302 is an information list showing object categories and attributes displayed superimposed on the activity data included in the presentation information, and specifically includes the following columns.

“目标索引(Object Index)”栏表示在每个目标中区别目标的值(目标号)。The column "Object Index (Object Index)" indicates a value (object number) for distinguishing an object in each object.

“类型(Type)”栏表示目标类型。在目标类型中,有提供高连接的键显示用的键目标(Button)、静止图像和文字信息显示用的图像目标(Picture)等。在该例中,图5所示的键02b、03b分别作为目标索引值0、一个键目标记述着。并且图5所示的文字信息13b等作为图像目标记述着。The column of "Type (Type)" shows the object type. Among the object types, there are key objects (Button) for displaying keys that provide high connection, image objects (Picture) for displaying still images and character information, and the like. In this example, the keys 02b and 03b shown in FIG. 5 are described as an object index value 0 and a key object, respectively. Also, character information 13b and the like shown in FIG. 5 are described as image objects.

所谓“X”栏和“Y”栏是表示在键或图像等的各目标的显示画面上的显示基准位置的座标值。以此确定图5所示的键02b、03b的显示位置。The "X" column and the "Y" column are coordinate values indicating display reference positions on the display screen of each object such as a key or an image. In this way, the display positions of the keys 02b and 03b shown in FIG. 5 are determined.

“处理器(Handler)”栏在处理定义表5303中的处理器内,表示用于指定对应于目标的处理器是哪个的处理器索引值(Handoer Index)。其中所谓处理器就是原本利用接收装置5121以可执行的编程语言记述的程序或指令字。尤其是对于键目标的处理器,包括利用接收装置5121的用户操作在当确定(activate)相应键时执行的目录切换指令。The "Handler" column indicates a Handler Index value (Handler Index) for specifying which Handler is the Handler corresponding to the target among the Handlers in the Handling Definition Table 5303. The so-called processor is a program or an instruction word originally described in an executable programming language by the receiving device 5121 . In particular, the processor for the key object includes a directory switching instruction executed when the corresponding key is activated by user operation of the receiving means 5121 .

“标准位标志(Normal Bitmap)”栏在标准状态(或非选择状态)时,上述X、Y座标表示的显示位置上,在位标志表5305中的位标志图像内,表示用于指定应表示哪个位标志图像(表示键图像和静止图像信息的图像)的位标志索引值。所谓非选择状态,称在接收装置中选择键的状态。When the "Standard Bitmap (Normal Bitmap)" column is in the standard state (or non-selection state), on the display position indicated by the above-mentioned X, Y coordinates, in the bit mark image in the bit mark table 5305, it is indicated that it is used for specifying the application A bit flag index value indicating which bit flag image (image representing key image and still image information). The so-called non-selection state refers to a state in which a key is selected in the receiving device.

处理器定义表5303记录在目标定义表5302的目标上指定的处理器(原本)。具体说,包括以下各栏。“处理器索引(Handler Link Index)”栏表示区别处理器的值(处理器号)。“原本(Script)”栏表示对应处理器索引的处理器(原本)。尤其是对于键目标的处理器,如上述图所示,包括象“goto_contents(Hyper Index 0)”的目录切换指令。The processor definition table 5303 records the processor (original) specified on the target in the target definition table 5302 . Specifically, the following columns are included. The "Handler Link Index" column indicates the value (handler number) that distinguishes the processor. The "script" column indicates the processor (script) corresponding to the processor index. Especially for key object handlers, as shown in the above figure, including directory switching instructions like "goto_contents(Hyper Index 0)".

高连接表5304表示对于处理器定义表5303中的目录切换指令的指引数。具体来说包括以下各栏。“高连接索引(Hyperlink Index)”栏表示区别高连接的值(高连接号)。“目录号”栏是高连接信息本身,作为目录切换指令的引数表示连接端的目录号。例如,称为上述“goto_contents(Hyper Link Index 0)”的目录切换指令,与结果“goto_contents(Contents 1)”是相同的,在接收装置5121中在相关键目标成为确定状态时执行。The high connection table 5304 indicates the number of references to the directory switching instruction in the processor definition table 5303 . Specifically, the following columns are included. The "Hyperlink Index" column indicates the value (hyperlink number) that distinguishes hyperlinks. The "directory number" column is high connection information itself, which is used as an argument of the directory switching command to indicate the directory number of the connection end. For example, the directory switching instruction called "goto_contents(Hyper Link Index 0)" mentioned above is the same as the result "goto_contents(Contents 1)", and is executed when the relevant key object becomes determined in the receiving device 5121.

位标志表5305记录在目标定义表5302的“标准位标志”及“聚焦位标志”栏中指定的位标志数据。具体包括以下栏。“位标志索引(BitmapIndex)”栏表示区别位标志数据的值(位标志号)。“位标志数据(Bitmapdata)”栏记录位标志数据,所述位标志数据表示在展示信息上重迭显示的键和文字信息。图5表示的场面01b的键02b,在标准状态显示位标志索引0的“大阪详情”,在选择状态显示位标志索引1的“大阪详情”(明显改变颜色和浓度)。键03b在标准状态表示位标志索引2的“参见关东”,在选择状态显示位标志索引3的“参见关东”。The bit flag table 5305 records the bit flag data specified in the "standard bit flag" and "focus bit flag" columns of the object definition table 5302 . Specifically include the following columns. The "bitmap index (BitmapIndex)" column indicates a value (bitmap number) for distinguishing bitmap data. The "bitmap data" column records bitmap data representing key and text information superimposed on the presentation information. The key 02b of the scene 01b shown in FIG. 5 displays "Details of Osaka" of the flag index 0 in the standard state, and displays "Details of Osaka" of the flag index 1 in the selected state (obviously changes the color and density). The key 03b indicates "See Kanto" of the bit mark index 2 in the standard state, and displays "See Kanto" of the bit mark index 3 in the selected state.

有效时间表5306记录这导航信息成为有效的有效开始时间“start_time”,和成为无效的有效终止时间“end_time”。这些时间用设对话广播节目的广播开始时间为“0”的相对时间(秒单位)指定。The valid time table 5306 records the valid start time "start_time" when the navigation information becomes valid, and the valid end time "end_time" which becomes invalid. These times are designated by relative times (in units of seconds) where the broadcast start time of the talk broadcast program is set to "0".

图8表示对应图5所示的场面11b的导航信息的一例。该导航信息5401有文件名“Navil-nif”,包括目标定义表5402、处理器定义表5403、位标志表5404、有效时间表5405。Fig. 8 shows an example of navigation information corresponding to the scene 11b shown in Fig. 5 . The navigation information 5401 has a file name "Navil-nif", and includes an object definition table 5402, a processor definition table 5403, a bit flag table 5404, and an effective time table 5405.

目标定义表5402的目标索引值的“0”行,目标类型为“键”,显示画面上的目标显示左上端位置的座标值为X=20、Y=400,在确定该目标时启处理器索引值“0”的处理器,在非选择状态表示位标志索引值“0”的位标志,在选择状态表示使用位标志索引值“1”的位标志。目标定义表5402的目标索引值为“1”的行表示目标类型是“图像”,显示画面上的目标左上端位置的座标值X=300、Y=20,位标志索引值使用“2”的位标志。The "0" row of the target index value of the target definition table 5402, the target type is "key", the coordinate value of the target display upper left end position on the display screen is X=20, Y=400, and the processing is started when the target is determined A processor with a register index value of "0" represents a bit flag with a bit flag index value of "0" in a non-selected state, and a bit flag with a bit flag index value of "1" in a selected state. The row of the object definition table 5402 whose object index value is "1" indicates that the object type is "image", the coordinate values of the upper left end position of the object on the display screen are X=300, Y=20, and the bit flag index value uses "2" bit flags.

并且,处理器定义表5403记录处理器索引值为“0”被启动时执行的原本“goto_entry”。该原本是这样的指令,在对话节目的目录中,指示切换成在接收装置中应最先重放的目录即重放开始时的散焦目录。Also, the processor definition table 5403 records the original "goto_entry" that is executed when the processor index value is "0". This command is originally a command to switch to the content to be reproduced first in the receiving device, that is, the defocused content at the start of reproduction, among the content of the talk program.

位标志表5404记录位标志索引值为“0”、“1”、“2”的位标志数据。其中,位标志索引值“2”的位标志表示图5所示的文字信息13b。The bit flag table 5404 records bit flag data whose bit flag index values are "0", "1" and "2". Among them, the bit flag with the bit flag index value "2" indicates the character information 13b shown in FIG. 5 .

还有,有效时间表5405定义:导航信息5401的有效开始时间是从广播开始时间经5秒的时间,有效终止时间是从广播开始经65秒的时间。即,该导航信息5401表示从广播开始经65秒之后不被使用。In addition, the valid time table 5405 defines that the valid start time of the navigation information 5401 is 5 seconds from the broadcast start time, and the valid end time is 65 seconds from the broadcast start. That is, this navigation information 5401 indicates that it will not be used after 65 seconds from the start of the broadcast.

图9的导航信息5501、图10的导航信息5601、图11的导航信息5701也都一样表示在导航信息存储部5108中存储着导航信息的例子,分别相应于图5所示的目录0的场面01e、目录1的场面11e、目录2的场面21b。The navigation information 5501 in FIG. 9 , the navigation information 5601 in FIG. 10 , and the navigation information 5701 in FIG. 11 also show an example in which navigation information is stored in the navigation information storage unit 5108 in the same way, corresponding to the scene of the catalog 0 shown in FIG. 5 . 01e, scene 11e of directory 1, scene 21b of directory 2.

1-2-1-3、结构信息存储部51091-2-1-3. Structure information storage unit 5109

结构信息存储部5109存储作为构成各目录的展示信息和导航信息组的一览的结构信息表、和进入信息。进入信息存储着表示在该接收装置5121中开始对话节目重放时最初重放的进入目录号的进入信息。The structure information storage unit 5109 stores a structure information table which is a list of display information and navigation information groups constituting each content, and entry information. The entry information stores entry information indicating the entry directory number to be reproduced first when the reproducing of the talk program is started in the receiving device 5121 .

图12是表示在结构信息存储部5109中存储的结构信息表之一例的图。结构信息表5801每逢目录号表示各目录中包括的图像数据、声音数据和导航信息的组合。目录号是在存储于发射数据存储部5102的多个目录中,唯一地识别一个目录的号。然而目录号虽然原则上对应于一个目录,但也有例外地对应于多个的情况。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a structure information table stored in the structure information storage unit 5109 . The structure information table 5801 indicates, for each directory number, a combination of image data, audio data, and navigation information included in each directory. The catalog number is a number for uniquely identifying one catalog among plural catalogs stored in the transmission data storage unit 5102 . However, although the catalog number corresponds to one catalog in principle, there are exceptionally cases where a plurality of catalog numbers correspond to each other.

上述图中的结构信息表5801中目录号0的行表示,图5所示的目录0由通过存储在展示信息存储部5107中的文件名“Video.m2v”识别的图像数据,和由文件名“Audio0.m2a”识别的声音数据、和由存储在导航信息存储部5108中的文件名“Navi0-0.nif”、“Navi0-1.nif”、“Navi-2nif”、“Navi0-3.nif”、“Navi0-4.nif”识别的导航信息组构成。记载在“导航信息”栏上的各导航信息以有效开始时间早晚为序记载。其他行也一样。The row of the directory number 0 in the structure information table 5801 in the above figure indicates that the directory 0 shown in FIG. The audio data identified by "Audio0.m2a" and the file names "Navi0-0.nif", "Navi0-1.nif", "Navi-2nif", "Navi0-3. nif", "Navi0-4.nif" to identify the navigation information group composition. Each navigation information recorded in the "Navigation Information" column is described in order of effective start time. The same goes for other lines.

图13是表示存储在结构信息存储部5109中的进入信息之一例。进入信息5901表示存储在发射数据存储部5102中的应用的进入目录的目录号为“0”。FIG. 13 shows an example of entry information stored in the configuration information storage unit 5109 . Entry information 5901 indicates that the directory number of the entry directory of the application stored in transmission data storage unit 5102 is "0".

1-2-2、多路信息存储部51041-2-2. Multi-channel information storage unit 5104

多路信息存储部5104作为多路信息表存储用于在广播用的MPEG2输送流中使对话节目多路化为标识符及区域等的资源分配信息。The multiplex information storage unit 5104 stores, as a multiplex information table, resource allocation information for multiplexing a talk program into identifiers, areas, and the like in an MPEG2 transport stream for broadcasting.

图14表示存储在多路信息存储部5104中的多路信息之一例。上述图中的多路信息表6001是表示对于对话节目及其构成要素的各种标识符和传输容量(传送容量)分配的表。FIG. 14 shows an example of multiple information stored in the multiple information storage unit 5104 . The multiplex information table 6001 in the above figure is a table showing the assignment of various identifiers and transmission capacity (transmission capacity) to interactive programs and their components.

在同图中,“Original_network_id、transport_stream_id、serVice_id、event_id”各栏6002~6005在广播用MPEG2输送流中使对话节目多路时,表示分配给对话节目的各种标识符值。通常的卫星数字广播系统中,通过1个卫星(网络)使用多个MPEG2输送流分别不同的载波进行发射。各广播节目在任一MPEG2输送流中根据ETS360 488(DVB-SI)标准,提供original_network_id、transpot_stream_id、service_id、event_id而被多路化。In the figure, columns 6002 to 6005 of "Original_network_id, transport_stream_id, service_id, and event_id" indicate various identifier values assigned to interactive programs when the interactive programs are multiplexed in the broadcast MPEG2 transport stream. In a typical satellite digital broadcasting system, a plurality of MPEG2 transport streams are transmitted using different carriers through one satellite (network). Each broadcast program is multiplexed by providing original_network_id, transpot_stream_id, service_id, and event_id in any MPEG2 transport stream according to the ETS360 488 (DVB-SI) standard.

其中,original_network_id是单意地识别1个网络的标识符。Among them, original_network_id is an identifier for uniquely identifying one network.

transport_stream_id是在1个网络中单意地识别1个输送流的标识符。The transport_stream_id is an identifier for uniquely identifying one transport stream in one network.

Service_id是在1个输送流中单意地识别1种服务的标识符。Service_id is an identifier for uniquely identifying one type of service in one transport stream.

event_id是在一种服务中单意地识别1个事件的标识符。event_id is an identifier for uniquely identifying one event in one service.

其中所说的事件是相当于已有的模拟广播的1个节目。上述对话节目作为1个事件而被多路。数字广播的事件称为若干部分的集合。Here, the event is equivalent to one program of conventional analog broadcasting. The above talk program is multiplexed as one event. An event of digital broadcasting is called a collection of parts.

所谓部分(コンポ-ネント)是ISO/IEC 13818-1(MPEG2系统)规格的用1个DID(分组标识符)识别的流(程序单元),表示活动图像、声音等的节目构成要素之一。例如,图12所示的各个图像数据、各个声音数据、同一目录中的导航信息的集合是各部分。A part is a stream (program unit) identified by a DID (packet identifier) in the ISO/IEC 13818-1 (MPEG2 system) standard, and represents one of program constituent elements such as moving images and audio. For example, a set of individual image data, individual audio data, and navigation information in the same directory shown in FIG. 12 is each part.

服务是归拢事件的时间顺序、相当于已有的模拟广播的1个信道。所述对话节目成为1个服务时间的一部分。The service is a chronological sequence of events, and corresponds to one channel of an existing analog broadcast. The dialogue program becomes part of 1 service time.

输送流是多个服务的集合。输送流及服务范围(传输容量)虽然考虑各种分配,但比如输送流为约30Mbps、1个服务约为5Mpbs等。该情况下,1个输送流相当于6信道。并且,作为上述事件的对话节目的传输容量由于包括活动图像,所以因目录而异。A delivery stream is a collection of multiple services. The transport stream and the service range (transmission capacity) consider various allocations, for example, the transport stream is about 30 Mbps, and one service is about 5 Mpbs. In this case, one transport stream corresponds to six channels. Also, the transmission capacity of the talk program as the above-mentioned event varies depending on the content because moving images are included.

通过根据DVB-SI标准的数字广播系统广播的节目(事件),利用指定上述orginal_network_id、transport_stream_id、service_id、event_id组,可在所有数字广播系统中单意地指定。有关original_network_id、transport_stream_id、service_id、event_id的细节,在DVB-SI规格书中描述。Programs (events) broadcast by the digital broadcasting system conforming to the DVB-SI standard can be unilaterally specified in all digital broadcasting systems by specifying the above-mentioned group of orginal_network_id, transport_stream_id, service_id, and event_id. Details about original_network_id, transport_stream_id, service_id, and event_id are described in the DVB-SI specification.

“PMT-PID”栏6006、“PCR_PID”栏6007表示分配给名PMT(ProgramMap Table)、PCR(Program Clock Reference)的PID之值。其中所谓PMT是在输送流中多路化的系统信息表之一,是表示在事件中包括的活动图像数据和声音数据等(部分)的各个流和对其传输的分组标识符(PacketIdentifier:PID)对应关系的表。并且所谓PCR是系统信息表之一,在数字广播装置5101中是成为在多路化流中使各目录数据多路时的基准时的时间信息,在接收装置5121中里成为使事件重放时的基准的时间信息。The "PMT-PID" column 6006 and the "PCR_PID" column 6007 indicate the values of the PIDs assigned to the names PMT (Program Map Table) and PCR (Program Clock Reference). Among them, the so-called PMT is one of the system information tables multiplexed in the transport stream, and is a packet identifier (PacketIdentifier: PID) indicating each stream (part) of moving image data and audio data included in the event and its transmission. ) table of corresponding relations. The so-called PCR is one of the system information tables, and in the digital broadcasting apparatus 5101, it is time information used as a reference when each content data is multiplexed in the multiplexed stream, and in the receiving apparatus 5121, it is time information when an event is reproduced. Baseline time information.

“NE_Component(0)_Bitrate”栏6008、“NE_component(0)_pid”栏6009分别表示分配给传输包括在目录0中的导航信息者的部分的传输速率和PID值。“NE_component(1)_Bitrate”栏以下也一样,此外,NE是Navigation element的缩略。The "NE_Component(0)_Bitrate" column 6008 and the "NE_component(0)_pid" column 6009 indicate the transmission rate and the PID value of the part assigned to the person who transmits the navigation information included in the directory 0, respectively. The same applies below the "NE_component(1)_Bitrate" column. In addition, NE is an abbreviation of Navigation element.

“VE_component(0)-Bitrate”栏6010、“VE_component(0)_pid”栏6011分别表示分配给传输相应于后述的部分标记(コンポ-ネントタグ)值“0X00”的图像数据的部分的传输速率,和PID值。“VE_component(1)_Bitrate”以下也一样。此外,VE为Video Element的缩略。The "VE_component(0)-Bitrate" column 6010 and the "VE_component(0)_pid" column 6011 respectively indicate the transmission rate assigned to the part that transmits the image data corresponding to the component tag (compo-nettag) value "0X00" described later, and PID values. The same applies to "VE_component(1)_Bitrate" and below. In addition, VE is the abbreviation of Video Element.

“AE_component(0)_Bitrate”栏6012和“AE_component(0)_pid”栏6013是分别表示分配给传输相应于后述部分标记值“0X00”的图像数据的部分之传输速率,和PID值。“AE_component(1)_Bitrate”以下也一样。此外AE是10 Element的缩略形式。The "AE_component(0)_Bitrate" column 6012 and the "AE_component(0)_pid" column 6013 respectively indicate the transfer rate assigned to the part that transmits the image data corresponding to the part flag value "0X00" described later, and the PID value. The same applies to "AE_component(1)_Bitrate" and below. In addition, AE is an abbreviated form of 10 Element.

另外,在本实施形式中,为了识别导航信息,虽然确保传输只是目录数的导航信息的PID数,但传输导航信息的PID数也可比目录数少比如也可以为1个。这种情况下,作为识别导航信息的信息,只要使用PID和其他参数(例如根据MPEG2规格的table_id_extension等)的组合就行。即便关于包括在展示信息中的图像数据和声音数据,同时地使PID和其他参照(例如设定MPEG2规格的tream_id等)组合也可识别。这样在输送流中即使限制可使用的PID数,也可发射超过其限制的多个目录。In addition, in this embodiment, in order to identify the navigation information, although the number of PIDs that transmits only the number of directories is ensured, the number of PIDs that transmits the navigation information may be less than the number of directories, for example, one. In this case, it is sufficient to use a combination of PID and other parameters (for example, table_id_extension according to the MPEG2 standard) as information for identifying navigation information. It is also possible to identify the image data and audio data included in the presentation information by combining the PID with other references (eg, stream_id set in the MPEG2 standard, etc.) at the same time. In this way, even if the number of PIDs that can be used in the delivery stream is limited, multiple directories that exceed the limit can be sent.

1-2-3数据多路化部分51031-2-3 Data multiplexing section 5103

在图4中,数据多路化部5103,首先(a)在存储在发射数据存储部5102中的每个目录中分配各种标识符(制成目录标识符分配表),(b)向各导航信息分别提供方案号(制成方案号分配表),加之(c)向导航信息表生成部5111指示制成导航信息表,(d)向系统信息表生成部5105指示生成系统信息表,(e)根据这些表多路化各展示信息,使其重放时间重达,同时在各展示信息的重放时间区域中,使对应于此的导航信息作多次重复多路。因此,数据多路化部5103备有导航信息表生成部5111、多路化部5112。In FIG. 4, the data multiplexing unit 5103 first (a) assigns various identifiers to each category stored in the transmitted data storage unit 5102 (creates a category identifier assignment table), and (b) assigns The navigation information provides a plan number (preparation of a plan number allocation table), and (c) instructs the navigation information table generation part 5111 to prepare a navigation information table, (d) instructs the system information table generation part 5105 to generate a system information table, ( e) Each display information is multiplexed based on these tables so that the playback time is repeated, and at the same time, the navigation information corresponding to this is repeated multiple times in the playback time area of each display information. Therefore, the data multiplexing unit 5103 includes a navigation information table generating unit 5111 and a multiplexing unit 5112 .

上述(c)由导航信息表生成部分5111执行,上述(a)、(b)、(c)由多路控制部5110航行。并且上述(d)由系统信息表生成部5105执行。The above (c) is executed by the navigation information table generating section 5111 , and the above (a), (b), and (c) are navigated by the multiplex control section 5110 . And the above (d) is executed by the system information table generating unit 5105 .

1-2-3-1多路控制部51101-2-3-1 Multi-channel control unit 5110

多路控制部5110由CPU、存储程序的ROM、工作用RAM等组成,作成目录标识符分配表和方案号分配表[上述(a)、(b)]根据这些表制成各展示信息及各导航信息的多路指示,通知给多路化部[上述(e)]。其中所谓多路指示就有关展示信息中的活动图像数据和声音数据、各个导航信息,包括在其多路化中所需的各种标识符、输送流中的多路开始位置、传输速度等。The multiplexing control unit 5110 is composed of a CPU, a ROM for storing programs, and a working RAM, etc., and creates a directory identifier allocation table and a plan number allocation table [above (a), (b)]. Based on these tables, each display information and each The multiplexing instruction of the navigation information is notified to the multiplexing unit [above (e)]. Among them, the so-called multi-channel indication refers to moving image data and audio data in the presentation information, various navigation information, including various identifiers required for multiplexing, multiplexing start position in the transport stream, transmission speed, and the like.

对(e)作进一步详述,多路控制部5110就有关展示信息中的活动图像数据和声音数据,作成多路指示,使其重放时间迭合。例如把那些多路开始位置定为同一时间作成多路指示。还有关于导航信息产生多路指示,使得经过包括其的目录中的展示信息的重放时间区域反复作多路。即,对导航信息设定多个多路开始位置,作成多个多路指示。To describe (e) in more detail, the multiplexing control unit 5110 creates a multiplexing instruction for the moving image data and audio data in the presentation information so that the playback time is superimposed. For example, setting those multiple start positions at the same time makes multiple instructions. Also with respect to the navigation information, a multiplexing indication is generated so that the multiplexing is repeated through the playback time region of the presentation information in the table of contents including it. That is, a plurality of multi-way start positions are set in the navigation information, and a plurality of multi-way instructions are created.

1-2-3-2多路控制部5110:(a)作成目录标识符分配表1-2-3-2 Multiplexing control unit 5110: (a) Create directory identifier assignment table

多路控制部5110由发射部5106启动,读出存储在结构信息存储部5109和多路信息存储部5104中的结构信息表和多路信息表,作成目录标识符分配表。The multiplexing control unit 5110 is activated by the transmitting unit 5106, reads the configuration information table and the multiplexing information table stored in the configuration information storage unit 5109 and the multiplexing information storage unit 5104, and creates a directory identifier assignment table.

图15是表示以图12所示的结构信息表5801和图14所示的多路信息表6001为基础生成的目录标识符分配表之一例的图。FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a directory identifier allocation table generated based on the configuration information table 5801 shown in FIG. 12 and the multiplex information table 6001 shown in FIG. 14 .

在目录标识符分配表6101中,对应于各目录号6102,在“orig_nw_id”栏6103、“ts_id”栏6104、“VE_SVC_id”栏6105、“VE_event_id”栏6106中,写入多路信息表6001的“original_network_id”栏6002、“transport_stream_id 6003、“service_id”6004、“event_id”栏6005的各值。同样在“AE_SVC_id栏6108、“AE_event_id”栏6109中也写入“service_id”栏6003、“event_id”栏6005的各值。“NE_SVC_id”栏6111、“NE_event_id栏6112也一样。In the directory identifier assignment table 6101, corresponding to each directory number 6102, the "orig_nw_id" column 6103, the "ts_id" column 6104, the "VE_SVC_id" column 6105, and the "VE_event_id" column 6106 are written in the multiple information table 6001. Values in "original_network_id" column 6002, "transport_stream_id" 6003, "service_id" 6004, and "event_id" column 6005. Similarly, "service_id" column 6003 and "event_id" column are written in "AE_SVC_id column 6108" and "AE_event_id" column 6109 Each value of 6005. The same applies to the "NE_SVC_id" column 6111 and the "NE_event_id" column 6112.

还有,在“VE_comp_tag”栏6107上,从“0X00”按序提供每逢图像数据作16进位的第二位的部分标记并写入。其中对图像数据“Video0.m2V”,对“Video1.m2v”分别提供“0×00”和“0×00”并写入。In addition, in the "VE_comp_tag" column 6107, a part tag of the second bit of hexadecimal is provided and written in order from "0X00" for each image data. Among them, "0x00" and "0x00" are respectively provided and written for the image data "Video0.m2V" and "Video1.m2v".

该部分标记用于在PID中相应1对1,以自由分配的值间接参照PID。在本实施形式中,值为“N”的部分标记分别对应于以多路信息存储部5104的“VE_component(N)_pid”提供的PID。部分标记和PID的对应关系在后述的PMT中描述。因此,在接收装置5121中,参照记述在PMT的descriptor中的部分标记,判别其PID,可获得图像数据等。假定利用发射部5106与其他节目一起使对话节目多路时,即便将系统信息表中PID改写为其他值情况下,也具有能可靠地取得图像数据的效果。This partial flag is used for a 1-to-1 correspondence in the PID with an indirect reference to the PID with a freely assignable value. In the present embodiment, the partial flags whose value is "N" correspond to the PIDs provided in "VE_component(N)_pid" of the multiplexing information storage unit 5104, respectively. The correspondence relationship between partial flags and PIDs will be described in PMT described later. Therefore, in the receiving device 5121, the PID is determined by referring to the partial flag described in the descriptor of the PMT, and image data and the like can be obtained. Assuming that the dialogue program is multiplexed together with other programs by the transmission unit 5106, even if the PID in the system information table is rewritten to another value, there is an effect that image data can be obtained reliably.

此外,如若不用部分标记,则也可考虑在“VE_comp_tag”栏、“AE_comp_tag”栏上直接指定PID值。在该情况下,当利用发射部5106在输送流中多路化时,在系统信息表中把PID改写为分别的值情况下,只要通过也改写导航信息表中的这些栏的PID值作对应就行。In addition, if part of the tag is not used, it may also be considered to directly specify the PID value in the "VE_comp_tag" column and "AE_comp_tag" column. In this case, when the transmission unit 5106 is used to multiplex the transport stream, when rewriting the PID in the system information table to a separate value, only by rewriting the PID values in these columns in the navigation information table to correspond That's fine.

“AE_comp_tag”栏6110也同样每逢声音数据提供部分标记并写入。其中,对声音数据“Audio0.m2a”、“Audio1.m2v”分别提供“0X00”、“0X01”并写入。In the "AE_comp_tag" column 6110, a partial tag is also provided and written for each audio data. Among them, "0X00" and "0X01" are provided and written to the audio data "Audio0.m2a" and "Audio1.m2v", respectively.

并且,在目录标识符分配表6101中,在“NE_id”(导航信息标识符)栏6113上16进位第4位数值在目录号6102的顺序中一边加1一边写入。In addition, in the directory identifier allocation table 6101, the hexadecimal 4th digit value is written in the order of the directory number 6102 in the "NE_id" (navigation information identifier) column 6113 while being incremented by 1.

此外,图15中的“VE_id”栏及“AE_id”栏里用于识别页基目录的信息。在第1实施形式中,由于以仅由流基目录组成的对话节目为前提,所以不使用“VE_id”栏及“AE_id”栏。详细情况在第二实施形式以后说明。In addition, the "VE_id" column and the "AE_id" column in FIG. 15 are information for identifying the page base directory. In the first embodiment, the "VE_id" column and the "AE_id" column are not used because the premise is that the dialogue program consists only of the stream-based contents. Details will be described after the second embodiment.

1-2-3-3多路控制部5110:(b)方案号分配表的制成1-2-3-3 Multi-channel control unit 5110: (b) Preparation of plan number allocation table

多路控制部5110一旦完成目录标识符分配表6101的制成,则制成方案号分配表。When the multiplexing control unit 5110 completes creating the directory identifier allocation table 6101, it creates a plan number allocation table.

具体来说,多路控制部5110参照结构信息表5801,每逢目录号通过在其目录中包括的导航信息最初记载,依次从“0”提供大“1”的方案号。此外,当方案号超过“31”时,还从“0”依次提供大“1”的方案号。Specifically, the multiplexing control unit 5110 refers to the configuration information table 5801, and provides plan numbers from "0" to "1" each time the directory number is first described in the navigation information included in the directory. In addition, when the plan number exceeds "31", plan numbers larger than "1" are also provided in order from "0".

图16表示该方案号分配表的一例。例如,在目录0的导航信息“Nario_0.nif”、“Navio_1.nif”、“Navio-2.nif”...上提供称之为“0X00”、“0X01”、“0X02”的方案号。FIG. 16 shows an example of this plan number assignment table. For example, scheme numbers called "0X00", "0X01", "0X02" are provided on the navigation information "Nario_0.nif", "Navio_1.nif", "Navio-2.nif", . . . of directory 0 .

对于目录1~3也都一样。The same applies to directories 1 to 3.

多路控制部5110一旦完成方案号分配表6201的制成,则向导航信息表生成部5111指示作成导航信息表。Once the creation of the plan number assignment table 6201 is completed, the multiplexing control unit 5110 instructs the navigation information table creation unit 5111 to create a navigation information table.

1-2-3-4导航信息表生成部5111:(c)1-2-3-4 Navigation information table generation unit 5111: (c)

导航信息表生成部5111一旦从多路控制部5110接受导航信息表生成的指示,生成把高连接表中连接端目录号置换成表示包括在连接端目录中的各部分的各种标识符的导航信息表。When the navigation information table generation unit 5111 receives the instruction to generate the navigation information table from the multiplexing control unit 5110, it generates a navigation information table in which the connection terminal directory number in the high-connection table is replaced with various identifiers indicating each part included in the connection terminal directory. Information Sheet.

更具体来说,导航信息表生成部5111读出存储在导信息存储部5108中的导航信息,当其导航信息包括高连接表时,参照在多路控制部5110作成的目录标识符分配表,把用目录号记录的连接端信息变换成各种标识符的记录,生成导航信息表。More specifically, the navigation information table generation unit 5111 reads the navigation information stored in the navigation information storage unit 5108, and when the navigation information includes a high connection table, refers to the directory identifier assignment table created by the multiplexing control unit 5110, Convert the connection terminal information recorded by directory number into records of various identifiers to generate a navigation information table.

还有导航信息表生成部5111把生成的导航信息以称为NVT(目录号、方案号)的文件名作为导航信息表存储在存储区域(未图示)上。目录号和方案号参照结构信息存储部5109的结构信息表和多路控制部5110的方案号分配表取得。导航信息表生成部5111在读出的导航信息不包括高连接表时,仅变更文件名存储在存储区域。Further, the navigation information table generation unit 5111 stores the generated navigation information in a storage area (not shown) as a navigation information table under a file name called NVT (Number of Contents, Project Number). The directory number and the plan number are obtained by referring to the structure information table in the structure information storage unit 5109 and the plan number assignment table in the multiplexing control unit 5110 . When the navigation information table generation unit 5111 reads out a high connection table, only the file name is changed and stored in the storage area.

图17表示生成的文件名“NVT(0、0)”的导航信息表6301。该导航信息表6301是由图7所示的文件名“Navio-0.nif”的导航信息5301生成的,与图5所示的场面01b对应。FIG. 17 shows the navigation information table 6301 of the generated file name "NVT(0,0)". This navigation information table 6301 is generated from the navigation information 5301 of the file name "Navio-0.nif" shown in FIG. 7 and corresponds to the scene 01b shown in FIG. 5 .

导航信息表6301包括目标定义表6302、处理器定义表6303、高连接表6304、位标志表6305、有效时间表6306。其中除高连接表6304及文件名以外,与图7所示的导航信息5301一样。The navigation information table 6301 includes a target definition table 6302 , a processor definition table 6303 , a high connection table 6304 , a bit flag table 6305 , and a valid time table 6306 . It is the same as the navigation information 5301 shown in FIG. 7 except for the high connection table 6304 and the file name.

在高连接表6304中,图7的高连接表5304各目录号被变换成记录在图15所示的标识符分配表6101中的各种标识符的记录。记录“-”于高连接表6304的“Orig_nw_id”等栏上,没有记载标识符的表示在导航信息表6301所属目录和连接端的目录中其标识符值是一样的,所以记录从略。In the high connection table 6304, each directory number in the high connection table 5304 of FIG. 7 is converted into records of various identifiers recorded in the identifier assignment table 6101 shown in FIG. 15 . Record "-" in the "Orig_nw_id" column of the high connection table 6304. If no identifier is recorded, it means that the identifier value in the directory to which the navigation information table 6301 belongs and the directory of the connection end are the same, so the record is omitted.

在该例中,“Hgperlink lndex O”栏表示从图5所示的目录0的场面01b到目录1的场面11b的连接。在“Hyperlink index O”栏中,由于“NE-id”栏以外成为“-”,所以目录0意味着只要导航信息表(NE_id)不同。In this example, the "Hgperlink Index 0" column indicates a link from scene 01b of directory 0 shown in FIG. 5 to scene 11b of directory 1. In the "Hyperlink index O" column, since "-" is set to anything other than the "NE-id" column, the directory 0 means that only the navigation information table (NE_id) is different.

而且,“Hyper link 1”栏表示从图5所示的目录0的场面01b到目录2的场面21b的连接。在“Hyperlink Index 1”栏中,“VE_comp_tay”、Also, the "Hyper link 1" column indicates a connection from the scene 01b of the content 0 shown in FIG. 5 to the scene 21b of the content 2. In the "Hyperlink Index 1" column, "VE_comp_tay",

“AE_comp_tag”、“NE_id”栏以外因成为“-”,所以目录0意味着与连接端目录2不同的图像(VE_comp_tag)、声音(AE_comp_tag)及导航信息表(NE_id)不同。Since the columns other than "AE_comp_tag" and "NE_id" are "-", the content 0 means that the image (VE_comp_tag), audio (AE_comp_tag) and navigation information table (NE_id) are different from the connection side content 2.

假定连接端的目录属于不同的服务,则在“VE_service_id”、Assuming that the directories at the connection end belong to different services, then in "VE_service_id",

“AE_service”和“NE_service_id上都记载各标识符。如上所述,标识符值在相同情况下省略记录,可减小导航信息表的尺寸。Each identifier is described in both "AE_service" and "NE_service_id. As mentioned above, when the identifier value is the same, the record can be omitted, and the size of the navigation information table can be reduced.

此外,图17的高连接表中的“VE_id”栏及“AE_id”栏是用于识别页基目录的信息。在NVT(0、0)中由于所有连接端是流基目录,所以在“VE_id”栏及“AE_id”栏什么也不记载。对连接端是页基目录情况下,在第二实施形式以后说明。In addition, the "VE_id" column and the "AE_id" column in the hyperlink table of FIG. 17 are information for identifying the page base directory. In NVT (0, 0), since all connection ends are stream-based directories, nothing is written in the "VE_id" and "AE_id" columns. When the connection end is a page base directory, it will be described after the second embodiment.

图18表示文件名“NVT(1、0)的导航信息表6401。该导航信息表6401是由图8所示的文件名“navil-0.nif”的导航信息5401生成的,对应于图5所示目录1的场面11b。Fig. 18 shows the navigation information table 6401 of the file name "NVT(1,0). This navigation information table 6401 is generated by the navigation information 5401 of the file name "navil-0.nif" shown in Fig. 8, corresponding to Fig. 5 Scene 11b of List 1 is shown.

该导航信息表6401由于在导航信息表5401中不存在高连接表,所以成为同样的目录。但是,从目录1的场面11b连至目录0的连接由上述图的处理器定义表6403和图13所示的进入信息表示。Since this navigation information table 6401 does not have a high connection table in the navigation information table 5401, it is the same directory. However, the link from the scene 11b of the list 1 to the list 0 is indicated by the handler definition table 6403 of the above figure and the entry information shown in FIG. 13 .

同样,图19表示文件名“NVT(0、1)的导航信息表6501,图20表示文件名”NVT(1、1)的导航信息表6601,图21表示文件名“NVT(2、0)的导航信息表6701,分别由图9所示的文件名“navi0-1.nif”的导航信息5501、图10所示的文件名“navil-1.nif”的导航信息5601、图11所示的文件名“navi2-0.nif”的导航信息5701生成。Similarly, Fig. 19 shows the navigation information table 6501 of the file name "NVT (0, 1), Fig. 20 shows the navigation information table 6601 of the file name " NVT (1, 1), and Fig. 21 shows the navigation information table 6601 of the file name "NVT (2, 0) The navigation information table 6701 of , respectively, is shown by the navigation information 5501 of the file name "navi0-1.nif" shown in Figure 9, the navigation information 5601 of the file name "navil-1.nif" shown in Figure 10, and the navigation information 5601 shown in Figure 11 The navigation information 5701 of the file name "navi2-0.nif" is generated.

导航信息表生成部5111只要终结导航信息表的生成,则通知多路控制部5110。其后,多路控制部5110一旦接受导航信息表生成终结,则向系统信息表生成部5105指示生成系统信息表。对于系统信息表的生成(d)在后描述。The navigation information table generation unit 5111 notifies the multiplexing control unit 5110 when the generation of the navigation information table is terminated. Thereafter, upon receiving the completion of the generation of the navigation information table, the multiplexing control unit 5110 instructs the system information table generation unit 5105 to generate the system information table. Generation (d) of the system information table will be described later.

1-2-3-5多路控制部5110:(e)多路指示的制成1-2-3-5 Multiplexing control unit 5110: (e) Preparation of multiplexing instructions

多路控制部5110若接受系统信息表生成结束,则首先多路控制部5110从多路信息存储部5104读出“PCR_RID”值,通知到多路化部5112。这里为了在多路化部5112,使成为在多路化流中使各目录数据多路化时的基准的时间信息(PCR)多路化。When the multiplexing control unit 5110 accepts that the generation of the system information table has been completed, the multiplexing control unit 5110 first reads the “PCR_RID” value from the multiplexing information storage unit 5104 and notifies the multiplexing unit 5112 of the value. Here, the multiplexing unit 5112 multiplexes time information (PCR) used as a reference for multiplexing each content data in the multiplexed stream.

接着,多路控制部5110形成展示信息的多路指示,通知到多路化部5112。Next, the multiplex control unit 5110 forms a multiplex instruction to present information, and notifies the multiplexer 5112 of the instruction.

具体来说,为了多重化使得全部目录的展示信息由其重放时间区域重选,所以多路控制部5110对于在全部目录中包括的图像数据及声音数据,设多路开始位置为“0”,作成多路指示并通知。其中,多路开始位置是设多路流的发射开始时间为0的相对时间。Specifically, in order to multiplex the display information of all the content by reselecting its playback time zone, the multiplexing control unit 5110 sets the multiplexing start position to "0" for the image data and audio data included in all the content. , make multi-channel instructions and notify them. Wherein, the multi-channel start position is a relative time when the transmission start time of the multi-channel stream is assumed to be 0.

图像数据及声音数据的各多路指示,包括多路开始位置、PID、位速率。例如对于结构信息表5801的目录0的图像数据“Video0.m2V”,多路控制部5110首先参照目录标识符分配表6101、读出其图像数据的“VE_comp_tag”6107值“0×00”,再从多路信息表6001读出“VE_component(0)_pid”6011值“0×0096”,求其图像数据的PID,读出“VE_component(0)_Bitrate”6010值“4Mbps”,求位速率,连同多路开始位置通知其PID、和其位速率。Each multiplex indication of image data and audio data, including multiplex start position, PID, bit rate. For example, for the image data "Video0.m2V" of directory 0 in the structure information table 5801, the multiplexing control unit 5110 first refers to the directory identifier allocation table 6101, reads the value "0x00" of the "VE_comp_tag" 6107 of the image data, and then Read "VE_component(0)_pid" 6011 value "0×0096" from multi-channel information table 6001, seek the PID of its image data, read "VE_component(0)_Bitrate" 6010 value "4Mbps", seek bit rate, together with The multiplex start position notifies its PID, and its bit rate.

接着,多路控制部5110如下做成将有关导航信息的多路指示,并通知到多路化部5112。Next, the multiplexing control unit 5110 notifies the multiplexing unit 5112 of the multiplexing instruction related to the navigation information as follows.

多路控制部5110在每个目录作成多路指示,使得对在其中包括的导航信息表作其有效时间之间重复多路。例如在图17所示的导航信息表6301[NVT(0,0)]情况下,在从有效时间表6306中展示的有效开始时间(5秒)到有效结束时间(65秒)之间,多路控制部5110重复做成NVT(0,0)的多路指示。但是,在本实施例中,设定从比有效开始时间提前一定时间(例如1秒)作多重。从一定时间之前作多路是为了对于接收装置5121的导航信息表处理提供余量。The multiplexing control unit 5110 creates a multiplexing instruction for each content so that the multiplexing is repeated during the effective time of the navigation information table included therein. For example, in the case of the navigation information table 6301 [NVT (0, 0)] shown in FIG. The way control unit 5110 repeatedly creates a multi-way instruction of NVT (0, 0). However, in this embodiment, it is set to be multiplied by a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) earlier than the effective start time. The purpose of multiplexing from a certain time ago is to provide a margin for the navigation information table processing of the receiving device 5121 .

导航信息的多路指示包括其PID,其传输容量(位速率)、方案号、table_id_ext。The multi-way indication of navigation information includes its PID, its transmission capacity (bit rate), scheme number, table_id_ext.

例如,使在图17所示的文件名“NVT(0,0)的导航信息表多路化情况下,多路化控制部5110把有效开始时间的一定时间前(4秒)作为最初的多路开始位置,从多路信息表6001读出“NE_component(0)_pid”6009之值“0X0092”,和“NE_component(0)_Bitrate”6008之值“1Mbps”,分别作为PID、位速率通知到多路化部5112。并且,多路控制部5110从目录标识符分配表6101,作对应于目录号0的“NE_id”6113之值“0×0000”读出,作为table_id_extension通知到多路化部5112。For example, when multiplexing the navigation information table with the file name "NVT(0,0) shown in Fig. 17, the multiplexing control unit 5110 sets a fixed time (4 seconds) before the valid start time as the first multiplexed table. Road start position, read the value "0X0092" of "NE_component(0)_pid" 6009 from the multi-channel information table 6001, and the value "1Mbps" of "NE_component(0)_Bitrate" 6008, and notify the multi-channel as PID and bit rate respectively The multiplexing unit 5112. And, the multiplexing control unit 5110 reads the value “0×0000” of the “NE_id” 6113 corresponding to the directory number 0 from the directory identifier allocation table 6101, and notifies the multiplexing unit 5112 as table_id_extension .

再有,多路控制部5112通过用有导航信息表大小分割,算出作为下一个多路化开始位置在其导航信息的传输使用中确保的传输容量(位速率),与上述一样通知多路指示。In addition, the multiplexing control unit 5112 calculates the transmission capacity (bit rate) ensured for the transmission and use of the navigation information as the next multiplexing start position by dividing by the size of the navigation information table, and notifies the multiplexing instruction in the same manner as above. .

象这样的多路控制部5110达到有效终止时间,一边依次求多路开始位置一边作成多路指示通知到多路化部5112。以此,上述NVT(0,0)在多路流开始后4~65秒向重复多路。The multiplex control unit 5110 thus creates a multiplex instruction and notifies the multiplexer 5112 when the valid end time is reached, and sequentially finds the multiplex start positions. Thus, the above-mentioned NVT (0, 0) is multiplexed 4 to 65 seconds after the start of the multichannel stream.

与上述一样,多路控制部5110即使对在目录0中包括的NVT(0,1)、NVT(0,2)...和目录1中包括的NVT(1,0)、NVT(1,1)...等其他的NVT,也与上述一样,作成多路指示,通知到多路化部5112。As described above, the multiplexing control unit 5110 even compares NVT (0, 1), NVT (0, 2) ... included in directory 0 and NVT (1, 0), NVT (1, 1) Other NVTs such as .

1-2-4系统信息表生成部5105:(d)1-2-4 System information table generation unit 5105: (d)

系统信息表生成部5105一旦接受来自多路控制部5110的指示,则生成系统信息表。所谓系统信息表称为用于识别输送流中多路化流的各种信息,即记录用于接收装置5121选择事件所必要的各种信息的各种表。The system information table generating unit 5105 generates a system information table upon receiving an instruction from the multiplexing control unit 5110 . The so-called system information table refers to various information for identifying multiplexed streams among transport streams, that is, various tables that record various information necessary for the receiving device 5121 to select an event.

更具体来说,首先系统信息表生成部5105参照多路信息存储部5104,根据ETS 300 468(DVB-SI)标准、ISO/IEC 13818-1(MPEG2系统)标准生成NIT(Network Information Table)、EIT(Event InformationTable)、SDT(Serrice Description Table)及PAT(Program AssociationTable)。More specifically, first, the system information table generation unit 5105 refers to the multi-channel information storage unit 5104, and generates NIT (Network Information Table), NIT (Network Information Table) and EIT (Event Information Table), SDT (Serrice Description Table) and PAT (Program Association Table).

其中,NIT对于从特定的网络发射的名输送流,记录关于传输线路的物理信息等。图22A是由系统信息表生成部5105生成的NIT 6801例。在由“0X0001”识别network_id的网络中,分配好由“0X0001”识别original_network_id、由“0×0001”识别transport_stream_id的输送流,展示着用“传输绪之”表示关于其频率和调制方式的标准。Among them, the NIT records physical information on transmission lines and the like for transport streams transmitted from a specific network. FIG. 22A is an example of NIT 6801 generated by the system information table generating unit 5105. In the network whose network_id is identified by "0X0001", the transport stream whose original_network_id is identified by "0X0001" and transport_stream_id is identified by "0x0001" is allocated, and the standard about its frequency and modulation method is expressed by "transmission thread".

SDT记录有关在特定输送流中包括的各服务的服务名等的信息。图22B是系统信息表生成部5105生成的SDT6802例子。在由“0×0001”识别transport_stream_id的输送流中,包括由“0X0002”识别Service_id的服务。展示着由“service名等的信息”表示其服务名等的信息。The SDT records information on service names and the like of each service included in a specific transport stream. FIG. 22B is an example of SDT 6802 generated by the system information table generating unit 5105. In the transport stream whose transport_stream_id is identified by "0x0001", the service whose Service_id is identified by "0X0002" is included. Information such as the service name is displayed by "information such as service name".

EIT就有关在特定的服务中包括的各事件,记录事件名和有关开始时间、结束时间等的信息。图22C是系统信息表生成部5105生成的EIT6803例子。在用“0X0002”识别service_id的服务中,包括用“0X0002”识别event_id的事件,显示着用“event名等的信息”表示其事件名等的信息。The EIT records event names and information on start time, end time, and the like for each event included in a specific service. FIG. 22C is an example of EIT6803 generated by the system information table generating unit 5105. In the service whose service_id is identified by "0X0002", the event whose event_id is identified by "0X0002" is included, and the information indicating the event name etc. by "event name etc. information" is displayed.

PAT就有关在特定的输送流中包括的各程序,记录PMT(程序图表)的PID。图23是系统信息表生成部5105生成的PAT6901例子。在由“0×0001”识别transport_stream_id的输送流中,包括用“0×0002识别program_no的程序,表示其PMT的PID为“0X0090”。与program_id一致,程序相当于事件。The PAT records the PID of the PMT (Program Table) regarding each program included in a specific transport stream. FIG. 23 is an example of PAT6901 generated by the system information table generating unit 5105. In the transport stream whose transport_stream_id is identified by "0x0001", the program which identifies program_no by "0x0002" is included, and the PID indicating its PMT is "0x0090". The program corresponds to an event in agreement with program_id.

然后系统信息表生成部5105参照多路信息存储部5104、多路控制部5110、结构信息存储部5109,根据MPEG2系统标准的规定生成相应使发射数据存储部5102存储的发射数据多路的节目的PMT。图24是表示由图14所示的多路信息表6001、图15所示的目录标识符分配表6101、图13所示的进入信息5901做成的PMT之一例图。Then, the system information table generation unit 5105 refers to the multiplex information storage unit 5104, the multiplex control unit 5110, and the configuration information storage unit 5109, and generates a program corresponding to multiplexing the transmission data stored in the transmission data storage unit 5102 according to the provisions of the MPEG2 system standard. PMT. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a PMT created from the multiple information table 6001 shown in FIG. 14, the directory identifier allocation table 6101 shown in FIG. 15, and the entry information 5901 shown in FIG.

在PMT7001生成中,“Program_nwmber”是表示使发射数据多路的程序(是事件)的程序号之值,在这上面写入多路信息表6001的“service_id”6004的值“0X0002”。When the PMT 7001 is generated, "Program_nwmber" is a value indicating the program number of the program (event) that multiplexes the transmission data, and the value "0X0002" of the "service_id" 6004 of the multiplexing information table 6001 is written therein.

并且,“PCR_PID”是表示包括时钟信息(PCR)的分组的PID的值,时钟信息成为使该程序译码时的基准。在这上面写入多路信息表6001的“PCR_PID”值“0X0091”。Furthermore, "PCR_PID" is a value indicating the PID of a packet including clock information (PCR), and the clock information serves as a reference when decoding the program. The "PCR_PID" value "0X0091" of the multiplex information table 6001 is written thereon.

并且,“Entry_Descriptor”7003是包括在选择该程序时最初重放的进入目录标识符信息的描述符。图25是表示PMT7001包括的“Entry_Descriptor”的细节图。“Entry_Descriptor”7003的descriptor_tag是表示描述符种类的标识符,写入在“Entry_Descriptor”使用中限定的值如“0X98”。“entry_VE_comp_tag、“entry_AE_comp_tag”、“entry_VE_id”分别表示识别构成进入目录的图像数据、声音数据、导航信息的标识符值。Also, "Entry_Descriptor" 7003 is a descriptor including entry directory identifier information that is reproduced first when the program is selected. FIG. 25 is a detailed diagram showing "Entry_Descriptor" included in PMT7001. The descriptor_tag of "Entry_Descriptor" 7003 is an identifier indicating the type of the descriptor, and a value limited to the use of "Entry_Descriptor", such as "0X98", is written. "entry_VE_comp_tag," "entry_AE_comp_tag," and "entry_VE_id" represent identifier values for identifying image data, audio data, and navigation information constituting the entry directory, respectively.

在PMT的生成中,系统信息表生成部5105参照进入信息5901,取得进入目录的目录号“0”,从目录标识符分配表6101取出对应于目录号“0”的目录之“VE_comp_tag”6107值“0X00”、“AE_comp_tag”6110值“0X00”、“NE_id”6113值“0X0000”,分别写入“entry_VE_comp_tag”、“entry_AE_comp_tag”、“entry_NE_id”。In generating the PMT, the system information table generating unit 5105 refers to the entry information 5901 to obtain the entry directory number "0", and fetches the value of "VE_comp_tag" 6107 of the entry corresponding to the entry directory 6101 from the entry identifier allocation table 6101. "0X00", "AE_comp_tag" 6110 value "0X00", "NE_id" 6113 value "0X0000", write "entry_VE_comp_tag", "entry_AE_comp_tag", "entry_NE_id" respectively.

还有,表7004每逢构成该程序的部分的“PID”7005值,显示表示以各目录传输的数据种类的“Stream_type”7006、和表示附加信息的“descriptor”7006的对应。在表7004的第1行中,通过多路信息表6001分别写入“NE_component(O)_pid”6009的值“0X0092”、表示传输的数据种类为区段数据的值“0X05”。和图26A所示的“NE_component_Descriptor(0)7201。“NE_component_Descriptor(0)表示以提供此的部分传输具有“min_NE_id”的值以上,“max_NE_id”的值以下的值的NE_id的导航信息。在本实施例中,在用“NE_component(0)_pid”6009识别的部分由于作成使目录号0的目录导航信息多路,所以通过目录标识符分配表6101把对应于目录号0的“NE_id”6113值“0X0000”写入“min_NE_id”和“max_NE_id”上。还有,在“descriptor”上写入表示该descriptor种类所规定的值(此处为“0X99”)。In addition, table 7004 shows the correspondence between "Stream_type" 7006 indicating the type of data transmitted in each directory and "descriptor" 7006 indicating additional information, for each value of "PID" 7005 of a part constituting the program. In the first line of the table 7004, the value "0X0092" of "NE_component(O)_pid" 6009 and the value "0X05" indicating that the type of data to be transmitted is segment data are respectively written in the multiplexing information table 6001. And "NE_component_Descriptor(0) 7201" shown in FIG. 26A. "NE_component_Descriptor(0) indicates that the navigation information having the value of NE_id not less than the value of "min_NE_id" and not more than the value of "max_NE_id" is transmitted in the portion provided. In this embodiment, since the directory navigation information of directory number 0 is multiplexed in the part identified by "NE_component(0)_pid" 6009, the "NE_id" corresponding to directory number 0 is allocated by the directory identifier assignment table 6101 6113 The value "0X0000" is written on "min_NE_id" and "max_NE_id". In addition, a value (here, "0X99") specified to indicate the type of the descriptor is written in "descriptor".

从表7004的第2行到第4行上,通过多路信息表6001读出“NE_component(1)_pid”、“NE_component(2)_pid”、“NE_componenent(3)_pid”各值,分别提供图26B所示的NE_component_Descriptor(1)7202、图26C所示的NE_component_Descriptor(2)7203、图26D所示的NE_component_Descriptor(3)7204,作为“stream_type”的值“0X05”、作为“Descripor”。From the 2nd line to the 4th line of the table 7004, the values of "NE_component(1)_pid", "NE_component(2)_pid", and "NE_component(3)_pid" are read out from the multiplex information table 6001, and the diagrams are provided respectively. NE_component_Descriptor(1) 7202 shown in FIG. 26B , NE_component_Descriptor(2) 7203 shown in FIG. 26C , and NE_component_Descriptor(3) 7204 shown in FIG. 26D are the value “0X05” of “stream_type” and “Descripor”.

在表7004的第5行,通过多路信息表6001分别写入“VE_component(0)_pid”6011值“0×0096”、表示传输的数据种类为图像数据的值“0X02”、在图27A所示的“Stream_identifier_descriptor(0)”7301。“stream_identifier_descirptor(1)”7301表示提供所述目录的部分的部分标记值为“0X00”。“descriptor_tag”值是表示descriptor种类所规定的值例如“0X52”。In the fifth line of the table 7004, the value "0x0096" of "VE_component(0)_pid" 6011 and the value "0x02" indicating that the type of data to be transmitted is image data are respectively written in the multi-channel information table 6001, as shown in FIG. 27A "Stream_identifier_descriptor(0)" 7301 shown. "stream_identifier_descirptor(1)" 7301 indicates that the part flag value of the part providing the directory is "0X00". The "descriptor_tag" value is a predetermined value indicating a descriptor type, for example, "0X52".

在表7004的第6行上也同样通过多路信息表6001写入“VE_component(1)_pid”值,“stream-type”值、图27B所示的“stream_identifier_descriptor(1)”7302。In the sixth line of the table 7004, the "VE_component(1)_pid" value, the "stream-type" value, and the "stream_identifier_descriptor(1)" 7302 shown in FIG. 27B are also written in the multiplexing information table 6001.

表7004的第7行、第8行上同样通过多路信息表6001写入“AE_component(0)_pid”值、“AE_component(1)_pid”值、作为“stream_type”表示声音数据的值“0X03”、“stream_identifier_descriptor(0)”7301、“Stream_identifier_descriptor(1)”7302。On the 7th and 8th lines of the table 7004, the "AE_component(0)_pid" value, the "AE_component(1)_pid" value, and the value "0X03" representing the audio data as "stream_type" are also written in the multiplex information table 6001 , "stream_identifier_descriptor (0)" 7301, "Stream_identifier_descriptor (1)" 7302.

1-2-5多路化部51121-2-5 multiplexing section 5112

多路化部5112根据来自多路控制部5110的多路指示,依据用MPEG2系统规格规定的方法,使目录数据在MPEG2输送流中多路,依次向发射部5106输出生成的输送流数据。The multiplexing unit 5112 multiplexes the content data on the MPEG2 transport stream in accordance with the method specified by the MPEG2 system specification according to the multiplexing instruction from the multiplexing control unit 5110, and sequentially outputs the generated transport stream data to the transmitting unit 5106.

即多路化部5112一旦从多路控制部5110接收图像数据的多路指示,从展示信息存储部5107读出图像数据,变换成数据流,使用指定的PID、位速率,从指定的开始位置使相关数据流在输送流中多路。而且,若从多路控制部5110接收声音数据的多重指示,则从展示信息存储部5107读出声音数据,变换成数据流,使用指定了的PID、位速率,从指定了的开始位置在输送流中使相关数据流多路。That is, once the multiplexing unit 5112 receives the multiplexing instruction of image data from the multiplexing control unit 5110, it reads the image data from the display information storage unit 5107, converts it into a data stream, and uses the specified PID and bit rate to start from the specified start position. Multiplexes related data streams in a delivery stream. And, when receiving a multiple instruction of audio data from the multiplexing control unit 5110, the audio data is read from the presentation information storage unit 5107, converted into a data stream, and transmitted from the designated start position using the designated PID and bit rate. Stream multiplexes related data streams.

还有,如果从多路控制部5110接受展示信息表的多路指示,则从导航信息表生成部5111读出导航信息表,变换成数据流,使用指定的PID、table_id_extension、version_no、位速率、通过输送流的指定开始位置,使相关数据流多路。In addition, if the multi-way instruction of the display information table is received from the multi-way control unit 5110, the navigation information table is read from the navigation information table generation unit 5111, converted into a data stream, and the specified PID, table_id_extension, version_no, bit rate, Multiplexes related data streams by delivering the stream's specified start position.

而且,多路化部5112对于PCR,设生成的输送流打头的初期值为“0),通过多路控制部5110使用通知的PCR-PID作多路。Furthermore, the multiplexing unit 5112 sets the initial value of the header of the generated transport stream to “0) for the PCR, and performs multiplexing using the notified PCR-PID by the multiplexing control unit 5110 .

图28表示由多路化部5112生成的多路化流说明图。该图横轴表示时间经过,纵轴同时表示多重了的目录数据及PCR。FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram of a multiplexed stream generated by the multiplexing unit 5112 . In this figure, the horizontal axis represents the elapse of time, and the vertical axis simultaneously represents the multiplexed content data and PCR.

在上述图中的7401,与目录0及目录1公共的活动图像数据“Video0.m2v”由多路化部5112被变换成数据流,还是提供PID“0X0096”的活动图像数据流。该活动图像流7401虽然连续地图示,但实际上通过多路化部5112分割成固定长分组(示出188字节长的输送流分组),被多路化使占有分配的位速率(4Mbps)。同样7402是与目录2及目录3公共的活动图像数据流。In 7401 in the above figure, the video data "Video0.m2v" common to directory 0 and directory 1 is converted into a data stream by the multiplexing unit 5112, and the video data stream of PID "0X0096" is provided again. Although this moving image stream 7401 is shown continuously, it is actually divided into fixed-length packets (188-byte long transport stream packets are shown) by the multiplexing unit 5112, and multiplexed so as to occupy the assigned bit rate (4 Mbps). . Similarly, 7402 is a moving image data stream common to directory 2 and directory 3 .

7403利用多路化部5112使与目录0及目录1公共的声音数据“Audio.m2a”被变换成数据流,还是提供PID“0X0098”的声音数据流。使这多路要达到占有分配的位速率(0.5Mbps)。同样,7404与目录2及目录3公共的声音数据流。In 7403, the audio data "Audio.m2a" common to directory 0 and directory 1 is converted into a data stream by the multiplexing unit 5112, and the audio data stream with PID "0X0098" is also provided. Make this multiplex to occupy the assigned bit rate (0.5Mbps). Similarly, 7404 shares audio data stream with directory 2 and directory 3.

7405是装载了在目录0中包括的导航信息表的数据流,由多路化部5112多路,使之占有分配的位速率(1Mbps)。数据流7405内各导航信息表提供PID“0X0092”、table_id_extension“0X0000”、Version-no“0X00~0X04”。有关这些导航信息表,同样方案号的被作多次多路,方案号与经过时间一起被更新。并且,PID、table_id_extension、Version_no在接收装置5121中被用于识别数据流7405中1个导航信息表。同样,7406~7408也分别装载了包括在目录1~3中的导航信息的数据流。7405 is a data stream loaded with the navigation information table included in the directory 0, and is multiplexed by the multiplexing unit 5112 so as to occupy the assigned bit rate (1 Mbps). Each navigation information table in the data stream 7405 provides PID "0X0092", table_id_extension "0X0000", and Version-no "0X00-0X04". Regarding these navigation information tables, the same plan number is multiplexed, and the plan number is updated together with the elapsed time. In addition, PID, table_id_extension, and Version_no are used in the receiving device 5121 to identify a navigation information table in the data stream 7405 . Similarly, 7406-7408 are respectively loaded with the data streams of the navigation information included in the directories 1-3.

7409是成为重放时间基准的时间信息PCR,并被多路化。7409 is the time information PCR used as the playback time reference, and is multiplexed.

此外,所述多路化部5112是成为重放时间的基准的时间信息PCR并被多路。In addition, the multiplexing unit 5112 multiplexes the time information PCR used as the reference of the playback time.

此外,所述多路化部5112每当接受来自多路控制部5110的多路指示,则进行多重处理,生成中间状态的多路流,存储在未图示的存储部中,结束所有多路指示处理,形成完全的多路流之后也可向发射部5106输出,不立即处理来自多路控制部5110的多路指示,存储在未图示的存储部中,必要的多路指示具备后,按时间顺序作多路生成多路流,也可依次向发射部5106输出。In addition, the multiplexing unit 5112 performs multiplexing whenever receiving a multiplexing instruction from the multiplexing control unit 5110, generates a multiplexed stream in an intermediate state, stores it in a storage unit not shown, and terminates all multiplexed streams. Instruction processing can also be output to the transmission unit 5106 after forming a complete multichannel stream. The multichannel instruction from the multiplex control unit 5110 is not processed immediately, but is stored in a storage unit not shown. After the necessary multichannel instruction is provided, Multiple streams are generated by multiplexing in time order, and may be sequentially output to the transmitting unit 5106 .

1-2-6发射部51061-2-6 Transmitter 5106

发射部5106具有输送流发射用的调度程序,若比事件发射开始时间还要提前一定的时间如5分钟,则启动多路控制部5110。若成为事件发射开始时间,则在多路化部5112输出的多路流中,根据DVB-SI规格,MPEG2系统规格的规定,使用确定的PID、以规定的间隔使系统信息表生成部5105生成的NIT、PAT、PMT、SDT、EIT等的系统信息表重复多路,进行调制等的处理,作为输送流向接收装置5121等发射。The sending unit 5106 has a scheduler for sending the delivery stream, and if it is a certain time ahead of the start time of event sending, for example, 5 minutes, the multi-channel control unit 5110 is started. When the event transmission start time is reached, in the multiplexed stream output by the multiplexing unit 5112, the system information table generating unit 5105 is generated at predetermined intervals using a specific PID according to the DVB-SI standard and the MPEG2 system standard. System information tables such as NIT, PAT, PMT, SDT, and EIT are repeatedly multiplexed, processed such as modulation, and transmitted as a transport stream to the receiving device 5121 and the like.

图29是表示由发射部5106多路化的输送流的说明图。加在多路化部5112多路化的多路化流中使NIT、PAT、PMT、SDT、EIT的系统信息多路化。并且,在输送流中虽然由发射部5106使多个事件(节目)多路化,在所述图中,图5所示的对话节目以外的事件(节目)从略。FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing transport streams multiplexed by the transmission unit 5106 . The system information of NIT, PAT, PMT, SDT, and EIT is multiplexed by adding to the multiplexed stream multiplexed by the multiplexing unit 5112 . In addition, although a plurality of events (programs) are multiplexed by the transmitting unit 5106 in the transport stream, events (programs) other than the dialogue programs shown in FIG. 5 are omitted in the above-mentioned figure.

1-2-7数字广播装置5101的工作1-2-7 Operation of digital broadcasting device 5101

就如上所述构成的本发明实施形式的数字广播装置5101,下面就其工作进行说明。The operation of the digital broadcasting apparatus 5101 according to the embodiment of the present invention constructed as described above will be described below.

图30是表示数字广播装置5101处理目录整体的流程图。FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the overall processing of the directory by the digital broadcasting apparatus 5101.

多路控制部5110首先作下面处理:(a)制成目录标识符分配表[S(步骤代号)7602],(b)制成方案号分配表(S7604)、(c)导航信息表生成指示(S7606),(d)系统信息表生成指示(S7608)。由系统信息表生成部5105成系统信息表之后,多路控制部5110从多路信息存储部5104读出“PCR_PID”值,通知到多路化部5112(S7610)。Multi-channel control section 5110 first does the following processing: (a) make directory identifier allocation table [S (step code number) 7602], (b) make scheme number allocation table (S7604), (c) navigation information table generation instruction (S7606), (d) system information table generation instruction (S7608). After the system information table is generated by the system information table generation unit 5105, the multiplexing control unit 5110 reads the "PCR_PID" value from the multiplexing information storage unit 5104, and notifies the multiplexing unit 5112 (S7610).

接着,多路控制部5110把展示信息的多路化指示给多路化部5112(S7611),把导航信息的多路指示给多路化部5112(S77-0、S77-1、...S77-n)。这时,多路控制部5110有关从目录0到目录n的n+1个目录,生成例如n+1个任务,利用多任务处理同时进行上述S77-0、S77-1、...S77-n处理。Next, the multiplexing control unit 5110 instructs the multiplexing unit 5112 to multiplex the presentation information (S7611), and instructs the multiplexing unit 5112 to multiplex the navigation information (S77-0, S77-1, . . . S77-n). At this time, the multi-path control unit 5110 generates, for example, n+1 tasks for n+1 directories from directory 0 to directory n, and performs the above-mentioned S77-0, S77-1, ... S77- n processing.

图31表示上述展示信息多路指示作成的更详细的流程。在所述图中,i是用于依次计算目录号的变量。Fig. 31 shows a more detailed flow of the above presentation information multiplex instruction creation. In the figure, i is a variable used to sequentially calculate the catalog number.

多路控制部5110使变量i初始化为0(S7612)。多路控制部5110参照结构信息存储部5109,判定目录号i的目录的图像数据是否已经多路化(S7614、S7616)。The multiplexing control unit 5110 initializes the variable i to 0 (S7612). The multiplexing control unit 5110 refers to the configuration information storage unit 5109, and determines whether or not the image data of the directory with the directory number i has been multiplexed (S7614, S7616).

该判定的动作是根据检验在小于1的目录号的目录中是否包括与目录号i的目录相同的图像数据。例如,当用图12所示的结构信息表5801作判定情况下,目录计数器i为“1”情况下,由于目录号0的目录包括同样图像数据“Video0.m2v,所以立即判定为多路化。The operation of this determination is based on checking whether the same image data as that of the directory number i is included in the directory with the directory number smaller than 1. For example, when the structure information table 5801 shown in FIG. 12 is used for determination and the directory counter i is "1", the directory number 0 includes the same image data "Video0.m2v", so it is immediately determined that it is multiplexed. .

已经多重的情况下,不作图像数据的多路处理。没有多路的情况下,指示多路化部5112作目录号i的目录图像数据的多路(S7618)。这时,多路控制部5110把多路开始位置、PID、位速率值一并通知到多路化部5112。通知“0”(输送流打头)作为多路开始位置。In the case of already multiplexing, image data is not multiplexed. If there is no multiplexing, the multiplexing unit 5112 is instructed to multiplex the content image data of the content number i (S7618). At this time, the multiplexing control unit 5110 notifies the multiplexing unit 5112 of the multiplexing start position, the PID, and the bit rate value together. Notify "0" (head of transport stream) as the multipath start position.

那时,多路控制部5110作为PID值参照多路信息存储部5104,读出对应于分配给要多路的图像数据的部分标记的部分位速率并通知。At that time, the multiplexing control unit 5110 refers to the multiplexing information storage unit 5104 as the PID value, reads out the partial bit rate corresponding to the partial flag assigned to the image data to be multiplexed, and notifies it.

例如,使结构信息表5801目录号0的目录图像数据“Video0.m2v”多路情况下,多路控制部5110首先参照目录标识符分配表6101,读出目录号0的图像数据的“VE_compo_tag”6107值“0X00”。然后,从多路信息表6001读出“VE_component(0)_pid”6011值“0X0096”、“VE_component(0)_Bitrate”6010值“4Mbps”,通知到多路化部5112。For example, when multiplexing the content image data "Video0.m2v" of the content number 0 in the structure information table 5801, the multiplexing control unit 5110 first refers to the content identifier allocation table 6101, and reads out the "VE_compo_tag" of the video data of the content number 0. 6107 value "0X00". Then, the "VE_component(0)_pid" 6011 value "0X0096" and the "VE_component(0)_Bitrate" 6010 value "4Mbps" are read from the multiplexing information table 6001, and notified to the multiplexing unit 5112.

接着,多路控制部5110与图像数据的情况一样,判断目录号1的目录声音数据是否已多路化(S7620),在没有多路化的情况下向多路化部5112指示声音数据的多路。当已多路的情况下,不作声音数据的多路处理。Next, the multiplexing control unit 5110 judges whether or not the content audio data of the directory number 1 has been multiplexed (S7620), and instructs the multiplexing unit 5112 how many audio data have been multiplexed, as in the case of the image data (S7620). road. In the case of multiplexing, the multiplexing of audio data is not performed.

以上处理对有关全部目录进行。其结果对全部图像数据及全部声音数据,作成设多路开始位置为“0”的多路指示。The above processing is performed on all relevant directories. As a result, a multiplexing instruction is created in which the multiplexing start position is set to "0" for all the video data and all the audio data.

图32表示图30所示的导航信息的多路指示作成处理(S77-0、S77-1、...S77-n)的更详细流程。在所述图中,表示有关在目录0~n中的导航信息多路指示。对于其他目录也与此同时执行。并且变量Wp以时间(秒)表示设输送流开始时间为0的C导航信息表的多路开始位置。变量end表示具有1个方案号的导航信息表重复多路结束时间。Fig. 32 shows a more detailed flow of the navigation information multi-direction creation process (S77-0, S77-1, ... S77-n) shown in Fig. 30 . In said figure, multiple indications are shown concerning the navigation information in the directories 0-n. Do the same for other directories as well. In addition, the variable Wp represents the multiplex start position of the C navigation information table where the transport stream start time is set to 0, in terms of time (seconds). The variable end represents the end time of the repeated multiplex of the navigation information table with 1 scheme number.

多路控制部5110使方案号V和多路开始位置指示器Wp值初始化为“0”(S7702)。然后,参照导航信息表生成部5111的存储区域,查看具有文件名“NVT(i、V)”的目录号i、方案号V的导航信息表是否存在(S7704)。若不存在(NVT(i、V)”的情况下,结束处理。还有,在存在“NVT(i、v)”的情况下,同样,查看是否存在文件名(NVT(i,V+1)“(S7708)。The multiplexing control unit 5110 initializes the plan number V and the value of the multiplexing start position pointer Wp to "0" (S7702). Then, referring to the storage area of the navigation information table generation unit 5111, it is checked whether there is a navigation information table with the directory number i and the plan number V having the file name "NVT(i, V)" (S7704). If there is no (NVT (i, V)", end the processing. Also, in the case of "NVT (i, v)", similarly, check whether there is a file name (NVT (i, V+1 )" (S7708).

在不存在NVT(i,V+1)”的情况下,多路控制部5110从文件名“NVT(i,v)的导航信息表读出有效终结时间“end_time”设定在变量end T中(S7710)。When there is no NVT(i, V+1)", the multiplex control unit 5110 reads the effective end time "end_time" from the navigation information table of the file name "NVT(i, v) and sets it in the variable end T (S7710).

“NVT(i,V+1)存在情况下,多路控制部5110使文件名”NVT(i,v)的导航信息表有效终结时间“end_time”和从文件名“NVT(i,V+1)”的导航信息表有效开始时间“seart_time”值减1值比较,把小的值设定在变量endT中(S7714)。例如i=0、v=0的情况下,存储好图17所示的“NVT(0、0)”和图19所示的“NVT(0,1)”,多路控制部5110使“NVT(0,0)”中的“end_time”值“65”和从“NVT(0,1)”中的“start_time”值“70”减1秒的值“69”相比较,把小的值“65”设定在变量end T中。借此,应使“NVT(0,0)”重复多路的时间在从WP=0到endT=65之间。When "NVT(i, V+1) exists, the multiplex control unit 5110 makes the effective end time "end_time" of the navigation information table of the file name "NVT(i, v) and the file name "NVT(i, V+1) )" navigation information table effective start time "seart_time" value minus 1 value comparison, the smaller value is set in the variable endT (S7714). For example, in the case of i=0 and v=0, “NVT (0, 0)” shown in FIG. 17 and “NVT (0, 1)” shown in FIG. The "end_time" value "65" in "(0, 0)" is compared with the value "69" minus 1 second from the "start_time" value "70" in "NVT(0, 1)", and the smaller value " 65" is set in the variable end T. Therefore, the multiplexing time of "NVT(0,0)" should be between WP=0 and endT=65.

下面,多路控制部5110利用式子Wp=Wp+{S-NVT(i,v)/Bi},求“NVT(i,v)”多路的情况的多路终止位置Wp,将此与变量endT之值相比较(S7712)。在此,S_NVT(i,v)是根据MPEG2系统规格把“NVT(i,v)”变换成输送流分组时的大小。Bi是把“NVT(i,v)”分配给多路的部分的位速率,通过多路信息存储部5104读出分配给相关的目录的位速率值。Next, the multi-path control unit 5110 uses the formula Wp=Wp+{S-NVT(i, v)/Bi} to find the multi-path end position Wp when "NVT(i, v)" is multi-pathed, and compares this with the variable The value of endT is compared (S7712). Here, S_NVT(i, v) is the size when "NVT(i, v)" is converted into transport stream packets according to the MPEG2 system standard. Bi is the bit rate assigned to the multi-way part of "NVT(i, v)", and the bit rate value assigned to the relevant directory is read by the multi-way information storage unit 5104 .

当多路终结位置Wp比变量end还要大的情况下,多路控制部5110在方案号上加“1”(S7716),返回S7704处理。When the multipath end position Wp is larger than the variable end, the multipath control unit 5110 adds "1" to the plan number (S7716), and returns to S7704 for processing.

多路终结位置在end以下情况下,多路控制部5110作成“NVT(i,v)”的多路指示,通知到多路化部5112。这时,多路控制部5110把多路开始位置Wp值、位速率Bi值、PID值、table_id值、table_id_extension值、Version_no值作为多路指示通知。When the multiplexing end position is less than or equal to end, the multiplexing control unit 5110 creates a multiplexing instruction of “NVT(i, v)” and notifies the multiplexing unit 5112 of it. At this time, the multiplexing control unit 5110 notifies the multiplexing start position Wp value, bit rate Bi value, PID value, table_id value, table_id_extension value, and Version_no value as a multiplexing instruction.

那时多路控制部5110对于PID,读出分配给通过多路信息存储部5104使目录号i的导航信息表多路的部分的PID值。At that time, the multiplexing control unit 5110 reads out the PID value assigned to the portion in which the navigation information table of the directory number i is multiplexed by the multiplexing information storage unit 5104 for the PID.

就有关table_id,设定在导航信息表使用中确定的值,(例如“0X90”)。Regarding table_id, a value determined in use of the navigation information table (for example, "0X90") is set.

就有关table_id_extension,在目录标识符分配表中读出分配给目录号i的目录“NE_id”的值。Regarding table_id_extension, the value of the category "NE_id" assigned to the category number i is read out in the category identifier allocation table.

就有关Version_no,从图16所示的方案号分配表6201读出。Regarding Version_no, it is read from the plan number allocation table 6201 shown in FIG. 16 .

例如在图17所示的“NVT(0,0)”情况下,最初的多路指示成为Wp=0、PID=0X0092(=“NE_component(0)_pid”)、Bi=Mbps、table_id=0X90、table_id_extension=0×0000(=“Ne_id)、Version_no=0X00。For example, in the case of "NVT(0,0)" shown in FIG. 17, the first multi-way instruction is Wp=0, PID=0X0092 (="NE_component(0)_pid"), Bi=Mbps, table_id=0X90, table_id_extension = 0x0000 (="Ne_id), Version_no = 0X00.

通知多路指示之后,多路控制部5110利用式Wp=Wp+{S-NVT(i,v)/Bi}更新多路开始位置指示器的值(S7720),再返回使文件名NVT(i,v)的导航信息表多路的情况下多路终结位置判定以后(S7712)的处理。After notifying the multi-path instruction, the multi-path control unit 5110 uses the formula Wp=Wp+{S-NVT(i, v)/Bi} to update the value of the multi-path start position indicator (S7720), and returns to make the file name NVT(i, When the navigation information table of v) is multi-path, the processing after multi-path end position determination (S7712).

接受由以上处理通知的多路指示,多路化部5112生成多路流。并且发射部5106使该多路流在输送流中多路并发射。Receiving the multiplexing instruction notified by the above process, the multiplexing unit 5112 generates a multiplexing stream. And the transmitting unit 5106 multiplexes the multiplexed stream in the delivery stream and transmits it.

1-3接收装置5121的大体构成1-3 General configuration of receiving device 5121

在图4,接收装置5121备有接收部5122、TS(Transport Stream)译码器部5123、AV译码器部5124、接收数据存储部5125、接收控制部5126、信号接收部5127、重放部5128、显示部5129、声音输出部5130,其构成功能是从由数字广播装置5101发射的输送流中,根据用户操作对话性取出目录并重放。接收数据存储部5125备有导航信息表存储部5132、系统信息表存储部5133。In Fig. 4, receiving device 5121 is equipped with receiving unit 5122, TS (Transport Stream) decoder unit 5123, AV decoder unit 5124, received data storage unit 5125, receiving control unit 5126, signal receiving unit 5127, playback unit 5128 , the display unit 5129 , and the audio output unit 5130 are configured to interactively extract content from the transport stream transmitted from the digital broadcasting device 5101 according to user operations and play it back. The received data storage unit 5125 includes a navigation information table storage unit 5132 and a system information table storage unit 5133 .

1-3-1接收部51221-3-1 Receiver 5122

接收部5122接收由接收控制部5126指定的输送流,向TS译码部5123输出。The reception unit 5122 receives the transport stream specified by the reception control unit 5126 and outputs it to the TS decoding unit 5123 .

1-3-2TS译码器部51231-3-2TS decoder unit 5123

TS译码器部5123具有存储由接收控制部5126设定的滤波条件的滤波条存储器5131,根据该滤波条件,从由接收部5122输出的输送流中分离图像数据、声音数据,向AV译码器部5124输出,分离导航信息表写入接收数据存储部5125。还有,分离PCR(基准时钟信息)等的系统信息,向AV译码器部5124输出。The TS decoder unit 5123 has a filter bar memory 5131 that stores filter conditions set by the reception control unit 5126, and separates video data and audio data from the transport stream output from the reception unit 5122 based on the filter conditions, and decodes them into AV output from the device unit 5124, and the separated navigation information table is written into the received data storage unit 5125. Also, system information such as PCR (reference clock information) is separated and output to the AV decoder unit 5124 .

滤波条件存储部5131存储多个滤波条件。对应于多个滤波条件,TS译码器部5123同时作多个分离处理。The filter condition storage unit 5131 stores a plurality of filter conditions. Corresponding to a plurality of filter conditions, the TS decoder unit 5123 simultaneously performs a plurality of separation processes.

图33A、图33B分别表示在滤波条件存储部5131中存储着的滤波条件之一例。在这些图中,滤波条件表7801、7807的各行表示用滤波识别号、PID、table_id_extension、version_no、输出端指定的1个滤波条件。33A and 33B show examples of filter conditions stored in the filter condition storage unit 5131, respectively. In these figures, each row of filter condition tables 7801 and 7807 indicates one filter condition specified by filter identification number, PID, table_id_extension, version_no, and output terminal.

“滤波识别号”栏7802是识别各滤波条件的号。在所述图中展示了,“0”、“1”、“2”,分别表示分离图像数据、声音数据、导航信息的滤波条件,未图示的“3”以后表示分离PMT等的系统信息的条件。The "filter identification number" column 7802 is a number for identifying each filter condition. In the above figure, "0", "1", and "2" represent filter conditions for separating image data, audio data, and navigation information, respectively, and "3" and later, which are not shown in the figure, represent separating system information such as PMT. conditions of.

“PID”栏7803表示应分离的数据的PID值。The "PID" column 7803 indicates the PID value of the data to be separated.

“table_id_extension”栏7804表示用于分离导航信息和系统信息的标识符的table_id_extension值。A "table_id_extension" column 7804 indicates a table_id_extension value of an identifier for separating navigation information and system information.

“Version_no”栏7805表示在导航信息的分离中所用的方案号值。当在“Version_no”栏7805中记载“-”的情况下,表示设定条件,即其标识符“Version_no”值为任何值时都作分离。The "Version_no" column 7805 indicates the version number value used for separating the navigation information. When "-" is written in the "Version_no" column 7805, it indicates a setting condition, that is, if the value of the identifier "Version_no" is any value, it is separated.

在“输出端”栏7806,表示输出分离的数据的输出端。In the "Output Port" column 7806, an output port for outputting the separated data is indicated.

例如,在图33A所示的滤波条件识别号“0”的滤波条件下分离的图像数据在“输出端”栏7806中指定AV译码器部5124,“table_id_extension”栏7804和“Version_no”栏7805不能设定。即由于没有给图像数据提供“table_id_extension”“Version_no”,所以没有形成滤波条件。在其“PID”栏7803中设定应分离的图像数据的PID值“0X0096”。借此,接收部5122接收图29所示的输送流情况下,TS译码部5123分离图像数据“Video0.m2v”,向AV译码器部5124输出。For example, the image data separated under the filter condition of the filter condition identification number "0" shown in FIG. Cannot be set. That is, since "table_id_extension" and "Version_no" are not provided for the image data, no filter condition is formed. In the "PID" column 7803, the PID value "0X0096" of the image data to be separated is set. Accordingly, when the receiving unit 5122 receives the transport stream shown in FIG. 29 , the TS decoding unit 5123 separates the video data “Video0.m2v”, and outputs it to the AV decoder unit 5124 .

还有,用图33A所示的滤波识别号“1”的滤波条件分离的声音数据在“输出端”栏7806中指定AV译码器部5124,不能设定“table_id_extension”栏7804和“Version_no”栏7805。即,不形成与图像数据同样的滤波条件。在其“PID”栏7803中,由接收控制部5126设定应分离的声音数据的PID值“0×0098”。接收部5122接受图29所示的输送流情况下,TS译码器部5123分离声音数据“Avdio0.m2a”,向AV译码器部5124输出。In addition, the audio data separated by the filter condition of filter identification number "1" shown in FIG. column 7805. That is, the same filter conditions as those for image data are not formed. In the "PID" column 7803, the PID value "0x0098" of the audio data to be separated is set by the reception control unit 5126 . When the receiving unit 5122 receives the transport stream shown in FIG. 29 , the TS decoder unit 5123 separates the audio data “Avdio0.m2a”, and outputs it to the AV decoder unit 5124 .

同样,用滤波识别号“2”的滤波条件分离的导航信息表在“输出端”栏7806中设定导航信息表存储部5132。这时,TS译码器部5123把分离了的导航信息表写入导航信息表存储部5132。在其“PID”栏7803和“table_id_extension”栏7804中,设定由接收控制部5126应分别分离的导航信息表的PID值“0X0092”、table_id_extension值“0X0000”。在“Version_no”栏7805中设有设定条件。借此,当接收部5122接收图29中所示的输送流时,TS译码器部5123根据时间,分离导航信息表“NVT(0,0)”、“NVT(0,1)”、“NVT(0,2)”、“NVT(0,3)”、“NVT(0,4)”中任一个,写入导航信息表存储部5132,同时,将其宗旨通知到接收控制部5126。Similarly, the navigation information table storage unit 5132 is set in the "output destination" column 7806 for the navigation information table separated by the filter condition of the filter identification number "2". At this time, the TS decoder unit 5123 writes the separated navigation information table into the navigation information table storage unit 5132 . In the "PID" column 7803 and "table_id_extension" column 7804, the PID value "0X0092" and the table_id_extension value "0X0000" of the navigation information table to be separated by the reception control unit 5126 are set. Setting conditions are set in the "Version_no" column 7805 . With this, when the receiving section 5122 receives the transport stream shown in FIG. 29, the TS decoder section 5123 separates the navigation information tables "NVT(0,0)", "NVT(0,1)", " Any one of NVT (0, 2)", "NVT (0, 3)", and "NVT (0, 4)" is written in the navigation information table storage unit 5132, and at the same time, its content is notified to the reception control unit 5126.

图33A的滤波条件表7801是表示根据使用者作事件选择之后马上存储在滤波条件存储部5131中的滤波条件,表示进入目录的滤波条件。The filter condition table 7801 in FIG. 33A indicates the filter conditions stored in the filter condition storage unit 5131 immediately after the user selects an event, and indicates the filter conditions entered into the list.

有关滤波条件表7807也一样。但是,在滤波条件表7807中,由于在导航信息滤波条件的“Version_no”中设定值“0X01”,所以TS译码器部5123在接收部5122接收图29所示的输送流情况下,分离导航信息表“NVT(0,1)”,写入导航信息表存储部5132中,同时将其宗旨通知到接收控制部5126。即该滤波条件表7807是表示进入目录分离后的滤波条件。The same applies to the filter condition table 7807. However, in the filter condition table 7807, since the value "0X01" is set in "Version_no" of the navigation information filter condition, the TS decoder unit 5123 separates the transport stream shown in FIG. The navigation information table "NVT (0, 1)" is written in the navigation information table storage unit 5132, and its content is notified to the reception control unit 5126 at the same time. That is, the filter condition table 7807 shows the filter conditions after the entry directory is separated.

1-3-3AV译码器部51241-3-3AV decoder unit 5124

AV译码器部5124具有没有图示的时钟部,根据MPEG2标准,一边使从TS译码器部5123输出的图像数据和声音数据同步,一边译码。时钟部根据从TS译码器部5123输出的PCR(基准时钟信息)值设定成基准时间,计算成为用于一边使图像数据、声音数据取得正确同步一边作译码的基准的时间。The AV decoder unit 5124 has a clock unit (not shown), and decodes while synchronizing the video data and audio data output from the TS decoder unit 5123 in accordance with the MPEG2 standard. The clock unit sets a reference time based on the PCR (reference clock information) value output from the TS decoder unit 5123, and calculates a reference time for decoding while accurately synchronizing image data and audio data.

1-3-4接收数据存储部51251-3-4 Received data storage unit 5125

接收数据存储部5125例如由RAM构成,备有导航信息表存储部5132、系统信息表存储部5133、导航信息表存储部5132存储由TS译码器部5123从输送流分离的导航信息表。系统信息表存储部5133由TS译码器部5123从输送流分离的NIT、SDT、EIT、PAT、PMT等的系统信息表。此外有关这些导航信息表的目录、系统信息表的目录,因与图17~27所示的一样,所以说明从略。The received data storage unit 5125 is constituted by RAM, for example, and includes a navigation information table storage unit 5132, a system information table storage unit 5133, and the navigation information table storage unit 5132 stores the navigation information table separated from the transport stream by the TS decoder unit 5123. The system information table storage unit 5133 contains system information tables such as NIT, SDT, EIT, PAT, and PMT separated from the transport stream by the TS decoder unit 5123 . Note that the content of these navigation information tables and the content of the system information table are the same as those shown in FIGS. 17 to 27, so descriptions are omitted here.

1-3-5信号接收部51271-3-5 Signal receiving unit 5127

信号接收部5127接收使用者操作部件的操作信号,向接收控制部5126输出。例如,当接收从数字广播装置5101发射的输送流中的表示对话节目的事件选择信号时,向接收控制部5126输出其选择信号。并且,当接收根据后述的使用者操作的确定信号时,向接收控制部5126输出该信号。此外,所谓操作构件是配置在接收装置5121中的操作板和遥控器等,例如有“左”、“右”、“确定”键,使用者按下各键,遥控器发射该信号至信号接收部5127。该“左”、“右”键的操作用于把显示部5129中显示着的显示图像中键选择状态切换成一个右键图像或1个左键图像,“确定”键的操作用于确定其选择状态。The signal receiving unit 5127 receives the operation signal of the user's operation member, and outputs it to the reception control unit 5126 . For example, when receiving an event selection signal indicating a talk program in a transport stream transmitted from the digital broadcasting apparatus 5101 , the selection signal is output to the reception control unit 5126 . And, when receiving a determination signal based on a user operation described later, the signal is output to the reception control unit 5126 . In addition, the so-called operating member is the operation panel and remote control etc. arranged in the receiving device 5121, for example, there are "left", "right" and "confirm" keys, the user presses each key, and the remote control transmits the signal to the signal receiver. Section 5127. The operation of the "left" and "right" keys is used to switch the key selection state in the display image displayed in the display part 5129 to a right button image or a left button image, and the operation of the "OK" button is used to confirm its selection state.

1-3-6重放部51281-3-6 playback unit 5128

重轮部5128根据来自接收控制部5126的指示,把用AV译码部5124译了的图像数据和从接收控制部5126输出的图形信息作为图像信号向显示部5129输出,把用AV译码器部5124译了码的声音数据向声音输出部5130输出。这时,图形信息在由接收控制部5126通知的显示图像上显示位置中,被重迭在活动图像数据上。The heavy wheel unit 5128 outputs the image data decoded by the AV decoding unit 5124 and the graphic information output from the receiving control unit 5126 to the display unit 5129 as an image signal in accordance with an instruction from the reception control unit 5126, The audio data decoded by the unit 5124 is output to the audio output unit 5130 . At this time, the graphics information is superimposed on the moving image data at the display position on the display image notified by the reception control unit 5126 .

1-3-7显示部51291-3-7 Display part 5129

显示部5129由TV监视器实现,显示由重放部5128输出的图像。The display unit 5129 is realized by a TV monitor, and displays the image output from the playback unit 5128 .

1-3-8声音输出部51301-3-8 Sound output unit 5130

声音输出部5130由扬声器实现,输出从重放部5128输出的声音。The audio output unit 5130 is realized by a speaker, and outputs the audio output from the playback unit 5128 .

1-3-9接收控制部51261-3-9 Reception Control Unit 5126

接收控制部5126由CPU、存储程序的RDM、操作用RAM等构成,加在接收装置5121的所有控制中,控制对话节目的接收。The reception control unit 5126 is composed of a CPU, an RDM for storing programs, a RAM for operation, etc., and is added to the overall control of the reception device 5121 to control reception of talk programs.

1-3-9-1接收控制部5126:对话节目接收处理概要1-3-9-1 Reception Control Unit 5126: Overview of Talk Program Reception Processing

图36是表示由接收控制部5126形成的对话节目接收处理概要的流程图。FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the outline of the talk program reception process by the reception control unit 5126.

接收控制部5126当接收装置5121接退电源时,根据由MPEG2系统标准和DVB-SI标准确定的程序控制接收部5122、TS译码器部5123,把在输送流中包括的各系统信息表写入系统信息表存储部5133。这时可显示节目表等。The receiving control unit 5126 controls the receiving unit 5122 and the TS decoder unit 5123 according to the program determined by the MPEG2 system standard and the DVB-SI standard when the receiving device 5121 is powered on and off, and writes each system information included in the transport stream into the system information table storage unit 5133. At this time, the program list, etc. can be displayed.

若使用者通过遥控选择对应输送流中对话节目的事件,则接收控制部5126通过信号接收部接收相关选择信号,参照系统信息表存储部5133中的系统信息表等,获得其事件标识符、original_network_id、transport_stream_id、servie_id、event_id值(S8102)。If the user selects the event corresponding to the dialogue program in the transport stream by remote control, the reception control unit 5126 receives the relevant selection signal through the signal receiving unit, and refers to the system information table in the system information table storage unit 5133 to obtain the event identifier and original_network_id , transport_stream_id, service_id, and event_id values (S8102).

接收控制部5126参照系统信息表存储部5133中系统信息表,把发射部5106发射的输送流的接收指示给接收部5122,把对应于选择的事件的PMT的分离指示给TS译码部5123。接收部5122接收发射部5106发射的输送流向TS译码部5123输出。TS译码器部5123分离对应选择的事件的PMT,写入接收数据存储部5125中系统信息表存储部5133,通知到接收控制部5126。接收控制部5126通过TS译码器部5123一旦接收PMT接收的通知,则参照系统信息表存储部5133中的PMT,取得PCR的PID,写入滤波条件存储部5131(S8104)。The receiving control unit 5126 refers to the system information table in the system information table storage unit 5133, instructs the receiving unit 5122 to receive the transport stream transmitted by the transmitting unit 5106, and instructs the TS decoding unit 5123 to separate the PMT corresponding to the selected event. The receiving unit 5122 receives the transport stream transmitted by the transmitting unit 5106 and outputs it to the TS decoding unit 5123 . The TS decoder unit 5123 separates the PMT corresponding to the selected event, writes it into the system information table storage unit 5133 in the reception data storage unit 5125 , and notifies the reception control unit 5126 . When the reception control unit 5126 receives the notification of PMT reception through the TS decoder unit 5123, it refers to the PMT in the system information table storage unit 5133, obtains the PID of the PCR, and writes it into the filter condition storage unit 5131 (S8104).

接收控制部5126在下述表示的各变量Cur_..._id中设定选择的服务/事件的各..._id,清除变量Cur_VE_comp_tag和变量Cur_AE_comp_tag和变量Cur_NE_id之值。这些变量,表示现在重放的目录标识符的信息(S8106)。The reception control unit 5126 sets each ..._id of the selected service/event in each variable Cur_..._id shown below, and clears the values of the variable Cur_VE_comp_tag, the variable Cur_AE_comp_tag, and the variable Cur_NE_id. These variables represent the information of the directory identifier to be reproduced now (S8106).

(变量Cur_...id)       ←(选择了的事件的...id值)(Variable Cur_...id) ←(...id value of the selected event)

变量Cur_original_network_id    ←original_network_id值Variable Cur_original_network_id ← original_network_id value

变量Cur_transport_stream_id    ←transport_stream_id值Variable Cur_transport_stream_id ←transport_stream_id value

变量Cur_VE_service_id    ←Service_id值Variable Cur_VE_service_id ← Service_id value

变量Cur_AE_Service_id    ←Service_id值Variable Cur_AE_Service_id ← Service_id value

变量Cur_NE_Service_id    ←Service_id值Variable Cur_NE_Service_id ← Service_id value

变量Cur_VE_event_id      ←event_id值Variable Cur_VE_event_id ← event_id value

变量Cur_VE_event_id      ←event_id值Variable Cur_VE_event_id ← event_id value

变量Cur_NE_event_id      ←evnet_id值Variable Cur_NE_event_id ← evnet_id value

变量Cur-VE_comp_tag      ←0(清除)Variable Cur-VE_comp_tag ←0 (clear)

变量Cur_AE_comp_tag    ←0(清除)Variable Cur_AE_comp_tag ←0 (clear)

变量Cur_NE_id         ←0(清除)Variable Cur_NE_id ←0 (clear)

接着接收控制部5126设定在下述表示的各变量new_...id中选择了的事件的各..._id值(S8108)。那时,从存储在系统信息表存储部5133中的PMT读出entry_VE_comp_tag和entry_AE_comp_tag和entry_NE_id值。Next, the reception control unit 5126 sets each ..._id value of the event selected in each variable new_...id shown below (S8108). At that time, the entry_VE_comp_tag and entry_AE_comp_tag and entry_NE_id values are read from the PMT stored in the system information table storage unit 5133 .

(变量new_...id)              ←(选择的事件的...id值)(variable new_...id) ←(...id value of the selected event)

变量new_original_network_id    ←original_network_id值Variable new_original_network_id ← original_network_id value

变量new_transport_stream_id    ←trans port_stream_id值Variable new_transport_stream_id ←trans port_stream_id value

变量new_VE_service_id        ←service_id值Variable new_VE_service_id ← service_id value

变量new_AE_service_id      ←service_id值Variable new_AE_service_id ← service_id value

变量new_NE_service_id     ←service_id值Variable new_NE_service_id ← service_id value

变量new_VE-event_id      ←event_id值Variable new_VE-event_id ← event_id value

变量new_AE_event_id     ←event_id值Variable new_AE_event_id ←event_id value

变量new_NE_comp_tag     ←event_id值Variable new_NE_comp_tag ← event_id value

变量new_VE_comp_tag     ←entry_AE_comp_tagVariable new_VE_comp_tag ← entry_AE_comp_tag

变量new_AE_comp_tag    ←entry_AE_comp_tagVariable new_AE_comp_tag ← entry_AE_comp_tag

变量new_NE_id    ←entry_NE_idVariable new_NE_id ← entry_NE_id

接着,通过重复目录切换处理(S8110)、表示目录切换为必要状态的目录变更标志的清0(S8112)、导航信息重放控制处理(S8114)、接收控制部5126)实施对话节目控制。Next, by repeating the directory switching process (S8110), clearing of the directory change flag indicating that directory switching is necessary (S8112), navigation information playback control processing (S8114), reception control unit 5126) implements dialogue program control.

1-3-9-2接收控制部5126:目录切换处理1-3-9-2 Reception Control Unit 5126: Directory Switching Process

图37是更详细地表示图36所示的目录切换处理(S8110)的流程图。FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing in more detail the directory switching process (S8110) shown in FIG. 36 .

首先,接收控制部5126本身作为存储着的变量的new_original_network_id和Cur_original_network_id值是一样的,并且,判定变量new_transport_stream_id和Cur_transport_stream_id值是否相同(S8202)。当相同时,使图像数据切换处理(S8210)、声音数据的切换处理(S8212)、导航信息的切换处理(S8214)同时进行,使处理结束。图像数据切换处理、声音数据切换处理,导航信息切换处理在后详述。First, the reception control unit 5126 itself has the same values of new_original_network_id and Cur_original_network_id as stored variables, and determines whether the values of the variables new_transport_stream_id and Cur_transport_stream_id are the same (S8202). If they are the same, image data switching processing (S8210), audio data switching processing (S8212), and navigation information switching processing (S8214) are performed simultaneously, and the processing is terminated. Image data switching processing, audio data switching processing, and navigation information switching processing will be described in detail later.

当不相同时,根据用MPEG2系统规格、DVB-SI规格确定的程序,参照系统信息表,把由变量new_original_network_id和变量new_transport_stream识别的输送流的接收指示给接收部5122(S8204)、在变量Cur_original_network_id中设定变量new_original_nework_id值、在变量Cur_transport_stream_id中设定变量new_transport_stream_id值(S8206),使变量Cur_VE_service_id、变量Cur_VE_evnet_id、变量Cur_VE_comp_tag、变量Cur_AE_service_id、变量Cur_AE_evenent_id、变量Cur_AE_comp_tag、变量Cur_NE_service_id、变量Cur_NE_enent_id、变量Cur_NE_id值清0(S8208),使图像数据切换处理(S8210)、声音数据切换处理(S8212)、导航信息切换处理(S8214)同时进行,使处理终止。When not identical, refer to the system information table according to the program determined by the MPEG2 system standard and the DVB-SI standard, and indicate to the receiving unit 5122 the reception of the transport stream identified by the variable new_original_network_id and the variable new_transport_stream (S8204), in the variable Cur_original_network_id设定变量new_original_nework_id值、在变量Cur_transport_stream_id中设定变量new_transport_stream_id值(S8206),使变量Cur_VE_service_id、变量Cur_VE_evnet_id、变量Cur_VE_comp_tag、变量Cur_AE_service_id、变量Cur_AE_evenent_id、变量Cur_AE_comp_tag、变量Cur_NE_service_id、变量Cur_NE_enent_id、变量Cur_NE_id值清0( S8208), the image data switching processing (S8210), the audio data switching processing (S8212), and the navigation information switching processing (S8214) are simultaneously performed, and the processing is terminated.

1-3-9-3接收控制部5126:图像数据切换处理1-3-9-3 Reception Control Unit 5126: Image Data Switching Process

图38是更详细地表示图37中所示的图像数据切换处理(S8210)的流程图。Fig. 38 is a flowchart showing in more detail the image data switching process (S8210) shown in Fig. 37 .

接收控制部5126自身存储的变量new_VE_service_id和Cur_VE_service之值为相同,并且判定变量new_VE_event_id和Cur_VE_event_id之值是否相同(S8302)。若相同时,则判定变量new_VE_comp_tag和Cur_VE_comp_tag之值是否相同(S8304),若肯定则结束处理,当否定时,移至图38的S8310。当S8302的判定为否定时,把对应于变量new_VE_service_id、new_VE_event_id的事件的PMT的滤波条件设定在滤波条件存储部5131中。TS译码器部5123分离所要求的PMT,存储在系统信息表存储部5133中,通知在接收控制部5126。接收控制部5126一旦接收PMT分离通知,则参照接收的PMT,取得PCR的PID,设定在滤波条件存储部5131中(S8306)。The reception control unit 5126 itself stores the same values of the variables new_VE_service_id and Cur_VE_service, and determines whether the values of the variables new_VE_event_id and Cur_VE_event_id are the same (S8302). If they are the same, it is determined whether the values of the variables new_VE_comp_tag and Cur_VE_comp_tag are the same (S8304), if yes, the process ends, and if negative, go to S8310 in FIG. 38 . When the determination in S8302 is negative, the filter condition of the PMT of the event corresponding to the variables new_VE_service_id and new_VE_event_id is set in the filter condition storage unit 5131 . The TS decoder unit 5123 separates the requested PMT, stores it in the system information table storage unit 5133 , and notifies it to the reception control unit 5126 . When the reception control unit 5126 receives the PMT separation notification, it refers to the received PMT, obtains the PID of the PCR, and sets it in the filter condition storage unit 5131 (S8306).

接收控制部5126在变量中设定变量new_VE_service_id之值,在变量Cur_VE_event_id中设定变量new_VE_event_id值(S8303)。在S8310中,接收控制部5126参照存储在对应于用变量Cur_VE_service_id、Cur_VE_event_id识别的事件的系统信息表存储部5133中的PMT,具有等于变量new_VE_comp_tag值的部分标记,取得传输的数据为图像数据的部分的PID。再将此设定在滤波条件存储部5131的图像数据的滤波条件中。The reception control unit 5126 sets the value of the variable new_VE_service_id in the variable, and sets the value of the variable new_VE_event_id in the variable Cur_VE_event_id (S8303). In S8310, the reception control unit 5126 refers to the PMT stored in the system information table storage unit 5133 corresponding to the event identified by the variables Cur_VE_service_id and Cur_VE_event_id, has a part tag equal to the value of the variable new_VE_comp_tag, and obtains the part where the transmitted data is image data the PID. This is then set in the filter condition of the image data in the filter condition storage unit 5131 .

TS译码器部5123根据滤波条件从输送流中分离对应于变量new_VE_comp_tag值的图像数据,向AV译码器部5124输出。AV译码器部5124使图像数据译码,通过重放部5128在显示部5129中显示(S9312)。The TS decoder unit 5123 separates the video data corresponding to the value of the variable new_VE_comp_tag from the transport stream according to the filter condition, and outputs it to the AV decoder unit 5124 . The AV decoder unit 5124 decodes the image data, and displays it on the display unit 5129 via the playback unit 5128 (S9312).

接收控制部5126在变量Cur_VE_comp_tag中设定变量new_VE_comp_tag值(S8314),结束处理。The reception control unit 5126 sets the value of the variable new_VE_comp_tag in the variable Cur_VE_comp_tag (S8314), and ends the process.

1-3-9-4接收控制部5126:声音数据切换处理1-3-9-4 Reception Control Unit 5126: Voice Data Switching Process

图39表示更详细地表示图37所示的声音数据切换处理(S8212)的流程图。FIG. 39 shows a flowchart showing the audio data switching process (S8212) shown in FIG. 37 in more detail.

接收控制部5126自身存储着的变量new_AE_service_id和Cur_AE_service_id值是相等的,并且,判定变量new_VE_evnet_id和Cur_AE_event_id之值是否相同(S8402)。若肯定时,判定变量new_AE_comp_tag和Cur_AE_comp_tag之值是否相同(S8404),若肯定,则终止处理,若否定则移至S8410。当S8402的判定为否定时,将对应于变量new_AE_service_id、new_AE_event_id的事件的PMT的滤波条件设定在滤波条件存储部5131中。TS译码器部5123分离要求的PMT,使存储在系统信息表存储部5133中,向接收控制部5126通知(S8406)。接收控制部5126在变量Cur_AE_id中设定变量new_AE_Service_id值,在变量Cur_AE_event_id中设定变量new_AE_event_id值(S8406),接收控制部5126参照存储在对应于用变量Cur_AE_Service_id、Cur_AE_event_id识别的事件的系统信息表存储部5133中的PMT,具有等于变量new_AE_comp_tag值的部分标记,取得传输的数据是声音数据的部分的PID(S8410),再将此设定在滤波条件存储部5131的声音数据的滤波条件中。The reception control unit 5126 itself stores the same values of the variables new_AE_service_id and Cur_AE_service_id, and determines whether the values of the variables new_VE_evnet_id and Cur_AE_event_id are the same (S8402). If yes, determine whether the values of the variables new_AE_comp_tag and Cur_AE_comp_tag are the same (S8404), if yes, terminate the process, and if no, move to S8410. When the determination in S8402 is negative, the filter condition of the PMT of the event corresponding to the variables new_AE_service_id and new_AE_event_id is set in the filter condition storage unit 5131 . The TS decoder unit 5123 separates the requested PMT, stores it in the system information table storage unit 5133, and notifies the reception control unit 5126 (S8406). The reception control unit 5126 sets the value of the variable new_AE_Service_id in the variable Cur_AE_id, sets the value of the variable new_AE_event_id in the variable Cur_AE_event_id (S8406), and the reception control unit 5126 refers to the storage unit stored in the system information table corresponding to the event identified by the variables Cur_AE_Service_id and Cur_AE_event_id. The PMT in 5133 has a part tag equal to the value of the variable new_AE_comp_tag, obtains the PID of the part where the transmitted data is audio data (S8410), and sets this in the filter condition of the audio data in the filter condition storage unit 5131.

TS译码器部5123根据滤波条件,从输送流中分离对应于变量new_AE_comp_tag值的声音数据,向AV译码器部5124输出。AV译码器部5124使该声音数据译码,通过重放部5128向声音输出部5130输出(S8412)。接收控制部5126在变量Cur_AE_comp_tag中设定变量new_AE_comp_tag值(S8414),处理终止。The TS decoder unit 5123 separates the audio data corresponding to the value of the variable new_AE_comp_tag from the transport stream according to the filter condition, and outputs it to the AV decoder unit 5124 . The AV decoder unit 5124 decodes the audio data, and outputs it to the audio output unit 5130 via the playback unit 5128 (S8412). The reception control unit 5126 sets the value of the variable new_AE_comp_tag in the variable Cur_AE_comp_tag (S8414), and the process ends.

1-3-9-5接收控制部5126:导航信息切换处理1-3-9-5 Reception Control Unit 5126: Navigation Information Switching Process

图40是更详细地表示图37所示的导航信息切换处理(S8214)的流程图。Fig. 40 is a flowchart showing in more detail the navigation information switching process (S8214) shown in Fig. 37 .

接收控制部5126自身存储着的变量new_NE_service_id和Cur_NE_service_id之值是相同的,并且判断变量的new_NE_event_id和Cur_NE_event_id之值是否相同(S8502)。若相同,则判定变量new_NE_id和Cur_NE_id之值是否相同(S8504),若相同,则处理终止。若不相同,则移至S8510。当S8502判定为否定时,则把对应于变量new_NE_service_id、new_NE_event_id的事件的PMT的滤波条件设定在滤波条件存储部5131中。TS译码器部5123分离要求的PMT,存储在系统信息表存储部5133中,通知到接收控制部5126(S8506)。接收控制部5126在变量Cur_NE_service_id中设定变量new_NE_service_id值,在变量Cur_NE_event_id中设定变量new_NE_event_id值(S8508)。接收控制部5126参照存储在系统信息表存储部5133中的PMT,而系统信息表存储部对应于用变量Cur_NE_service_id、Cur_NE_event_id识别的事件,取得传输变量new_NE_id导航信息的部分PID(S8510)。接着,接收控制部5126在滤波条件存储部5131导航信息的滤波条件中设定作为“PID”用S8510取得的PID值,设定变量new_NE-id值作为“table_id_extenstion”。“Version_no”设定为无条件。TS译码器部5123根据滤波条件从输送流中分离对应于变量new_NE_id值的导航信息表,存储在导航信息表存储部5132中,通知给接收控制部5126。即,在最初取得导航信息表时,与在导航信息表上附加的方案位信息无关,仅以PID和table_id_extension之值分离取得那时发射的导航信息表(S8512)。接收控制部5126在变量Cur_NE中设定变量new_NE_id值(S8514),使处理终止。The reception control unit 5126 itself stores the same values of the variables new_NE_service_id and Cur_NE_service_id, and judges whether the values of the variables new_NE_event_id and Cur_NE_event_id are the same (S8502). If they are the same, it is determined whether the values of the variables new_NE_id and Cur_NE_id are the same (S8504), and if they are the same, the process is terminated. If not, move to S8510. When the determination in S8502 is negative, the filter condition of the PMT of the event corresponding to the variables new_NE_service_id and new_NE_event_id is set in the filter condition storage unit 5131 . The TS decoder unit 5123 separates the requested PMT, stores it in the system information table storage unit 5133, and notifies the reception control unit 5126 (S8506). The reception control unit 5126 sets the value of the variable new_NE_service_id in the variable Cur_NE_service_id, and sets the value of the variable new_NE_event_id in the variable Cur_NE_event_id (S8508). The reception control unit 5126 refers to the PMT stored in the system information table storage unit 5133, and the system information table storage unit acquires the partial PID of the transmission variable new_NE_id navigation information corresponding to the event identified by the variables Cur_NE_service_id and Cur_NE_event_id (S8510). Next, the reception control unit 5126 sets the PID value obtained in S8510 as "PID" in the filter condition of the navigation information in the filter condition storage unit 5131, and sets the variable new_NE-id value as "table_id_extension". "Version_no" is set to be unconditional. The TS decoder unit 5123 separates the navigation information table corresponding to the value of the variable new_NE_id from the transport stream according to the filter condition, stores it in the navigation information table storage unit 5132 , and notifies the reception control unit 5126 . That is, when the navigation information table is acquired for the first time, the navigation information table transmitted at that time is separately acquired only by the value of PID and table_id_extension regardless of the scheme bit information added to the navigation information table (S8512). The reception control unit 5126 sets the value of the variable new_NE_id in the variable Cur_NE (S8514), and terminates the process.

1-3-9-6接收控制部5126:根据导航信息的对话控制1-3-9-6 Reception Control Unit 5126: Dialogue Control Based on Navigation Information

图41是表示根据导航信息的对话控制处理的流程图。Fig. 41 is a flowchart showing dialogue control processing based on navigation information.

接收控制部5126等待旨在从TS译码器部5123分离导航信息表的通知(S8602)、判断有无通知。若有则进入S8606,若无则返回S8602(S8604)。接收控制部5126读出存储在导航信息表存储部5132中的导航信息表的方案号,在此上加“1”,设定为滤波条件存储部5131导航信息表的滤波条件的“version_no”(S8606)。然后接收控制部5126将变量Cur_focus初始化为“0”。并且,读出存储在导航信息表存储部5132中的导航信息表,参照目标定义表和位标志表,读出在图像上显示的位标志数据和显示座标。这时,有关目标索引值等于Cur_focus的键目标,读出对应于在“FocusedBittmap”栏中所示的位标志索引值的位标志数据,有关除此以外的目标索引值的键目标读出对应于“Normal Bimap”栏中所示的位标志索引值的位标志数据(S8610)。然后,分别设定变量Start_time中有效时间表的“start_time”值,变量end_time中有效时间表的“end_time”值(S8612)。The reception control unit 5126 waits for a notification to separate the navigation information table from the TS decoder unit 5123 (S8602), and determines whether there is a notification. If there is, go to S8606, if not, return to S8602 (S8604). The reception control unit 5126 reads out the plan number of the navigation information table stored in the navigation information table storage unit 5132, adds “1” to it, and sets it as “version_no” ( S8606). Then the reception control unit 5126 initializes the variable Cur_focus to "0". Then, the navigation information table stored in the navigation information table storage unit 5132 is read out, the object definition table and the bit mark table are referred to, and bit mark data and display coordinates displayed on the image are read out. At this time, for the key object whose target index value is equal to Cur_focus, the bit mark data corresponding to the bit mark index value shown in the "FocusedBittmap" column is read, and the key objects for other target index values corresponding to Bit flag data of the bit flag index value shown in the "Normal Bimap" column (S8610). Then, the "start_time" value of the effective timetable in the variable Start_time and the "end_time" value of the effective timetable in the variable end_time are respectively set (S8612).

接收控制部5126参照AV译码器部5124的时钟部,在变量Cur_time中设定现在时间(S8614)。然后,等待达到变量start_time值成为变量Cur_time值以上(S8616),在S8610中读出的位标志数据和座标值的信息被输出到重放部5128。重放部5128在AV译码器部5124译了码的图像数据上,把接收控制部5126输出的位标志数据重选在指定了的座标位置上,显示于显示部5129中(S8618)。The reception control unit 5126 refers to the clock unit of the AV decoder unit 5124, and sets the current time in the variable Cur_time (S8614). After that, the value of the variable start_time becomes equal to or greater than the value of the variable Cur_time (S8616), and the information of the bit mark data and the coordinate value read in S8610 is output to the playback unit 5128. The playback unit 5128 reselects the bit mark data output from the reception control unit 5126 at the designated coordinate position on the video data decoded by the AV decoder unit 5124, and displays it on the display unit 5129 (S8618).

接着,接收控制部5126判定变量Cur_time值是否为变量end_time值以上(S8622),若是,则除去在重放部5128中显示中的位标志数据(S8624),返回S8602。并且,在S8622中若否定,则作用户输入处理。有关用户输入的详细目录在后描述(S8626)。Next, the reception control unit 5126 determines whether the value of the variable Cur_time is equal to or greater than the value of the variable end_time (S8622), and if so, removes the bit flag data being displayed on the playback unit 5128 (S8624), and returns to S8602. And, if it is negative in S8622, user input processing is performed. The details about user input will be described later (S8626).

接收控制部5126判定变量(ontents changeflag是否为1(S8626),若是,则使导航信息的重放控制处理结束。若非,则判定从TS译码器部5123是否有取得新的导航信息表的通知(S8630)。若有时,则指示在重放部5128中消除显示中的位标志数据(S8632)、返回S8606。还有,在S8630中,当判定无通知时,则返回S8622。Whether reception control part 5126 judges variable (ontentschangeflag) is 1 (S8626), if so, then makes the playback control process of navigation information end. If not, then judges whether there is the notification that obtains new navigation information table from TS decoder part 5123 (S8630). If so, instruct to cancel the displayed bit mark data in the playback unit 5128 (S8632), and return to S8606. Also, in S8630, when it is judged that there is no notification, then return to S8622.

1-3-9-7接收控制部5126:根据导航信息形成的用户I/F处理1-3-9-7 Reception control unit 5126: User I/F processing based on navigation information

图42是表示根据导航信息所作的用户I/F(Inter Face)处理的流程图。Fig. 42 is a flowchart showing user I/F (Inter Face) processing based on navigation information.

接收控制部5126判断自信号接收部5127接收的利用者输入是否为“右”键(S8702)。若非,则转至S8708,若是则使变量Cur_focus之值加1。此外,当变量Cur_focus之值等于导航信息表存储部5132中的导航信息表中的目标索引值的最大值时,保持不变(S8704),移至S8706。接收控制部5126参照在导航信息表存储部5132中存储部5132存储着的导航信息表中的目标定义表和位标志,读出画面上显示的位标志数据和显示位置的座标值,向重放部5128输出。这时,有关目标索引值等于Cur_focus的键目标,读出对应于在“Focused Bitmap”栏中显示的位标志索引值的位标志数据,对于除此以外的目标索引值的键目标,读出对应于在“NormalBitmap”栏中所示的位标志索引值的位标志数据。重放部5128在AV译码器部5124译了码的图像数据上,把该位标志数据重迭在指定了的位置上,显示在显示部5129上,终止用户输入处理(S8706)。The reception control unit 5126 judges whether the user input received from the signal reception unit 5127 is a "right" key (S8702). If not, go to S8708, if yes, add 1 to the value of the variable Cur_focus. In addition, when the value of the variable Cur_focus is equal to the maximum value of the target index value in the navigation information table in the navigation information table storage unit 5132, it remains unchanged (S8704), and moves to S8706. The reception control unit 5126 refers to the object definition table and the bit flag in the navigation information table stored in the navigation information table storage unit 5132 in the navigation information table storage unit 5132, reads the bit flag data displayed on the screen and the coordinate value of the display position, and writes the output from the output unit 5128. At this time, for the key object whose target index value is equal to Cur_focus, read the bit mark data corresponding to the bit mark index value displayed in the "Focused Bitmap" column, and read the corresponding Bitmark data at the bitmark index value shown in the "NormalBitmap" column. The playback unit 5128 superimposes the bit mark data at the designated position on the image data decoded by the AV decoder unit 5124, displays it on the display unit 5129, and terminates the user input process (S8706).

然后,在S8708中,接收控制部5126判断由信号接收部5127接收了的利用者输入是否为“左”键(S8708),若不是,则移至S8712,当为“左”键时,使变量Cur_focus之值减1。此外,当变量Cur_focus值为“0”时,维持现状(S8710),移至S8706。Then, in S8708, the reception control unit 5126 judges whether the user input received by the signal receiving unit 5127 is a "left" key (S8708), if not, then moves to S8712, and when it is a "left" key, the variable The value of Cur_focus is reduced by 1. Also, when the value of the variable Cur_focus is "0", the status quo is maintained (S8710), and the process moves to S8706.

接着接收控制部5126判断向信号接收部5127接收的利用者输入是否为“确定”(S8708),若为“确定”时,则移至S8714,否则,使用户输入终止。Next, the reception control unit 5126 judges whether the user input received by the signal receiving unit 5127 is “determined” (S8708). If it is “determined”, the process moves to S8714, otherwise, the user input is terminated.

S8714中,接收控制部5126参照存储在导航信息表存储部5132中的导航信息表中目标定义表,取得目标索引值等于变量Cur_focus值的键目标的处理器索引值,参照处理器定义表,通过对应于处理器索引值的处理器读入原本。判断原本是否为“goto_contents”(S8716),若不是,则移至S8724,若是,则读入指引数高连接索引值(S8718)。In S8714, the reception control unit 5126 refers to the object definition table in the navigation information table stored in the navigation information table storage unit 5132, obtains the processor index value of the key object whose object index value is equal to the variable Cur_focus value, refers to the processor definition table, and passes The processor read-in script corresponding to the processor index value. Judging whether it is "goto_contents" (S8716), if not, then move to S8724, if so, then read in the high link index value of the index number (S8718).

接收控制部5126参照导航信息表的高连接表,把对应于在S8718中读入的高连接索引值的目录标识符的original_network_id、transport_stream_id、VE_service_id、VE_event_id、VE_comp_tag、AE_service_id、AE_event_id、AE_comp_tag、NE_service_id、NE_event_id、NE_id的值分别设定在变量new_original_network_id、new_transport_stream_id、new_VE_service_id、new_VE_erent_id、new_VE_comp_tag,new_AE_service_id、new_AE_event_id、new_AE_comp_tag、new_NE_service_id、new_NE_event_id、new_NE_id中。The reception control unit 5126 refers to the high-connection table of the navigation information table, and assigns original_network_id, transport_stream_id, VE_service_id, VE_event_id, VE_comp_tag, AE_service_id, AE_event_id, AE_comp_tag, NE_service_id, NE_event_id of the directory identifier corresponding to the high-connection index value read in S8718 , NE_id values are respectively set in the variables new_original_network_id, new_transport_stream_id, new_VE_service_id, new_VE_erent_id, new_VE_comp_tag, new_AE_service_id, new_AE_event_id, new_AE_comp_tag, new_NE_service_id, new_NE_event_id, new_NE_id.

然而,在高连接表中设有设定值,即,有关“-”的标识符,各变量的原来值不变(S8720)。接收控制部5126把变量Contents Chageflag值设定为“1”(S8722)、终止用户输入处理。However, if a set value is set in the high connection table, that is, an identifier related to "-", the original value of each variable is not changed (S8720). The reception control unit 5126 sets the value of the variable ContentsChageflag to "1" (S8722), and terminates the user input process.

在S8724中,接收控制部5126判断原本是否为“goto_entry”(S8724),若非,则终止用户I/F处理,若是,则参照在对应于用变量Cur_NE_service_id、Cur_NE_erent_id识别的事件的系统表存储部5133中存储着的PMT,把“entry_VE_comp_tag”、“entry_AE_comp_tag”、“entry_NE_id”之值分别设定成变量new_VE_comp_tag、变量new_AE_comp_tag、变量new_NE_id,将变量Cur_NE_service_id值设定成变量new_VE_service_id、变量new_AE_service_id,将变量new_NE_event_id  值设定成变量new_AE_erent_id、变量new_AE_event_AE_event_id(S8726),移至S8722。In S8724, the reception control unit 5126 judges whether it is originally "goto_entry" (S8724), if not, then terminates the user I/F processing, and if so, refers to the system table storage unit 5133 corresponding to the event identified by the variables Cur_NE_service_id and Cur_NE_erent_id In the PMT stored in , set the values of "entry_VE_comp_tag", "entry_AE_comp_tag", and "entry_NE_id" to the variable new_VE_comp_tag, variable new_AE_comp_tag, and variable new_NE_id respectively, set the variable Cur_NE_service_id to the variable new_VE_service_id, variable new_AE_service_id, and set the variable new_NE_event_id to the value Set to variable new_AE_erent_id, variable new_AE_event_AE_event_id (S8726), and move to S8722.

1-3-10接收装置5121的工作1-3-10 Operation of receiving device 5121

有关如上构成的本发明接收装置5121,下面将其工作分为1.对话节目选择接收工作,2.根据导航信息的显示工作,3.根据导航信息的用户I/F处理、4.对目录切换处理分开进行说明。Regarding the receiving device 5121 of the present invention constituted as above, its work is divided into 1. dialogue program selection receiving work, 2. display work based on navigation information, 3. user I/F processing based on navigation information, and 4. directory switching. Processing is explained separately.

1-3-10-1.1对话节目选择接收工作1-3-10-1.1 Selection and reception of dialogue programs

在使接收装置5121通电时,接收包括在输送流中的各种系统信息表,写入系统信息表存储部5133中。When the receiving device 5121 is powered on, various system information tables included in the transport stream are received and written into the system information table storage unit 5133 .

当由用户选择对话节目,即图29所示的输送流中多路了的事件,则接收控制部5126通过存储在系统信息表存储部5133中的NIT(参照图22),取得用“0X001”识别Original_network_id、用“0X0001”识别transport_stream_id的输送流频率等的传输诸元的信息,向接收部5122指示输送流的接收。When the user selects a dialogue program, that is, an event that is multiplexed in the transport stream shown in FIG. Information on transport elements such as identifying the original_network_id, the transport stream frequency of the transport_stream_id identified by "0X0001", instructs the receiving unit 5122 to receive the transport stream.

再有,接收控制部5126从PAT(参照图23),取得对话节目的“Program_no”等于service_id值的“0X0002”的程序的PMT的PID“0X0090”,将此设定成滤波条件存储部5131中的PMT的滤波条件。其结果,利用TS译码器部5123分离图24所示的PMT7001,写入系统信息表存储部5133。Furthermore, the reception control unit 5126 acquires the PID “0X0090” of the PMT of the program whose “Program_no” of the dialogue program is equal to “0X0002” of the service_id value from the PAT (refer to FIG. 23 ), and sets this in the filter condition storage unit 5131. The filter condition of the PMT. As a result, the PMT 7001 shown in FIG. 24 is separated by the TS decoder unit 5123 and written in the system information table storage unit 5133 .

接收控制部5126从存储在系统信息表存储部5133中的PMT 7001读出PCR的PID“0X0091”,设定成滤波条件存储部5131中的PCR的滤波条件。The reception control unit 5126 reads the PCR PID “0X0091” from the PMT 7001 stored in the system information table storage unit 5133, and sets it as the PCR filter condition in the filter condition storage unit 5131.

还有接收控制部5126读出进入目录图像数据、声音数据、导航信息名标识符,设定成滤波条件存储部5131中的滤波条件。Furthermore, the reception control unit 5126 reads out the entry list image data, audio data, and navigation information name identifier, and sets them as filter conditions in the filter condition storage unit 5131 .

再进一步详细来说,接收控制部5126参照在PMT 7001中图22中所示的Entry_Descriptor 7003,读出“entry_VE_comp_tag”值“0X00”,提供“component_tag”值为“0X00”的stream_identifier_descriptor,并且,读出传输的数据种类为图像数据的部分PID值“0X0096”,设定成滤波条件存储部5131中的图像数据的滤波条件的“PID”。In further detail, the reception control unit 5126 refers to the Entry_Descriptor 7003 shown in FIG. 22 in the PMT 7001, reads the "entry_VE_comp_tag" value "0X00", provides the stream_identifier_descriptor with the "component_tag" value "0X00", and reads The type of data to be transferred is the partial PID value “0X0096” of the image data, which is set as the “PID” of the filter condition of the image data in the filter condition storage unit 5131 .

同样,接收控制部5126读出“entry_AE_comp_tag”值“0X00”,提供“component_tag”值为“0X00”的stream_identifier_descriptor,并且,读出传输的数据种类为声音数据的PID值“0X0098”,设定成滤波条件存储部5131中的声音数据的滤波条件的“PID”。Similarly, the reception control unit 5126 reads the "entry_AE_comp_tag" value "0X00", provides the stream_identifier_descriptor with the "component_tag" value "0X00", and reads the PID value "0X0098" of the audio data as the type of data to be transmitted, and sets it as a filter "PID" of the filter condition of the audio data stored in the condition storage unit 5131 .

并且同样,接收控制部5126读出“entry_NE_id”值“0X0000”,设定成滤波条件存储部5131中导航信息表的滤波条件“table_id_extention”。加之,接收控制部5126参照PMT7001的表7004,读出提供包括在“min_NE_id”值和“max_NE_id”值之间的“0X0000”的“NE_coanpoment_Desariptor(0)”7201的部分PID值“0X0092”,设定成导航信息表滤波条件“PID”。而且,把滤波条件“Version_no”设定成无条件。这时,滤波条件存储部5131保持的滤波条件表要成为图33A所示的滤波条件表7801。And similarly, the reception control unit 5126 reads the “entry_NE_id” value “0X0000” and sets it as the filter condition “table_id_extention” of the navigation information table in the filter condition storage unit 5131 . In addition, the reception control unit 5126 refers to the table 7004 of the PMT 7001, reads out the partial PID value "0X0092" of the "NE_coanpoment_Desariptor(0)" 7201 that provides "0X0000" included between the "min_NE_id" value and the "max_NE_id" value, and sets into the navigation information table filter condition "PID". Also, the filter condition "Version_no" is set to be unconditional. In this case, the filter condition table held by the filter condition storage unit 5131 becomes the filter condition table 7801 shown in FIG. 33A.

以此,由TS译码器部5123分离输送流中图像数据“Video0.m2v”和声音数据“Audio0、m2a”,向AV译码器部5124输出。并且,滤波条件“Version_no”为无条件时,根据时间,分离导航信息表“NVT(0,0)”、“NVT(0,1)”、“NVT(0,2)”、“NVT(0,3)”、“NVT(0,4)”中任一个,写入导航信息表存储部5132。As a result, the video data "Video0.m2v" and the audio data "Audio0, m2a" in the transport stream are separated by the TS decoder unit 5123 and output to the AV decoder unit 5124 . And, when the filter condition "Version_no" is unconditional, the navigation information tables "NVT(0,0)", "NVT(0,1)", "NVT(0,2)", "NVT(0, 3)" and "NVT(0,4)" are written in the navigation information table storage unit 5132.

并且,接收控制部5126从导航信息表存储部5132读出分离的导航信息表,把在分配给分离的导航信息表的方案号上加“1”的值写进滤波条件存储部5131中的导航信息表的滤波条件“Version_no”。然而,若在方案号值上加1,则在最大值超引时返回“0”。Then, the reception control unit 5126 reads the separated navigation information table from the navigation information table storage unit 5132, and writes a value obtained by adding “1” to the plan number assigned to the separated navigation information table in the navigation information table in the filter condition storage unit 5131. The filter condition "Version_no" of the information table. However, adding 1 to the scheme number value returns "0" when the maximum value is overquoted.

例如,当TS译码器部5123根据如图33所示的滤波条件表7801分离图17所示的文件名“NVT(0,0”的导航信息表6301情况下,接收控制部5126一旦接受旨在分离导航信息表的通知,则从导航信息表存储部5132读出导航信息表6301,再在方案号值“0”上加“1”,把“0X01”设定成滤波条件存储部5131中的导航信息的滤波条件的“Version_no”。这时,滤波条件存储部5131中的滤波条件表要成为图33B所示的滤波条件表。For example, when the TS decoder unit 5123 separates the navigation information table 6301 of the file name “NVT(0,0” shown in FIG. 17 from the filter condition table 7801 shown in FIG. When separating the notification of the navigation information table, the navigation information table 6301 is read from the navigation information table storage part 5132, and "1" is added to the value of the program number "0", and "0X01" is set in the filter condition storage part 5131 "Version_no" of the filter condition of the navigation information. At this time, the filter condition table in the filter condition storage unit 5131 should be the filter condition table shown in FIG. 33B.

借此,TS译码器5123由于仅分离具有当前重放中的导航信息表的下一个方案号的导航信息,所以要逢接收控制部5126接收新的导航信息,没必要确认目录是否变化,减轻了负担。In this way, since the TS decoder 5123 separates only the navigation information having the next plan number of the navigation information table currently being reproduced, it is not necessary to check whether the content has changed every time the reception control unit 5126 receives new navigation information, thereby reducing the burden on the user. burdened.

1-3-10-2 2.导航信息产生的显示工作1-3-10-2 2. Display work generated by navigation information

根据如上所述分离的导航信息表,接收控制部5126如下控制包括在其中的目标(键和图像)的显示。在此,分离图17所示的导航信息“NVT(0,0)”。Based on the navigation information table separated as described above, the reception control section 5126 controls the display of objects (keys and images) included therein as follows. Here, the navigation information "NVT(0,0)" shown in FIG. 17 is separated.

根据分离的导航信息,接收控制部5126使变量Cur_focus初始化为“0”,参照图17所示的NVT(0,0)的目标定义表6302、位标志表6305,读出对应于目标索引值“0”栏上显示的X座标值“20”和Y座标值“400”及“Focused Bitmap”栏上显示的位标志索引值“1”的位标志数据,再读出对应于目标索引值“1”栏中显示的X座标值“200”和Y座标值“400”及“Normal Bitmap”栏的位标志索引值“2”的位标志数据。According to the separated navigation information, the reception control unit 5126 initializes the variable Cur_focus to "0", refers to the target definition table 6302 and the bit flag table 6305 of NVT (0, 0) shown in FIG. The X coordinate value "20" and the Y coordinate value "400" displayed on the "0" column and the bit mark data of the bit mark index value "1" displayed on the "Focused Bitmap" column, and then read out the corresponding target index value The bit mark data of the X coordinate value "200" and the Y coordinate value "400" displayed in the "1" column and the bit mark index value "2" in the "Normal Bitmap" column.

其后,一旦当前时间成为有效时间表6306的“staRT_time”值“5”,接收控制部5126则把在读出中的位标志数据和座标值向重放部5128输出。Thereafter, when the current time becomes the "staRT_time" value "5" of the effective time table 6306, the reception control unit 5126 outputs the bit mark data and the coordinate value being read to the playback unit 5128.

另一方面,由AV译码器部5124使通过TS译码器部5123分离了的活动图像5201(“Video0,m2V”)和声音数据5203(“Audio0,m2a”)译码,向重放部5128输出。On the other hand, the moving image 5201 ("Video0, m2V") and audio data 5203 ("Audio0, m2a") separated by the TS decoder part 5123 are decoded by the AV decoder part 5124, and sent to the playback part 5128 output.

重放部5128输出在从AV译码器5124输出的图像数据5201上重迭接收控制部5126输出的位标志的图像信号。The playback unit 5128 outputs an image signal in which the bit flag output from the reception control unit 5126 is superimposed on the image data 5201 output from the AV decoder 5124 .

在图34A中显示该情况下的显示图像。所述图显示图像7901相当于图5所示的场面01b,表示在活动图像上用位标志表示的“大阪详情”键和“参见关东”键。其中“大阪详情”键根据变量Cur_focus成为选择状态的显示。A display image in this case is shown in FIG. 34A. The map display image 7901 corresponds to the scene 01b shown in FIG. 5, and shows the "Details of Osaka" key and the "See Kanto" key indicated by bit marks on the moving image. Among them, the "Osaka details" button becomes the display of the selected state according to the variable Cur_focus.

该显示状态连续达到NVT(0,0)中的有效时间表6306中所示的“end_time”值“65”,或达到根据用户操作的目录切换。在当前时间成为“end_time”值情况下,在成为再下一个方案NVT(0,1)的开始时间的瞬间,其显示动作与上述一样进行。This display state continues up to the "end_time" value "65" shown in the effective time table 6306 in NVT(0,0), or up to directory switching according to user operations. When the current time becomes the value of "end_time", the display operation is performed in the same manner as described above at the moment when the start time of the next scenario NVT(0, 1) becomes.

1-3-10-3.3.导航信息形成的用户I/F处理1-3-10-3.3. User I/F processing of navigation information formation

现在设定显示图5所示的场面01b即图34A的显示图像。It is now set to display the scene 01b shown in FIG. 5, that is, the display image in FIG. 34A.

接收控制部5126一旦通过信号接收部5127接收利用者操作的信号,则当其利用者操作的信号为“右”键情况下,将变量Cur_focus值更新为“1”,参照导航信息存储部5132,读出对应于图17所示的NVT(0,0)的目标索引值“1”键目标的“Focused Bitmap”栏中所示的位标志索引值“3”的位标志数据,与X座标“200”、Y座标“400”同时向重放部5128输出。有关与变量Cur_focus值“1”不一致的目标索引值的键目标,通过“NormalBitmap”栏求位标志数据,同样向重放部5128输出。Once the receiving control unit 5126 receives the signal operated by the user through the signal receiving unit 5127, when the signal operated by the user is the “right” key, the value of the variable Cur_focus is updated to “1”, referring to the navigation information storage unit 5132, Read the bit mark data corresponding to the bit mark index value "3" shown in the "Focused Bitmap" column of the target index value "1" key target of NVT(0,0) shown in Figure 17, and the X coordinate "200" and the Y coordinate "400" are simultaneously output to the playback unit 5128 . Regarding the key object whose object index value does not match the variable Cur_focus value "1", the bit flag data is obtained from the "NormalBitmap" field, and is similarly output to the playback unit 5128 .

以此,图34A所示的“大阪详情”键02b变成非选择状态,而“参见关东”键03b变成选择状态。With this, the "Details of Osaka" key 02b shown in FIG. 34A becomes unselected, and the "See Kanto" key 03b becomes selected.

再有当利用者操作的信号为“左”键时,变量Cur_focus值更新为“0”,再次返回图34A的显示状态。Furthermore, when the signal operated by the user is the "Left" key, the value of the variable Cur_focus is updated to "0", returning to the display state of FIG. 34A again.

而且,当利用者操作信号为“确定”键时,接收控制部5126参照导航信息存储部5132,通过图17所示的NVT(0,0)的目标索引值等于Cur_focus“0”的键目标的处理器读入原本。这时,由于原本为“goto_contents(Hyperlink-Index 0)”,所以读出对应下于指数的高连接索引值的连接端的目录的各种标识符,作如下的目录切换处理。Moreover, when the user operates the "OK" key, the reception control unit 5126 refers to the navigation information storage unit 5132, and passes the target index value of NVT (0, 0) shown in FIG. 17 equal to the key target of Cur_focus "0". The processor reads the original. At this time, since it is originally "goto_contents(Hyperlink-Index 0)", various identifiers of the directory corresponding to the link terminal with a high link index value lower than the index are read, and the directory switching process is performed as follows.

1-3-10-4.4.目录切换处理1-3-10-4.4. Directory switching processing

如上所述在显示图34A的显示图像的状态子,对当利用者操作信号为确定键时,也就是对从图5的目录0的场面01b切换成目录1的场面11b之情况下进行说明。As described above, in the state of displaying the display image in FIG. 34A , when the user operates the OK key, that is, when the scene 01b of the list 0 in FIG. 5 is switched to the scene 11b of the list 1, it will be described.

该情况下,如上所述读出对应于NVT(0,0)中高连接索引值“0”的连接端的目录的各种标识符。In this case, various identifiers of the list corresponding to the connection end of the high connection index value "0" in NVT(0,0) are read as described above.

在各种标识符中,由于“NE_id”以外的标识符全部为“-”,所以有关连接端的目录所属的输送流标识符,以及连接端目录图像数据、声音数据、导航信息的各所属的服务标识符、以及事件标识符、连接端目录图像数据标识符、声音数据标识符,分别表示与现在重放着的目录标识符相等的标识符。即,连接端目录的图像数据、声音数据与现在重放中的目录一样,表示只是导航信息不同。Among various identifiers, all identifiers other than "NE_id" are "-", so the identifier of the transport stream to which the content of the connection terminal belongs, and the services to which the content of the connection terminal belongs, such as image data, audio data, and navigation information The identifier, the event identifier, the connected-side content image data identifier, and the audio data identifier each represent an identifier equivalent to the currently reproduced content identifier. That is, the image data and audio data of the content on the connection side are the same as those currently being reproduced, and only the navigation information is different.

接收控制部5126读出导航信息标识符“NE_id”值“0X0001”,设定成滤波条件存储部5131中导航信息表的滤波条件的“table_id_extension”。The reception control unit 5126 reads out the navigation information identifier “NE_id” value “0X0001” and sets it as the filter condition “table_id_extension” of the navigation information table in the filter condition storage unit 5131 .

其次,接收控制部5126参照系统信息表存储部5133中的PMT7001的表7004,读出提供在“min_NE_id”值和“max_NE_id”值之间所包括的“NE_component_Descriptor(1)”7201的部分的PID值“0X0093”,同样,设定成导航信息表的滤波条件“PID”。而且,导航信息滤波条件的“Version_no”设定为无条件。Next, the reception control unit 5126 refers to the table 7004 of the PMT 7001 in the system information table storage unit 5133, and reads out the PID value that provides the part of the "NE_component_Descriptor(1)" 7201 included between the "min_NE_id" value and the "max_NE_id" value. "0X0093" is similarly set as the filter condition "PID" of the navigation information table. Also, "Version_no" of the navigation information filtering condition is set to be unconditional.

根据设定了的滤波条件,TS译码器部5123分离图18所示的“NVT(1,0)”,存储在导航信息表存储部5132中,将其宗旨通知到接收控制部5126。Based on the set filter conditions, TS decoder unit 5123 separates "NVT (1,0)" shown in FIG. 18, stores it in navigation information table storage unit 5132, and notifies reception control unit 5126 of the result.

接收控制部5126把在提供给分离了的NVT(1,0)的方案号“0”上加“1”的值设定成滤波条件“Version_no”栏,以此备于修改导航信息情况。The reception control unit 5126 sets a value obtained by adding "1" to the plan number "0" provided to the separated NVT(1,0) in the filter condition "Version_no" column, thereby preparing for the case of revising the navigation information.

进而,根据存储在导航信息存储部5132中的“NVT(1,0)”,作上述1的显示动作,3的用户I/F处理。根据图34B所示的“NVT(1,0)”显示重放的显示画面。对于图34A,虽然活动图像数据、声音数据是相同的,但由于导航信息不同,所以键和文字信息不同。Furthermore, based on "NVT (1, 0)" stored in the navigation information storage unit 5132, the above-mentioned display operation of 1 and user I/F processing of 3 are performed. The playback display screen is displayed based on "NVT(1,0)" shown in FIG. 34B. In FIG. 34A, although the video data and audio data are the same, the key and character information are different because the navigation information is different.

而且,对在显示部5129显示图34C所示的显示图像7903的状态下,利用者用遥控器等输入“确定”键的情况下,就是说对从图5的目录0的场面01e切换成目录1的场面11e的情况下进行说明。In addition, when the user inputs the "OK" key with a remote control or the like in the state where the display portion 5129 displays the display image 7903 shown in FIG. The description will be given in the case of scene 11e of 1.

在该情况下,利用接收控制部5126给滤波条件存储部5131的滤波条件“PID”、“table_id_extension”、“Version_no”分别设定“0X0093”、“0X0001”、无条件。借此,由TS译码器部5123从图29中所示的输送流分离图20所示的“NVT(1,1)”,存储在导航信息表存储部5132中。接收控制部5126根据“NVT(1,1)”进行上述1的显示动作,3的用户I/F处理。其结果,显示图34D所示的显示图像7904。In this case, the reception control unit 5126 sets “0X0093”, “0X0001” and no condition to the filter conditions “PID”, “table_id_extension”, and “Version_no” of the filter condition storage unit 5131 , respectively. Thus, "NVT (1, 1)" shown in FIG. 20 is separated from the transport stream shown in FIG. 29 by the TS decoder unit 5123 and stored in the navigation information table storage unit 5132 . The reception control unit 5126 performs the above-mentioned display operation of 1 and user I/F processing of 3 based on "NVT (1, 1)". As a result, display image 7904 shown in FIG. 34D is displayed.

接着就有关在显示部5129显示图35A的显示图像8001状态下,利用者用遥控器输入“确定”键的情况下,也就是说从图5的目录0的场面01a切换至目录2的场面21a情况下,进行说明。Next, in the case where the display portion 5129 displays the display image 8001 of FIG. 35A and the user inputs the "OK" key with the remote controller, that is, switching from the scene 01a of the list 0 in FIG. 5 to the scene 21a of the list 2 case, explain.

接收控制部5126参照导航信息表存储部5132中导航信息表6301的目标定义表6302、及处理器定义表6303,读出原本“goto_contents”和其指引数索引值“1”。The reception control unit 5126 refers to the object definition table 6302 and the processor definition table 6303 of the navigation information table 6301 in the navigation information table storage unit 5132, and reads out the original "goto_contents" and its index value "1".

接收控制部5126从高连接表6304读出对应于索引值“1”的连接端的目录标识符。接收控制部5126判断连接端目录所属的输送流标识符、及连接端目录的图像数据、声音数据、导航信息的各所属的服务标识符和事件标识符相等,不作PMT的获取处理。而且,由于图像数据、声音数据、导航信息的标识符不同,所以自然对这些接收作切换。The reception control unit 5126 reads out the directory identifier of the connection end corresponding to the index value "1" from the high connection table 6304 . The reception control unit 5126 judges that the transport stream identifier to which the connection destination directory belongs, and the service identifier and event identifier to which the image data, audio data, and navigation information of the connection destination directory belong are equal, and does not perform PMT acquisition processing. Furthermore, since the identifiers of image data, audio data, and navigation information are different, these receptions are naturally switched.

接收控制部5126读出图像数据标识符“VE_comp_tag”值“0X01”,参照系统信息表存储部5133中的PMT7001表7004,提供“component)tag”值为“0X01”的Stream_identifier_descriptor,而且读出传输的数据种类为图像数据的部分的PID值“0X0097”,设定成滤波条件存储部5131中图像数据滤波条件的“PID”。The reception control unit 5126 reads out the image data identifier "VE_comp_tag" value "0X01", refers to the PMT7001 table 7004 in the system information table storage unit 5133, provides the Stream_identifier_descriptor whose "component)tag" value is "0X01", and reads the transmitted The PID value "0X0097" of the portion whose data type is image data is set as "PID" of the image data filter condition in the filter condition storage unit 5131 .

并且,接收控制部5126读出声音数据标识符“AE_comp_tag”值“0X01”,参照系统信息表存储部5133中PMT7001的表7004,提供“component_tag”值为“0X01”的Stream_identifier_descriptor,而且读出传2的数据种类为声音数据的部分PID值“0X0099”,设定成滤波条件存储部5131中声音数据的滤波条件“PID”。Then, the reception control unit 5126 reads out the audio data identifier "AE_comp_tag" value "0X01", refers to the table 7004 of the PMT7001 in the system information table storage unit 5133, provides the Stream_identifier_descriptor with the "component_tag" value "0X01", and reads the stream 2 The data type is the partial PID value "0X0099" of the voice data, which is set as the filter condition "PID" of the voice data in the filter condition storage unit 5131.

接收控制部5126读出声音数据标识符“NE_id”值“0X0002”,设定成滤波条件存储部5131中导航信息表的滤波条件的“table_id_extersion”,同时参照PMT7001至7004,读出提供在“min_NE_id”值和“max_NE_id”值之间包括“0X0002”的“NE_component_Descriptor(2)”7203的部分的PID值“0X0094”,同样,设定成导航信息表的滤波条件的“PID”。然后,将导航信息表的滤波条件“version_no”设定成无条件。The receiving control section 5126 reads out the voice data identifier "NE_id" value "0X0002", sets it as the "table_id_extersion" of the filter condition of the navigation information table in the filter condition storage section 5131, and refers to PMT7001 to 7004 at the same time, reads the value provided in "min_NE_id The PID value "0X0094" of the part of "NE_component_Descriptor(2)" 7203 including "0X0002" between the "value and the "max_NE_id" value is also set as the "PID" of the filter condition of the navigation information table. Then, the filter condition "version_no" of the navigation information table is set to be unconditional.

TS译码器部5123从图29所示的输送流中分离图21所示的文件名“NVT(2,0)”的导航信息表6701,存储在导航信息表存储部5132中,向接收控制部5126通知其宗旨。所以,在显示部5129上同时显示图35B的显示图像8002。The TS decoder unit 5123 separates the navigation information table 6701 of the file name "NVT(2,0)" shown in FIG. 21 from the transport stream shown in FIG. Section 5126 informs its purpose. Therefore, the display image 8002 in FIG. 35B is simultaneously displayed on the display unit 5129 .

1-3-11充分使用原本的目录构成例子1-3-11 Make full use of the original directory composition example

在图5所示的对话节目中,目录0~3分别具有1个导航信息表。换言之,导航信息表和目录一一对应。其中,说明通过充分利用原本,使导航信息表和目录1对几的目录构成例和一一对应的目录构成例。In the interactive program shown in FIG. 5, contents 0 to 3 each have one navigation information table. In other words, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the navigation information table and the directory. Here, an example of a directory structure in which a navigation information table and a directory are 1-to-1 and a directory structure example in which there is a one-to-one correspondence will be described by making full use of the script.

图43表示由4个目录10~13组成的其他对话节目例子。FIG. 43 shows an example of another talk program composed of four categories 10-13.

作为目录10~13构成要素的展示信息分别规定为图6A及图6B所示的活动图像数据“Video1.m2v”及声音数据“Audio1.m2a”。也就是说活动图像数据“Video1.m2v”及声音数据“Vudio1.m2a”在4个目录中都有。Presentation information as constituent elements of the lists 10 to 13 is defined as video data "Video1.m2v" and audio data "Audio1.m2a" shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B , respectively. That is, the video data "Video1.m2v" and the audio data "Vudio1.m2a" are contained in four directories.

有关作为目录10~13构成要素的导航信息具有如下二类数据构成。The navigation information, which is the constituent elements of the lists 10 to 13, has the following two types of data structures.

作为第1数据构成,图44~47表示导航信息和目录1对1情况下的导航信息。As the first data structure, FIGS. 44 to 47 show navigation information in a case where navigation information and content are 1:1.

图44的导航信息“Navilo-1.nif”对应于图43中所示的目录10中各场面。目录10各场面中的“北部”、“中部”、“南部”的各键分别用“Navilo-1.nif”:目标定义表的目标索引值0、1、2之键目标表示。还有“北部”、“中部”、“南部”各键连接到目录11、12、13,使显示在处理器定义表及高连接表中。The navigation information "Navilo-1.nif" of FIG. 44 corresponds to each scene in the list 10 shown in FIG. 43 . The keys of "North", "Central" and "South" in each scene of the directory 10 are respectively represented by the key objects of the object index values 0, 1, and 2 of the "Navilo-1.nif":object definition table. There are also "north", "central", and "south" keys connected to directories 11, 12, and 13 to be displayed in the processor definition table and high connection table.

图45的导航信息“Navi11-1.nif”对应于图43所示的目录11中各场面。目录11各场面中的文字信息(北部天气信息)由目标定义表的目标索引值1的图像目标表示。由目标索引值0键目标表示“返回”键,连接到目录10。The navigation information "Navi11-1.nif" of FIG. 45 corresponds to each scene in the list 11 shown in FIG. 43 . The character information (northern weather information) in each scene of the list 11 is represented by an image object with an object index value of 1 in the object definition table. The "return" key represented by the target index value 0 key target, connects to the directory 10.

图46的导航信息“Navi12-1.nif”即使对于图47导航信息“Navi13-1.nif”也一样。The navigation information "Navi12-1.nif" of FIG. 46 is the same as the navigation information "Navi13-1.nif" of FIG. 47 .

在第1数据构成中,利用称为象该4个导航信息“Navi10-1.nif”“Navi11-1.nif”“Nari12-1.nif”“Navi13-1.nif”的数据构成,表示目录10~13各键、各文字信息和目录相互连接。In the first data structure, the content is represented by using data structures such as the four navigation information "Navi10-1.nif", "Navi11-1.nif", "Nari12-1.nif", and "Navi13-1.nif". The keys 10-13, the text information and the directory are connected to each other.

作为第2数据构成,图48中表示在导航信息和目录1对几情况下的导航信息。As the second data configuration, Fig. 48 shows the navigation information in the case of a pair of navigation information and a content.

图48的导航信息“Navilo-13-1.nif”对应于图43中所示的4个目录10~13中各场面,表现由图43所示的4个导航信息表示的所有目标。The navigation information "Navilo-13-1.nif" in FIG. 48 corresponds to each scene in the four categories 10-13 shown in FIG. 43, and represents all the objects indicated by the four navigation information shown in FIG.

在该图目标定义表中,目标索引值0~6的7个目标包括图44~47所示的所在键目标和所有图像目标,新附加“能见度(visibility)”栏。In the figure object definition table, the seven objects with object index values 0 to 6 include key objects and all image objects shown in FIGS. 44 to 47, and a column "visibility" is newly added.

该目标定义表中的“能见度(visibility)”栏当最初从其他目录切换至目录10时,使用户查阅或不查阅目标,也就是说表示是否有效。有效目标表示显示键和文字信息等的位标志,在由用户操作确定键的情况下执行处理程序(原本)。无效目标不表示,其处理程序忽略。The "visibility" column in the object definition table enables the user to check or not to check the object when switching to the directory 10 from another directory at first, that is to say, indicates whether it is valid or not. The effective object indicates a bit flag displaying a key, character information, etc., and a processing program (original) is executed when a user operates a determination key. An invalid target is not represented, and its handlers ignore it.

从而,其根据该目标定义表,则最初重放该目录情况下,只是目标索引值0~2的目标有效,以此,表示位标志索引值0~5中所示的“北部”、“中部”、“南部”键[聚焦(フオ-カス)用1个、标准(1-21V)用2个]。其结果,重放图43的目录10。Therefore, according to the object definition table, when the directory is initially played back, only objects with object index values 0 to 2 are valid, thereby representing the "North" and "Central" shown in the bit flag index values 0 to 5. ", "South" key [focus (fo-kasu) with 1, standard (1-21V) with 2]. As a result, the directory 10 shown in FIG. 43 is played back.

而且,处理器定义表中的原本表示执行4个目录切换的程序。该原本是消除表示目标(成为无效)“hide-object)”指令,和表示目标(成为有效)“Show-ooject”指令简单组合。Also, the original in the processor definition table indicates a program that executes four directory switches. This is basically a simple combination of the command "hide-object)" to delete the object (make invalid) and the command "show-ooject" to show the object (make valid).

例如目录10中“北部”键由用户选择及确定时,启动其“北部”键的目标(索引值0)的处理器(处理器索引值0)。根据该处理器的原本,使目标索引值0、1、2的键目标,即是说“北部”、“中部”、“南部”键成为无效,目标索引值4的图像目标,即是说“北部文字信息”为有效。For example, when the "North" key in the directory 10 is selected and determined by the user, the processor (processor index value 0) of the target (index value 0) of the "North" key is started. According to the original of this processor, key objects with target index values 0, 1, 2, that is to say "North", "Central", and "South" keys are invalidated, and image objects with target index value 4, that is, " Northern Text Information" is valid.

其结果,从图43所示的目录10切换成目录11,显示了这一点。As a result, the directory 10 shown in FIG. 43 is switched to the directory 11, and this is indicated.

在目录10的重放中,“中部”或“南部”键由用户选择、确定的情况也是同样的。The same applies to the case where the "Central" or "South" key is selected and determined by the user during playback of the content 10 .

还有例如,在目录11、12或13的重放中,选择及确定“返回”的键的情况下,使“返回”键目标(目标索引值3)的处理器(处理器索引值3)启动。根据该原本,3个键目标(目标索引值0~2)就是说“北部”、“中部”、“南部”键变成有效,其他目标(图像目标4~6)变为无效。其结果,切换图43所示的目录10中的显示。Also, for example, in the playback of directory 11, 12 or 13, in the case of selecting and confirming the key of "return", make the processor (processor index value 3) of the "return" key target (target index value 3) start up. According to this script, the three key objects (object index values 0 to 2), that is, the "North", "Central" and "South" keys are enabled, and the other objects (image objects 4 to 6) are disabled. As a result, the display in the list 10 shown in FIG. 43 is switched.

象这样,在1年导航信息中记录多个目标,同时,可将应由原本显示的(有效)目标的组合程序化。即,用1个导航信息可表现多个目录。这时,接收装置5121每逢目录切换无需重新接收导航信息,因此对用户操作的响应速度快。In this way, while recording a plurality of targets in the one-year navigation information, it is possible to program a combination of (effective) targets to be originally displayed. That is, a plurality of categories can be represented by one piece of navigation information. At this time, the receiving device 5121 does not need to receive the navigation information again every time the directory is switched, so the response speed to the user operation is fast.

1-3-12其他1-3-12 Other

此外在所述实施形式中,如图14的多路信息表6001所示,导航信息表的位速率(NE_com_ponent(X)_Bitrate)虽然不管是哪个目录都设定为同样的1Mbps,但也可根目录设定为不同值。例如,即使作为主菜单具有任务的目录等设想成因用户操作参照频度高的目录,也可提高其位速率。在图5所示的对话节目中,目录0、1也可设定比目录2、3高的位速率。In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in the multiplex information table 6001 of FIG. Directory is set to a different value. For example, even if a directory that is frequently referenced due to user operations, such as a directory having tasks as a main menu, can be assumed, the bit rate can be increased. In the dialogue program shown in FIG. 5, the bit rates for categories 0 and 1 may be set higher than those for categories 2 and 3.

还有,经过目录重放时间也可动态地变更位速率。例如,有关预料时间性参照频度变高或变低的目录,每逢方案变化也可动态地变更位速率。Also, the bit rate can be changed dynamically over the playback time of the directory. For example, regarding a directory whose temporal reference frequency is expected to increase or decrease, the bit rate may be dynamically changed every time the scheme changes.

该情况下,只要动态地变更多路信息表6001的位速率就行。以此从多路控制部5110通知到多路化部5112的各个多路指示,由于包括多路信息表6001的位速率值,所以导航信息的多路频度也动态变化。In this case, it is only necessary to dynamically change the bit rate of the multipath information table 6001. Since each multiplexing instruction notified from the multiplexing control unit 5110 to the multiplexing unit 5112 thus includes the bit rate value of the multiplexing information table 6001, the multiplexing frequency of the navigation information also changes dynamically.

如果,对于所有导航信息分配一定的位速率的情况下(对于所有导航信息分配一个PID情况),多路信息表6001计算导航信息表的多路指示的作成次数,例如只要调整成目录0~3的NVT多路指示形成比例为2∶1∶1∶1就行。If, in the case of assigning a certain bit rate to all navigation information (a case of assigning one PID to all navigation information), the multi-way information table 6001 calculates the number of creation times of the multi-way indication of the navigation information table, for example, as long as the content is adjusted to 0-3 The ratio of NVT multi-way instructions is 2:1:1:1.

并且,在上述实施形式中,虽然前提是活动图像数据是接收装置5121的显示图像的大小,但也可设定比其小的规模的活动图像数据。例如,若把活动图像数据作为1/4大小,则位速率也可是1/4,所以,即使限定可分配给对话节目的位速率的上限,也能增加目录数量。在该情况下,与根据导航信息产生的目标显示组合也可得到重放图像。另外,1个目录也可同时有2~4个1/4大小的活动图像数据2~4个。Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, it is assumed that the moving image data is the size of the display image of the receiving device 5121, but moving image data having a smaller size than that may be set. For example, if the size of moving picture data is 1/4, the bit rate can also be 1/4. Therefore, even if the upper limit of the bit rate that can be assigned to a talk program is limited, the number of directories can be increased. In this case, the playback image can also be obtained in combination with the target display generated based on the navigation information. In addition, 2 to 4 moving image data of 1/4 size may be contained in one directory at the same time.

而且在上述实施形式中,虽然由数字卫星广播对话节目,但也可是比如有线电视(CATV)广播台广播。Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the dialogue program is broadcast by digital satellite, it may also be broadcast by, for example, a cable television (CATV) broadcasting station.

在本实施形式中,各导航信息表包括有效时间表,所述有效时间表用设定使存储在发射数据存储部5102中存储的应用多路化的事件广播开始时间为“0”的相对时间(单位秒),定义其导航信息成为有效的有效开始时间“Start_time”和成为无效的有效终止时间“end_time”。接收控制装置5121的接收控制部5126虽然作成数字广播装置5101的多路化部5112设输送流打头的初期值为“0”,与在输送流中多路化的PCR信息同步,参照计算时间的AV译码器部5124的时钟部,判定各导航信息的有效开始时间和有效终止时间,但例如接收装置5121还备有计量绝对时间的时钟部。接收控制部5126也可作成,参照所述时钟部取得现在绝对时间,再从存储在系统信息表生成部5105中的EIT中的事件信息中读出事件开始时间(绝对时间),通过从现在绝对时间中减去事件开始时间,求把事件的广播开始时间设定为“0”的相对时间,用此制定各导航信息的有效开始时间和有效终止时间。In this embodiment, each navigation information table includes an effective time table for setting the relative time at which the event broadcast start time of the application multiplexing stored in the transmission data storage unit 5102 is "0". (unit: second), define the effective start time "start_time" when the navigation information becomes effective, and the effective end time "end_time" when the navigation information becomes invalid. The reception control unit 5126 of the reception control unit 5121 makes the multiplex unit 5112 of the digital broadcasting unit 5101 set the initial value of the header of the transport stream to “0” to synchronize with the PCR information multiplexed in the transport stream, and refers to the calculation time. The clock unit of the AV decoder unit 5124 judges the valid start time and valid end time of each piece of navigation information, but for example, the receiver 5121 also includes a clock unit for measuring absolute time. The reception control unit 5126 may also be configured to refer to the clock unit to obtain the current absolute time, and then read the event start time (absolute time) from the event information stored in the EIT in the system information table generation unit 5105, and obtain the absolute time from the current absolute time. Subtract the event start time from the time to find the relative time when the broadcast start time of the event is set to "0", and use this to formulate the effective start time and effective end time of each navigation information.

而且在有效时间表中,“Start_time”和“end_time”规定用绝对时间记录,接收控制部5126要备有计量绝对时间的时钟部,接收控制部5126当然也可作成对照计量该绝对时间的时钟部,判定各导航信息的有效开始时间和有效终止时间。And in the effective time table, "Start_time" and "end_time" are stipulated to be recorded with absolute time, and the reception control section 5126 will be provided with a clock section for measuring the absolute time, and the reception control section 5126 can certainly be made as a clock section for comparing and measuring the absolute time. , to determine the effective start time and effective end time of each navigation information.

并且,在对在各导航信息有效时间的管理中没有精度要求情况下,接收装置5121接收控制部5126也可作成,不作各导航信息的有效开始时间和有效终止时间的判定,在接受从TS译码器部5123分离新导航信息表通知时,规定现在重放中的导航信息表无效,新分离的导航信息表有效。In addition, when there is no requirement for accuracy in the management of the effective time of each navigation information, the reception control unit 5126 of the receiving device 5121 can also be configured not to judge the effective start time and effective end time of each navigation information, and to receive the translation from the TS. When the encoder unit 5123 separates the notification of the new navigation information table, it specifies that the currently reproduced navigation information table is invalid and the newly separated navigation information table is valid.

再有,在本实施形式中,其技术方案规定为,虽然数字广播装置5101的展示信息存储部5107预先全部存储广播的图像数据及声音数据,但也可以是比如备有电视摄像机和实时压缩所述电视摄像机拍摄的图像的编码器,所述编码器的输出实时地被存储在展示信息存储部5107中。In addition, in this embodiment, the technical solution stipulates that although the display information storage unit 5107 of the digital broadcasting device 5101 stores all broadcast image data and audio data in advance, it may also be equipped with a TV camera and a real-time compression station, for example. An encoder for the image captured by the TV camera, and the output of the encoder is stored in the display information storage unit 5107 in real time.

实施例形式2Embodiment form 2

本发明原理Principle of the invention

在本实施形式中,就有关实现由页基目录组成的对话节目的数字广播装置进行说明。In this embodiment, a description will be given of a digital broadcasting apparatus that realizes a dialogue program composed of page-based content.

在说明本发明数字广播系统构成之前,首先用图49~51,就有关实现由其页基目录组成的对话节目的原理进行说明。Before explaining the structure of the digital broadcasting system of the present invention, the principle of realizing the dialogue program composed of its page-based content will be described first with reference to Figs. 49-51.

图49是在接收侧显示画面上分别显示的目录例子中,有关天气预报图。其中用多个目录151、152、...153、...表示全国及各地天气予报。这里,所谓目录称用户对话性操作的信息单位。这些多个目录151、152、...153、...由用户操作作切换显示、如用箭标154、155、156、157所示。Fig. 49 is a diagram showing weather forecasts in an example of the respective contents displayed on the display screen on the receiving side. Wherein, a plurality of catalogs 151, 152, ... 153, ... are used to represent weather forecasts of the whole country and various places. Here, the so-called directory refers to the information unit of the interactive operation of the user. These plural categories 151, 152, . . . 153, .

现在,在显示画面上表示显示全国天气预报的目录153时,一旦用户选择决定操作称为“东京”的键160,则如箭标154的示,显示画面被切换成从目录153至表示东京天气预报的目录151。然后,当用户决定操作“返回”键158,则如箭标155所示,显示画面被从目录151切换成原来的目录153。Now, when the list 153 showing the national weather forecast is shown on the display screen, once the user selects and decides to operate the key 160 called "Tokyo", then as shown by the arrow 154, the display screen is switched from the list 153 to displaying Tokyo weather. Catalog of forecasts 151 . Then, when the user decides to operate the “return” key 158 , the display screen is switched from the list 151 to the original list 153 as indicated by the arrow 155 .

同样,当用户选择操作表示目录153显示画面“大阪”的键161时,如箭标156所示,显示画面从目录153被切换成152的显示。进而在该状态下,用户一旦决定操作“返回”键159,则如箭标157所示,显示画面返回到目录153状态。由于如上的显示切换操作,目录151、...具有键158、159、160、161。除这些键以外,各目录还可有用于切换到表示第1实施例的流速目录的键。Similarly, when the user selects and operates the key 161 indicating the display screen “Osaka” of the list 153 , the display screen is switched from the list 153 to the display of the list 152 as indicated by an arrow 156 . Furthermore, in this state, once the user decides to operate the “return” key 159 , the display screen returns to the list 153 state as indicated by the arrow 157 . The directory 151, . . . has keys 158, 159, 160, 161 due to the display switching operation as above. In addition to these keys, each list may have a key for switching to the flow rate list of the first embodiment.

通过以上用户显示切换操作,用于可随意切换目录显示,所以在发射侧如下所述那样发射各目录。By the user display switching operation described above, the user can freely switch the list display, so each list is transmitted as follows on the transmission side.

图50是示意性表示从发射侧发射的发射数据图。发射数据165由表示多个目录的数据(信息)组成,重复对全部发射。发射数据165由分别对应于多个图像数据165、167、...168...的导航信息169、170、...、171、...组成。Fig. 50 is a diagram schematically showing transmission data transmitted from the transmission side. The transmission data 165 is composed of data (information) representing a plurality of contents, and transmission is repeated for all of them. The transmit data 165 is composed of navigation information 169, 170, ..., 171, ... corresponding to a plurality of image data 165, 167, ... 168, ..., respectively.

各画面数据166、...是成为在接收则显示画面上显示的各目录151、...的主画面的数据,在该说明中,显示天气预报图像。Each screen data 166, ... is the data used as the main screen of each content 151, ... displayed on the display screen upon reception, and in this description, a weather forecast image is displayed.

各导航信息169、...包括:表示重迭在各图象数据166、...上显示比如键158、...的位标志(Bitmap)数据172、173、174;和在接收侧所述对用户操作动作的原本(Script)信息175、176、177;和表示可作由用户操作产生的目录显示切换的连接端目录的高连接(Hyperlink)信息178、179、180。Each navigation information 169, . . . includes: the bit mark (Bitmap) data 172, 173, 174 of the key 158, . Describe the original (Script) information 175, 176, 177 of the user's operation action; and represent the high connection (Hyperlink) information 178, 179, 180 of the connection end directory that can be used for the directory display switching generated by the user operation.

图49所示的目录151用图像数据166和导航信息169表现。同样,目录152用图像数据167和导航信息170表现,目录157用图像数据168和导航信息表现。即,具有对应关系地设置各图像数据166、...和各导航信息169。The list 151 shown in FIG. 49 is represented by image data 166 and navigation information 169 . Similarly, the directory 152 is represented by image data 167 and navigation information 170, and the directory 157 is represented by image data 168 and navigation information. That is, each piece of image data 166 , . . . and each piece of navigation information 169 are set in a corresponding relationship.

图51是示意性表示从发射侧发射的发射数据165的发射状况图。在发射侧反复发射发射数据165。可理解为时间性重复发射发射数据165。FIG. 51 is a diagram schematically showing a transmission status of transmission data 165 transmitted from the transmission side. The transmit data 165 is repeatedly transmitted on the transmitting side. It can be understood as time-repeated transmission of transmission data 165 .

但是在本图中,虽然图像数据、导航信息都用帧结构表示,但实际上被数字化,并且使图像数据和对应的导航信息多路化,由于把发射数据165作为MPEG2输送流发射,所以应注意具体的发射数据与本图不同。However, in this figure, although the image data and navigation information are represented by a frame structure, they are actually digitized, and the image data and corresponding navigation information are multiplexed. Since the transmission data 165 is transmitted as an MPEG2 transport stream, it should be Note that the specific launch data is different from this figure.

此外,尽管未图示,但发射的各图像数据166、167、...、168、...为了与其他图像数据166、167、...、168、...识别,附加识别信息。同样为了与其他导航信息169、170、...、171识别,在各导航信息169、170、...、171上都附加识别信息。In addition, although not shown in the figure, each transmitted image data 166, 167, . . . , 168, . Similarly, identification information is added to each navigation information 169 , 170 , .

另一方面在接收侧监视发射数据165中该识别信息,取得包括所希望的识别信息的图像数据和导航信息,作为1个目录,如图49所示例如作为目录151重放显示。On the other hand, the receiving side monitors the identification information in the transmission data 165, acquires image data including desired identification information and navigation information as a list, and displays it as list 151, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 .

此外,所取得的例如导航信息171备存于用户规定操作中。In addition, the acquired navigation information 171, for example, is stored in the user's predetermined operation.

以下根据上述原理,参照附图说明本发明本实施例的数字广播系统例子。An example of a digital broadcasting system according to this embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings based on the above principles.

实施例1Example 1

2-1.数字广播系统(页基)构成概要2-1. Outline of Digital Broadcasting System (page base)

图52是本发明实施形式2的数字广播系统的数字广播系统之实施例1的结构图。该数字广播系统由数据发射装置101和多个数据接收装置121组成。Fig. 52 is a structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of the digital broadcasting system of the digital broadcasting system according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention. The digital broadcasting system is composed of a data transmitting device 101 and a plurality of data receiving devices 121 .

数据发射装置101的构成要使得,在MPEG2输送流中多路重复发射相互高连接扩展的多个基页目录数据,备有发射数据存储部102、和数据多路化部103,和多路信息存储部104,和系统信息表生成都105,和发射部106。The structure of the data transmission device 101 is to make multiple and repeated transmission of a plurality of base page directory data that are mutually highly connected and extended in the MPEG2 transport stream, and is equipped with a transmission data storage unit 102, a data multiplexing unit 103, and multiple information A storage unit 104, a system information table generating unit 105, and a transmitting unit 106.

数据接收装置121构成为能从由数据发射装置101发射的MPEG2输送流之中,根据用户操作对话性取出目录重放,它备有接收部122、TS译码器部123,AV译码器部124,接收数据存储部125,接成控制部126,信号接收部127,重放部128,显示部129,和声音输出部130。The data receiving device 121 is configured to be capable of replaying the content from the MPEG2 transport stream transmitted by the data transmitting device 101 according to the interactive nature of the user's operation. It is equipped with a receiving unit 122, a TS decoder unit 123, an AV decoder unit 124 , the received data storage unit 125 is connected to form a control unit 126 , a signal receiving unit 127 , a playback unit 128 , a display unit 129 , and a sound output unit 130 .

2-2.数据发射装置1012-2. Data transmitter 101

2-2-1.发射数据存储部102的构成2-2-1. Configuration of transmission data storage unit 102

发射数据存储部102由磁盘等记录媒体组成,存储构成1个对话性节目的多个目录数据和结构信息,包括展示信息存储部107、导航信息存储部108、结构信息存储部109。此外,其中对话节目作为发射数据包括在MPEG2输送流中状态下,称为“事件”或“程序”。The transmission data storage unit 102 is composed of a recording medium such as a disk, and stores a plurality of catalog data and structural information constituting an interactive program, including a display information storage unit 107 , a navigation information storage unit 108 , and a structural information storage unit 109 . Also, a state in which a dialog program is included as transmission data in an MPEG2 transport stream is called "event" or "program".

发射数据存储部102如下面表示图50所示的发射数据165,分为图像数据(展示信息)和导航信息进行存储。并且,图像数据和导航信息对应关系作成结构信息存储。The emission data storage unit 102 stores the emission data 165 shown in FIG. 50 as follows, divided into image data (presentation information) and navigation information. In addition, the corresponding relationship between image data and navigation information is stored as structural information.

2-2-1-1.展示信息存储部1072-2-1-1. Display information storage unit 107

展示信息存储部107存储包括在各目录中的图像数据和声音数据等的目录信息。图53A、图53B分别表示作为目录153、151的展示信息一例的静止图像数据。图53A显示用文件名“Still5.m2v”表示的静止图像数据201,图53B显示用文件名“Still.m2v”表示的静止图像数据202。静止图像数据201、202分别根据ISO/IEC 13818-2(MPEG2视频)规格以数字编码的形式存储着。此外图像数据编码形式也可是其他形式。The presentation information storage unit 107 stores content information such as image data and audio data included in each content. 53A and 53B show still image data as an example of presentation information of the catalogs 153 and 151, respectively. FIG. 53A shows still image data 201 represented by the file name "Still5.m2v", and Fig. 53B shows still image data 202 represented by the file name "Still.m2v". The still image data 201, 202 are respectively stored in the form of digital encoding according to the ISO/IEC 13818-2 (MPEG2 video) standard. In addition, the encoding format of the image data may also be other formats.

2-2-1-2.导航信息存储部1082-2-1-2. Navigation information storage unit 108

导航信息存储部108存储包括在各目录中的导航信息。在导航信息中,包括表示往别的目录连接的高连接信息,记述着用于用户对话性选择该连接端的目标。图54是表示导航信息之一例的图。其中,导航信息301是目录153的导航信息的例子,用文件名“navi5 nif”存储。The navigation information storage unit 108 stores navigation information included in each directory. The navigation information includes hyperlink information indicating a link to another directory, and describes a destination for the user to interactively select the link destination. Fig. 54 is a diagram showing an example of navigation information. Among them, the navigation information 301 is an example of the navigation information of the directory 153, and is stored with the file name "navi5 nif".

此外,图53A中所示的静止图像数据201和图54中所示的导航信息301构成1个目录153表示在后述的图56中所示的结构信息表501中。In addition, the still image data 201 shown in FIG. 53A and the navigation information 301 shown in FIG. 54 form a list 153 and are displayed in the configuration information table 501 shown in FIG. 56 described later.

导航信息301包括用表形式表示的目标定义表(Object DefinitionTable)302、处理程序定义表(Handler Definition Table)303、高连接表(Hyper link Table)304、位标志表(Bitmap Table)305。该导航信息301与图7所示的导航信息5301相比,区别在于设有有效时间表,除此以外,实质上都相同,所以说明从略。并且,在图54中,“目标索引”、“处理程序索引”、“高连接索引”、“位标志索引”各栏仅省略为“索引”。The navigation information 301 includes an object definition table (Object Definition Table) 302, a handler definition table (Handler Definition Table) 303, a hyperlink table (Hyper link Table) 304, and a bit flag table (Bitmap Table) 305 expressed in table form. This navigation information 301 differs from the navigation information 5301 shown in FIG. 7 in that an effective time table is provided, but other than that, it is substantially the same, and thus description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 54, each column of "object index", "handler index", "hyperlink index", and "bit flag index" is simply omitted as "index".

目标定义表302在每个索引号中表示在显示画面中显示的如键(Bulton)等图形目标类型(type)和属性等的信息。在“索引(Index)”栏上记载索引号。”类型“栏上记载图形目标的类型。在“X”及“Y”栏上分别记载着在显示画面上的显示基准位置的X、Y座标值。“处理程序(Handler)”栏上,记载着当选择在数据接收装置121中由用户用该索引号表示的目标时执行的处理程序的索引号。在“标准位标志(NormalBitmap)”栏上记载着在标准状态时表示各目标的位标志索引号。另一方面,在“聚焦位标志(Focused Bitmap)”栏上记载着在选择状态时显示各目标的位标志索引号。其中,把只是表示目标的状态称为标准状态;把可选择表示的目标的状态称为选择状态。The object definition table 302 indicates information such as the type (type) and attribute of a graphic object displayed on the display screen such as a button (Bulton) for each index number. The index number is described in the "Index" column. The "Type" column records the type of the graphic object. In the "X" and "Y" columns, the X and Y coordinate values of the display reference position on the display screen are described, respectively. In the "handler" column, the index number of the handler executed when the object indicated by the index number by the user in the data receiving device 121 is selected is described. In the column of "normal bitmap (NormalBitmap)", the bitmap index number indicating each object in the normal state is described. On the other hand, in the column of "Focused Bitmap (Focused Bitmap)", the bitmap index number of each object displayed in the selected state is described. Among them, the state that only represents the target is called the standard state; the state that can choose to express the target is called the selected state.

例如,在目标定义表302索引号“0”行中,类型为“键”,左上端表示位置的座标值为X=400、Y=300,在用数据接收装置121选择时执行索引号“2”的处理程序。在标准状态和选择状态分别表示使用索引号“6”和“7”的位标志的目标。索引号“1”行也一样。For example, in the target definition table 302 index number "0" row, the type is "key", the coordinate value of the upper left end represents the position is X=400, Y=300, when using the data receiving device 121 to select, execute the index number " 2” handler. Objects using bit flags with index numbers "6" and "7" are represented in the standard state and the selected state, respectively. The same goes for the row with index number "1".

处理程序定义表303表示记述每个索引号对于用户操作的数据接收装置121动作的原本(Script)。The processing program definition table 303 shows a script describing the operation of the data receiving device 121 operated by the user for each index number.

例如在处理程序表303的索引号“2”行上,记载着称为“got_contenls(index4)”的原本。该原本指示向用索引号“4”高连接表示的目录切换。此外,根据原本也可记述如发声指示。For example, a script called "got_contenls (index4)" is described on the row of index "2" of the processing program table 303 . This script indicates switching to the directory indicated by the index number "4" high link. In addition, it is also possible to describe, for example, an utterance instruction according to the original text.

高连接表304表示向在每个索引号中指定的目录(Contents)号的目录的高连接。The high link table 304 shows the high link to the content of the content (Contents) number specified for each index number.

例如,高连接表304的索引号“4”表示向目录号“1”之目录的高连接。For example, the index number "4" of the high connection table 304 indicates a high connection to the directory with the directory number "1".

位标志表305每逢作为目标定义表302内数据显示的索引号,指示表示在数据接收装置121中于展示信息的图像数据上重迭显示的图形信息之位标志数据(Bitmap Data)。The bitmap table 305 indicates the bitmap data (Bitmap Data) representing graphic information superimposed on the image data of the presentation information in the data receiving device 121 every time an index number displayed as data in the object definition table 302.

例如在索引号“6”中,呈现目标定义表302索引号“0”之“键”的“标准位标志”位标志数据。For example, in the index number "6", the "standard bit flag" bit flag data of the "key" of the index number "0" of the object definition table 302 is presented.

图55表示用文件名“navi1.nil”表示的导航信息401。导航信息401包括目标定义表402、处理程序定义表403、位表志表404。Fig. 55 shows navigation information 401 represented by the file name "navi1.nil". The navigation information 401 includes an object definition table 402 , a handler definition table 403 , and a bit flag table 404 .

在同一图中目标定义表402的索引号“0”的行中,显示“-”作为标准位标志的索引号。这表示在该目标中没有定义标准状态的位标志。在目标定义表402中,仅定义了1个目标,索引号“0”的目标因常在选择状态下显示,无需标准状态的位标志,所以被省略。In the row of the index number "0" of the object definition table 402 in the same figure, "-" is displayed as the index number of the standard bit flag. This indicates that there are no standard state bit flags defined in this target. In the object definition table 402, only one object is defined, and the object with the index number "0" is omitted because it is always displayed in the selected state and does not need a bit flag in the standard state.

处理程序定义表403表示在使索引号“3”的处理程序启动时执行的原本。索引号“3”的原本是表示给进入目录的切换指示的“goto_entry”。其中,把开始对话性节目重放时最初应重放的目录称为进入目录。The handler definition table 403 shows the script to be executed when the handler with the index number "3" is activated. The original index number "3" is "goto_entry" indicating a switching instruction to the entry directory. Among them, the content to be reproduced first when starting the reproduction of the interactive program is referred to as the entry content.

位标志表404表示索引号“7”的位标志数据。The bit flag table 404 represents the bit flag data of the index number "7".

2-2-1-3.结构信息存储部1092-2-1-3. Structure information storage unit 109

结构信息存储部109存储结构信息表和进入信息。结构信息表是构成各目录的展示信息和导航信息的组合信息。进入信息表示称为进入目录的信息。The structure information storage unit 109 stores a structure information table and entry information. The structure information table is combination information of display information and navigation information constituting each category. The entry information indicates information called an entry list.

如图56所示,结构信息表501每逢目录号显示构成在发射数据存储部102中存储的各目录的展示信息和导航信息之组成的信息。目录号在存储于发射数据存储部102中的多个目录中,是一种意思地识别1个目录的号。如图56所示,在结构表501的第1行中,用目录号0识别的目录表示由以存储在展示信息存储部107中的文件名Stillo.m2v识别的静止图像数据和以存储在导航信息存储部108中存储的navio.nif识别的导航信息成组构成的目录。其他行也一样。As shown in FIG. 56 , the structure information table 501 displays, for each category number, information constituting a combination of presentation information and navigation information for each category stored in the transmission data storage unit 102 . The directory number is a number for identifying one directory in a sense among the plurality of directories stored in the transmission data storage unit 102 . As shown in FIG. 56, in the first line of the structure table 501, the directory identified by the directory number 0 represents the still image data identified by the file name Stillo.m2v stored in the presentation information storage unit 107 and stored in the navigation. The navigation information identified by navio.nif stored in the information storage unit 108 is a directory composed of groups. The same goes for other lines.

并且,图56所展示的进入信息502,表示存储在发射数据存储部102中的对话节目进入目录的目录号为5。Furthermore, the entry information 502 shown in FIG. 56 indicates that the directory number of the conversation program entry directory stored in the transmission data storage unit 102 is 5.

2-2-2.多路信息存储部1042-2-2. Multiple information storage unit 104

多路信息存储部104把用于在存储于发射数据存储部102中的发射数据在MPEG2输送流中多路化的标识符和区域等的资源分配信息作为多路信息表存储着。图57是表示该多路信息表601之一例的图。The multiplex information storage unit 104 stores, as a multiplex information table, resource allocation information such as identifiers and areas for multiplexing the transmission data stored in the transmission data storage unit 102 into the MPEG2 transport stream. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the multiplex information table 601 .

多路信息表601第1行上记录着的位速度(Bitrate)表示在MPEG2输送流中使存储在发射数据存储部102上的发射数据多路时分配的传输速率。在该例中,分配6Mbps作为传输速率。The bit rate (Bitrate) recorded on the first line of the multiplexing information table 601 indicates the transmission rate allocated when the transmission data stored in the transmission data storage unit 102 is multiplexed in the MPEG2 transport stream. In this example, 6Mbps is assigned as the transfer rate.

多路信息表601的第2行~第5行的Original_network_id、transport_Stream_id、Service_id、event_id当在MPEG22输送流中.把存储在发射数据存储部102中的对话节目作为事件多路化时,表示分配给其事件的标识符Original_nelwork_id、transport_Strcam_id、Service_id、event_id的各值。在该多路信息表601中,作为这些值虽然全部分配“0X0001”,但一般写入在各服务中分配的固有值。这在图14中已作了说明。The Original_network_id, transport_Stream_id, Service_id, and event_id in the second to fifth lines of the multiplexing information table 601 indicate that the dialogue program stored in the transmission data storage unit 102 is multiplexed as an event in the MPEG22 transport stream. Each value of the event identifier Original_nelwork_id, transport_Strcam_id, Service_id, and event_id. In this multiplex information table 601, "0X0001" is assigned as these values, but generally, unique values assigned to each service are written. This is illustrated in Figure 14.

在通常的卫星数字广播系统中,通过1个卫星(网络),1个以上MPEG2输送流分别使用其他频段的载波发射。各广播节目在任一个MPEG2输送流中根据ETS 300 468规格(以下称“DVB-SI规格”),给予Original_network_id、transport_Stream_id、Service、id、event_id作多路化。Ori_ginal_network_id是一种意思识别网络的标识符。transport_Stream_id在1个网络中是单意地识别1个输送流的标识符。Service_id在1个输送流中是单意地识别1种服务的标识符。evcnt_id在1种服务中是单意地识别1种事件的标识符。事件是一些部分的集合,相当于已有的模拟广播1个节目。In a normal satellite digital broadcasting system, one or more MPEG2 transport streams are transmitted using carriers of other frequency bands via one satellite (network). Each broadcast program is multiplexed with Original_network_id, transport_Stream_id, Service, id, and event_id in any MPEG2 transport stream according to the ETS 300 468 specification (hereinafter referred to as "DVB-SI specification"). Ori_ginal_network_id is an identifier for identifying a network. The transport_Stream_id is an identifier for uniquely identifying one transport stream in one network. Service_id is an identifier for uniquely identifying one type of service in one transport stream. evcnt_id is an identifier for uniquely identifying one type of event in one type of service. An event is a collection of parts, and corresponds to one program of existing analog broadcasting.

部分作为ISO/IEC 13818-1(以下称“MPEG2系统规格”)的用1个DID(分组标识符)识别的流(节目组成部),表现活动图像、声音等的节目的构成要素之一。服务是把事件顺序收拢在一起的意思。相当于已有的模拟广播的1个节目。A part is one of the constituent elements of a program that expresses moving images, audio, etc. as a stream (program component) identified by a DID (packet identifier) of ISO/IEC 13818-1 (hereinafter referred to as "MPEG2 system specification"). Service is the meaning of bringing together the sequence of events. It corresponds to one program of existing analog broadcasting.

通过依据DVB-SI规格的数字广播系统广播的节目(事件)、利用指定这些Original_net-Work_id、transport_Stream_id、Service_id、event_id的组,在全部数字广播系统中可单意地指定。有关Original_network_id、transport_stream_id、Service_id、evewt_id细节,在DVB-SI规格书中描述。Programs (events) broadcast by a digital broadcasting system conforming to the DVB-SI standard can be unilaterally specified in all digital broadcasting systems by specifying groups of these Original_net-Work_id, transport_Stream_id, Service_id, and event_id. Details about Original_network_id, transport_stream_id, Service_id, and evewt_id are described in the DVB-SI specification.

多路信息表601的第6~10行,当在MPEG2输送流中作为事件使存储在发射数据存储部102中的应用作多路时,表示分配给构成其事件的各部分的PID之值。此外,PMT_PID、DCR_PID分别表示分配给后述的PMT(ProgramMap Table)、PCR(Program Clock Reference)的PID之值。The 6th to 10th rows of the multiplex information table 601 indicate the value of the PID assigned to each part constituting the event when the application stored in the transmission data storage unit 102 is multiplexed as an event in the MPEG2 transport stream. In addition, PMT_PID and DCR_PID represent the values of PIDs assigned to PMT (Program Map Table) and PCR (Program Clock Reference) described later, respectively.

NE_component_Pid(导航信息部分分组标识符)表示分配给使导航信息多路的部分的PID值,导航信息存储在发射数据存储部102的导航信息存储部108中。NE_component_Pid (Navigation Information Part Group Identifier) indicates a PID value assigned to a part that multiplexes the navigation information, and the navigation information is stored in the navigation information storage unit 108 of the transmission data storage unit 102 .

VE_information_component_pid(流对应信息部分分组标识符)表示分配给使流对应表多路的部分之PID值,流对应表在后述的流对应信息表生成部111生成。VE_information_component_pid (stream correspondence information part packet identifier) indicates a PID value assigned to a part for multiplexing the stream correspondence table, which is created by the stream correspondence information table generating unit 111 described later.

VE_component_pid(图像数据部分标识符)表示分配给使图像数据多路的部分之PID值,图像数据存储在展示信息存储部107中。VE_component_pid (image data component identifier) indicates a PID value assigned to a component that multiplexes image data, and the image data is stored in the presentation information storage unit 107 .

此外,在本实施例中,作为NE_Component_pid、VE_information_component_pid、VE_component_pid,虽然分别提供1个PID,但给予多个也行。即,虽然作为PID分别在NE_component_pid上提供“0X0082”、在VE_information_component-pid上提供“0X0083”、在VE_component_pid上提供“0X0084”,但加之作为PID还可分别如在NE_component_pid上提供“0X0085”、在VE_information_component_pid上提供“0X0086”、在VE_component_pid上提供“0X0087”。In addition, in this embodiment, one PID is provided as NE_Component_pid, VE_information_component_pid, and VE_component_pid respectively, but a plurality of them may be given. That is, although "0X0082" is provided for NE_component_pid, "0X0083" for VE_information_component-pid, and "0X0084" for VE_component_pid as PIDs, respectively, "0X0085" for NE_component_pid and "0X0085" for VE_information_component_pid can also be provided as PIDs. Provide "0X0086" on VE_component_pid and "0X0087" on VE_component_pid.

并且虽然在本实施例中不存在,但当发射数据包括声音数据情况下,与图像数据一样分配AE_information_component_pid、AE_Componenet_pid。And although it does not exist in this embodiment, when the transmission data includes audio data, AE_information_component_pid and AE_Componenet_pid are assigned in the same way as image data.

2-2-3.数据多路化部103构成2-2-3. Configuration of data multiplexing unit 103

数据多路化部103包括:由CPU和存储器组成的多路控制部110;流对应信息表生成部111;标识符信息附加部112;导航信息表生成部113;多路化部114。The data multiplexing unit 103 includes: a multiplexing control unit 110 composed of a CPU and a memory; a stream correspondence information table generating unit 111 ; an identifier information adding unit 112 ; a navigation information table generating unit 113 ;

数据多路化部103为了生成图51所示的发射数据165,要作以下处理。The data multiplexing unit 103 performs the following processing in order to generate the transmission data 165 shown in FIG. 51 .

2-2-3-1.多路控制部110(其1)2-2-3-1. Multi-channel control unit 110 (Part 1)

多路控制部110一旦由发射部106启动,则首先参照存储在结构信息存储部109和多路信息存储部104中的结构信息表501和多路信息表601,每逢目录号在数字广播中分配单意地识别各目录的标识符,作成目录标识符分配表。Once the multiplex control section 110 is activated by the transmitting section 106, it first refers to the configuration information table 501 and the multiplex information table 601 stored in the configuration information storage section 109 and the multiplex information storage section 104. An identifier for uniquely identifying each category is allocated, and a category identifier allocation table is created.

图58表示该目录标识符分配表701之一例。“Orig_nw_id”703、“ts_id”(704分别表示发射图像数据、声音数据、导航信息的网络和输送流的标识符之值,所述图像和声音数据和导航信息构成目录。“VE_SVC_id”705、“VE_event_id”706分别表示图数据所属的服务和事件的标识符之值,“VE_id”709表示在1个事件中单意地识别图象数据的标识符之值。同样,“NE_SVC_id”707、“NE_event_id”708表示导航信息所属的服务和事件的标识符值,“NE_id”710表示在1个事件中单意地识别导航信息的标识符值。“AE_svc_id”711、“AE_event_id”712、“AE_id”713也都一样。目录因是图像数据和声音数据和导航信息组,所以通过各标识符组可单意地识别。An example of this directory identifier assignment table 701 is shown in FIG. 58 . "Orig_nw_id" 703, "ts_id" (704) respectively represent the value of the identifier of the network and transport stream that transmit image data, sound data, and navigation information, and the image and sound data and navigation information constitute a directory. "VE_SVC_id" 705, " VE_event_id" 706 indicates the value of the identifier of the service and event to which the image data belongs, and "VE_id" 709 indicates the value of the identifier uniquely identifying the image data in one event. Similarly, "NE_SVC_id" 707, "NE_event_id" 708 indicates the identifier value of the service and event to which the navigation information belongs, and "NE_id" 710 indicates the identifier value for uniquely identifying the navigation information in one event. "AE_svc_id" 711, "AE_event_id" 712, and "AE_id" 713 are also all Same. Since the content is a set of image data, audio data, and navigation information, it can be uniquely identified by each set of identifiers.

在目录标识符分配表701中,对应各目录号702,在“Orig_nw_id”703、“ts_id”704、“VE_svc_id”705、“VE_event_id”706上,写入存储在多路信息存储部104中的多路信息表601的Original_network_id、transport_stream_id、Service_id、event_id的各值。同样,在“NE_svc_id”707、“NE_event_id”708上也写入Serivice_id、event_id的各值。In the directory identifier allocation table 701, corresponding to each directory number 702, "Orig_nw_id" 703, "ts_id" 704, "VE_svc_id" 705, and "VE_event_id" 706 are written in multiple information stored in the multiple information storage unit 104. Each value of Original_network_id, transport_stream_id, Service_id, and event_id of the path information table 601. Similarly, the values of service_id and event_id are also written in "NE_svc_id" 707 and "NE_event_id" 708 .

同一附图的标识符分配表701中各栏,由于与已说明过的图15相同,所以其中主要重点说明在页基目录中使用的标识符。“VE_id”709在1个事件中表示单意地识别页基目录图像数据的标识符之值。“AE_id”713同样也表示单意地识别声音数据的标识符值。“NE_id”710表示在1个事件中表示单意地识别导航信息的标识符值。Since each column in the identifier allocation table 701 of the same drawing is the same as that of FIG. 15 described above, the identifiers used in the page base table of contents will be mainly explained here. "VE_id" 709 shows the value of the identifier which uniquely identifies the page base content image data in one event. "AE_id" 713 also represents an identifier value for uniquely identifying audio data. "NE_id" 710 indicates an identifier value that uniquely identifies navigation information in one event.

在本实施形式中,由于识别1个页基目录,所以使用“VE_id”“AE_id”“NE_id”。与此相反,在第1实施形式中,由于识别1个流基目录,所以使用“VE_comp_tag”“AE_comp_comp_tag”“NE_id”。从而,在该图中的“VE_comp_tag”栏及“AE_comp_tag”栏被记为“-”。In this embodiment, "VE_id", "AE_id" and "NE_id" are used to identify one page base directory. In contrast, in the first embodiment, "VE_comp_tag", "AE_comp_comp_tag", and "NE_id" are used to identify one stream base directory. Therefore, the "VE_comp_tag" column and the "AE_comp_tag" column in this figure are described as "-".

并且在本实施例中,向“VE_id”709和“NE_id”710提供与目录号702同样的值。此外,“VE_id”709“NE_id”710不必作成目录号702,只要每逢图象数据、导航信息提供不同的值就行。And in this embodiment, the same value as that of the directory number 702 is given to "VE_id" 709 and "NE_id" 710 . In addition, "VE_id" 709 and "NE_id" 710 do not need to be catalog numbers 702, and it is only necessary to provide different values for each image data and navigation information.

再有,在本实施例,“AE_svc_id”711、“AE_event_id”712、“AE-id”713因在目录中没有声音数据,所以不提供标识符,虽然写入“-”,但当包括声音数据情况下,与图像数据、导航信息一样被分配。Furthermore, in this embodiment, "AE_svc_id" 711, "AE_event_id" 712, and "AE-id" 713 do not provide identifiers because there is no audio data in the directory. Although "-" is written, when audio data is included In the case, it is distributed in the same way as image data and navigation information.

多路控制部110一旦结束目录标识符分配表701的形成,则每逢图像数据作成分配“PID”、“component_tag”、“stream_id”各值的显示图像信息标识符分配表。图59是表示该显示图像信息标识符分配表801一例之图。该显示图像信息标识符分配表801中,向“VE_id”709提供由标识符分配表701给予的值。向“PID”803提供在多路信息表601中由“VE_component_pid”分配的值(其中为“0X0084”)。向“component_tag”(部分标记)802对一个“PID”803提供同一值(例如对“PID”之值“0X0084”分配“component_tag”之值“0X00”)。“Stream_id”804,用16进位记从“eo”至“ef”之值对应“VE_id”709依次给予循环。并且,用该“VE_id”709识别的展示信息存储部107中存储着的图像数据文件名作为图像数据文件805写入。When the multiplexing control unit 110 completes the creation of the directory identifier assignment table 701, it creates a display image information identifier assignment table assigning values of "PID", "component_tag", and "stream_id" for each image data. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the display image information identifier assignment table 801. In this display image information identifier assignment table 801 , the value given by the identifier assignment table 701 is given to “VE_id” 709 . The value assigned by "VE_component_pid" in the multi-way information table 601 (where "0X0084") is supplied to the "PID" 803 . The same value is given to "component_tag" (part tag) 802 for one "PID" 803 (for example, the value "0X00" of "component_tag" is assigned to the value "0X0084" of "PID"). In "Stream_id" 804, the values from "eo" to "ef" written in hexadecimal correspond to "VE_id" 709 and are circulated sequentially. Then, the image data file name stored in the presentation information storage unit 107 identified by the “VE_id” 709 is written as the image data file 805 .

此外,当向图57的VE_component_pid上提供多个标识符时,“PID”、“stream_id”如可作如下分配。对于“VE_id”的顺序,首先从多路信息表取出一个VE_component_pid提供给“PID”,“stream_id”用16进位记依次循环地给予“eo”~“ef”之值。Stream_id每巡回一周,从多路信息表取出新的VE_component_pid提供给“PID”,若新的VE_component_pid失去,则返回最初提供的VE_component_pid。每逢“PID”向“component_tag”提供不同值。Also, when a plurality of identifiers are provided to VE_component_pid in FIG. 57, "PID" and "stream_id" can be assigned as follows. For the order of "VE_id", firstly, a VE_component_pid is taken out from the multi-channel information table and provided to "PID", and "stream_id" is given the value of "eo" ~ "ef" cyclically in hexadecimal notation. Stream_id takes a new VE_component_pid from the multi-channel information table every week and provides it to "PID". If the new VE_component_pid is lost, it returns the originally provided VE_component_pid. Each "PID" provides a different value to "component_tag".

还有在本实施例中,以可作为图像数据用的Stream_id之值使用的16进位记,虽然定为使用“eo”~“ef”16个全体,但也可仅用一部分。并且,存在声音数据情况下,stream-id以16进位记使用“co”~“df”的32个由MPEG2规格确定。Also, in this embodiment, all 16 "eo" to "ef" are used in hexadecimal notation that can be used as the value of Stream_id for image data, but only a part may be used. Also, when there is audio data, the stream-id is determined by the MPEG2 standard using 32 numbers from "co" to "df" in hexadecimal notation.

此外,该“component_tag”802为间接参照PID使用。component_tag是使1对1对应自由分配的值,component_tag和PID的对应关系在后述的PMT中提供。通过导航信息、流对应信息内,不直接参照PID值、利用使用component_tag间接参照,比如在和其他节目作多路时在后述的发射部106中,即使PID替换成别的值情况下也具有流对应信息不变更的效果。In addition, this "component_tag" 802 is used for indirect reference to the PID. The component_tag is a value that can be freely assigned in one-to-one correspondence, and the correspondence relationship between the component_tag and the PID is provided in the PMT described later. In the navigation information and stream correspondence information, the PID value is not directly referred to, and the component_tag is used for indirect reference. For example, when multiplexing with other programs, in the transmission unit 106 described later, even if the PID is replaced with another value, it also has The effect that the corresponding information of the stream does not change.

多路控制部110一旦显示图像信息标识符分配表801作成,则指示在流对应信息表生成部111中生成流对应表,指示在标识符信息附加部112于图像数据专用区域上附加VE_id,指示在导航信息表生成部113中生成导航信息表。Once the image information identifier allocation table 801 is displayed, the multiplexing control unit 110 instructs the stream correspondence information table generation unit 111 to generate a stream correspondence table, instructs the identifier information addition unit 112 to add VE_id to the image data dedicated area, and instructs A navigation information table is generated in the navigation information table generation unit 113 .

2-2-3-2.标识符信息附加部1122-2-3-2. Identifier information addition unit 112

标识符信息附加部112若通过多路控制部110接受标识符信息附加指示,则读出在展示信息存储部107中存储着的图像数据。在读出的图像数据位流幅度的专用区域上写入图像数据标识符VE_id。此外VE_id参照取得在多路控制部110中形成的显示图像信息标识符分配表801。在VE_id被写入的图像数据位流中附加文件名后存储在存储区域(未图示)。The identifier information adding unit 112 reads out the image data stored in the presentation information storage unit 107 upon receiving an instruction to add identifier information via the multiplexing control unit 110 . The image data identifier VE_id is written on the dedicated area of the read image data bit stream width. Also, VE_id refers to and acquires the display image information identifier assignment table 801 formed in the multiplexing control unit 110 . The image data bit stream in which VE_id is written is stored in a storage area (not shown) after adding a file name.

图60表示附加标识符信息的文件名“VE(5)”的图像数据一个例子位流901。位流901根据MPEG2规格被编码,在图像标题902的用户数据区域903上记录VE_id之值“0X0005”。在图像数据区域904记录图53A所示的静止图像数据201。若在所有图像数据上附加标识符信息,则向多路控制部110通知附加终结。FIG. 60 shows an example bit stream 901 of image data with a file name "VE(5)" to which identifier information is added. The bit stream 901 is coded according to the MPEG2 standard, and the value of VE_id "0X0005" is recorded in the user data area 903 of the video header 902 . Still image data 201 shown in FIG. 53A is recorded in image data area 904 . When the identifier information is added to all the image data, the multiplexing control unit 110 is notified of the completion of the addition.

此外在本实施,把VE_id作为写入区域,虽然用图像标题中的用户数据区域,但也可用写入专用数据的区域。In addition, in this embodiment, VE_id is used as the writing area, and although the user data area in the video header is used, an area for writing private data may also be used.

2-2-3-3.导航信息表生成部1132-2-3-3. Navigation information table generation unit 113

导航信息表生成部113一旦从多路控制部110接收导航信息表生成的指示,则读出在导航信息存储部108中存储着的导航信息。当读出的导航信息包括高连续表时,参照目录标识符分配表710、使以目录号记录的连接端信息变换成各标识符的记录、生成导航信息表。当不包括高连接表时,保持原来的导航信息,仅变更文件名,生成导航信息表。将生成的导航信息存储在存储区域(未图示)。The navigation information table creation unit 113 reads the navigation information stored in the navigation information storage unit 108 upon receiving an instruction to create a navigation information table from the multiplexing control unit 110 . When the read navigation information includes a high-continuity table, the directory identifier assignment table 710 is referred to, and the connection terminal information recorded by the directory number is converted into a record of each identifier to generate a navigation information table. When the high connection table is not included, the original navigation information is kept, only the file name is changed, and the navigation information table is generated. The generated navigation information is stored in a storage area (not shown).

图61表示生成的文件名“NVT(5)”的导航信息表1001。该导航信息表1001是由图54所示的文件名“navi5.nif”的导航信息生成的。导航信息表1001包括目标定义表1002、处理程序定义表1003、高连接表1004、位标志表1005。Fig. 61 shows the navigation information table 1001 of the generated file name "NVT(5)". This navigation information table 1001 is created from the navigation information with the file name "navi5.nif" shown in FIG. 54 . The navigation information table 1001 includes a target definition table 1002 , a handler definition table 1003 , a high connection table 1004 , and a bit flag table 1005 .

此外,在该高连接表1001的“orig_nw_id”等的栏上记“-”,不记录标识符因用目录的连接源(リンク元)和连接端(リンク先),该标识符是相同的,所以表示省略记录。通过省略记录求得存储区域的减少。连接端若是其他服务,则在“VE_scrvice_id”、“VE_event_id”和“NE_Service_id”、“NE_event_id”上都记录各标识符。其中,索引号“4”的VE_id、NE_id之值上参照目录标识符分配表701分别记录“0X0001”;索引号“5”的VE-id、NE_id之值上参照目录标识符701分别记录“0X0002”。In addition, "-" is written in the "orig_nw_id" column of the high connection table 1001, and the identifier is not recorded because the connection source (link yuan) and connection end (link first) of the directory are the same. So it means omit the record. The storage area reduction is obtained by omitting records. If the connection end is other services, then the identifiers are recorded on "VE_scrvice_id", "VE_event_id" and "NE_Service_id", "NE_event_id". Among them, the values of VE_id and NE_id of the index number "4" refer to the directory identifier allocation table 701 and record "0X0001" respectively; the values of VE-id and NE_id of the index number "5" refer to the directory identifier 701 and record "0X0002 ".

图62表示文件名“NVT(1)”的导航信息表1101。该导航信息表1101是由图55所示的文件名“navi1.nif”的导航信息生成的。因无高连接表,所以目录上无变更。Fig. 62 shows the navigation information table 1101 of the file name "NVT(1)". This navigation information table 1101 is created from the navigation information with the file name "navi1.nif" shown in FIG. 55 . There are no changes on the directory because there are no highly connected tables.

导航信息表生成部113一旦结束导航信息表的生成、则通知多路控制部110生成结束。When the navigation information table generation unit 113 completes the generation of the navigation information table, it notifies the multiplexing control unit 110 of the completion of the generation.

2-2-3-4.流对应信息表生成部1112-2-3-4. Flow correspondence information table generation unit 111

流对应信息表生成部111若从多路控制部110接受流对应表生成指示,则参照显示图像信息标识符分配表801,每逢图像数据生成流对应表。该流对应表的使用是为了从由数据发射装置101向数据接收装置121发射流中取出1个图像数据。Upon receiving a stream correspondence table creation instruction from the multiplexing control unit 110, the stream correspondence information table generation unit 111 refers to the display image information identifier allocation table 801, and generates a stream correspondence table for each image data. This stream correspondence table is used to extract one piece of image data from the stream transmitted from the data transmitting device 101 to the data receiving device 121 .

图63A表示为了在数据接收装置121侧取出图像数据“VE(5)”而使用的流对应表“VET(5)”1201。该流对应表1201的“first_pts”表示开始重放时间信息,该信息用90,000分之一秒单位表示使对应的图象数据最初帧重放的时间,比如用式(1)可求得:FIG. 63A shows a stream correspondence table "VET(5)" 1201 used for fetching image data "VE(5)" on the data receiving device 121 side. The "first_pts" of the stream correspondence table 1201 represents the playback start time information, and this information represents the time for replaying the first frame of the corresponding image data in units of 1/90,000th of a second. For example, formula (1) can be used to obtain:

firstfirst __ ptspts (( NN )) == [[ ΣΣ xx == 00 NN {{ SS __ VEVE (( xx )) ++ SS __ NVTNVT (( xx )) ++ SS __ VETVET ** RR }} // BB ]] ** 9000090000 .. .. .. (( 11 ))

其中S_VE(x)是根据MPEG2系统规格把存储在标识符信息附加部112存储区域的图像数据VE(x)变换为输送流分组时的大小;S_NVT(x)是根据MPEG2系统规格把在导航信息表生成部113的存储区域上存储的导航信息表NVT(x)变换成输送流分组时的大小;S_VET是根据MPEG2系统规格把在流对应信息表生成部111的存储区域上存储着的1个流对应表VET变换成输送流分组时的大小。大小单位是比特。并且,R表示使流对应表VET重复多路的次数,取从“1”至“(PXS)”的整数值。其中P是为了传输在多路信息存储部104中分配的图像数据的部分而分配的PID数,在本实施例中为“1”。S表示在显示图像信息标识符分配表801中使用的Stream_id的个数、在本实施例中为“16”。B是位速率,在本实施例中为“6Mbps”。Among them, S_VE(x) is the size when the image data VE(x) stored in the storage area of the identifier information adding part 112 is converted into a transport stream packet according to the MPEG2 system standard; S_NVT(x) is the size converted into the navigation information according to the MPEG2 system standard The size of the navigation information table NVT(x) stored in the storage area of the table generation unit 113 when converted into transport stream packets; S_VET is one stored in the storage area of the stream correspondence information table generation unit 111 in accordance with the MPEG2 system standard The size of the stream correspondence table VET converted into transport stream packets. The unit of size is bits. In addition, R indicates the number of times the stream correspondence table VET is repeated for multiplexing, and takes an integer value from "1" to "(PXS)". Here, P is the number of PIDs allocated for transferring the part of the image data allocated in the multiplexing information storage unit 104, which is "1" in this embodiment. S represents the number of Stream_ids used in the display image information identifier assignment table 801, which is "16" in this embodiment. B is the bit rate, which is "6Mbps" in this embodiment.

此外,S_VE(x)在VE(x)的大小中每个PES分组单位增加必要的PES分组标题、尾部信息成分的大小,还有,每个输送分组单位增加必要的输送分组标题、尾部信息成分求得。还有,S_NVT(x)在NVT(x)大小中每个节单位增加必要的节标题、尾部信息成分大小,再在每个输送分组单位增加必要的输送分组标题、尾部信息成分的大小求得。S_VET与S_NVT(x)一样,在VET的大小中增加节标题等大小求得。此外,在本实施例中所有VET大小都一样。而且,PES分组、输送分组、节的详细目录由MPEG2系统规格定义。In addition, S_VE(x) increases the size of the necessary PES packet header and trailer information components for each PES packet unit in the size of VE(x), and also increases the required transport packet header and trailer information components for each transport packet unit. Get it. In addition, S_NVT(x) can be obtained by adding the necessary section header and trailer information component size in each section unit of the NVT(x) size, and then adding the necessary transport packet header and trailer information component size in each transport packet unit. . Like S_NVT(x), S_VET is obtained by adding the size of the section title to the size of VET. Furthermore, all VETs are the same size in this embodiment. Furthermore, the detailed list of PES packets, transport packets, and sections is defined by the MPEG2 system specification.

该流对应表1201的“last_pts”表示用90,000分之一秒单位表示重放对应的图像数据最后帧的时刻的终止重放时刻信息,在本实施例,图像数据用于静止图像,“last_pts”(终止重放时间信息)与“first_Pts”一致。"last_pts" of the stream correspondence table 1201 indicates playback termination time information indicating the time at which the last frame of the corresponding image data is played back in units of 90,000th of a second. In this embodiment, the image data is used for still images. " last_pts" (end playback time information) coincides with "first_Pts".

流对应表1201的component_tag、Stream_id在参照显示图像信息标记符分配表801对应的图像数据中取得分配的component_tag和Stream_id之值。Component_tag and Stream_id of the stream correspondence table 1201 are obtained by referring to the image data corresponding to the display image information tag assignment table 801 to obtain the values of the assigned component_tag and Stream_id.

图63B表示图像数据第1流对应表1202,图63c表示图像数据第15流对应表1203。FIG. 63B shows the image data first stream correspondence table 1202, and FIG. 63c shows the image data fifteenth stream correspondence table 1203.

另外,这些流对应表1201、1202、1203的“first_pts”、“last_pts”成为基准的时间“0”是发射数据存储部102中存储着的数据最初在输送流中多路发射的时间。In addition, the time "0" to which "first_pts" and "last_pts" of these stream correspondence tables 1201, 1202, and 1203 are based is the time when the data stored in the transmission data storage unit 102 is first multiplexed in the transport stream.

而且在本实施例中,在流对应表上参照显示图像信息标识符分配表801,虽然记载分配的component_tag之值,但也可替换成component_tag值,在多路信息表601中直接记载分配了的VE_component_pid之值。In addition, in this embodiment, the display image information identifier assignment table 801 is referred to in the stream correspondence table, and although the value of the assigned component_tag is recorded, it can also be replaced with the value of the component_tag, and the assigned one can be directly recorded in the multiplex information table 601. The value of VE_component_pid.

2-2-3-5多路控制部110(其2)2-2-3-5 Multiplexing control unit 110 (Part 2)

多路控制部110一旦从标识符信息附加部112、导航信息表生成部113、流对应信息表生成部111接受每个处理结束意思的通知,则确定重复单位目录数量T。其中所谓重复单位数量T简单来说,称为图51所示的发射数据165中包括的目录总数M和伪目录的数的总量,更正确来说是设定为存储在发射数据存储部102中的目录总量M,称为成为M≤P×S×n=T的T。The multiplexing control unit 110 specifies the number T of duplicate unit directories upon receiving notifications of the end of each process from the identifier information adding unit 112 , the navigation information table generating unit 113 , and the flow correspondence information table generating unit 111 . The so-called repetition unit number T simply refers to the total number of contents M and the number of pseudo-lists included in the transmission data 165 shown in FIG. The total amount M of contents in is called T such that M≦P×S×n=T.

其中P与在上式(1)中说明的一样,表示在多路信息存储部104中分配给用于传输图像数据的部分的PID个数,S表示与在上述式(1)中说明的一样Stream_id的个数,n为满足M≤T的最小整数。在本实施例中,因P=1、S=16、M=63,所以T为64。此外,当重复单位目录数T大于目录总量M情况下,多路控制部110在输送流中使所有目录多路化之后,使最小目录(T-M)个以上大小零分组多路化。以此,图像数据和对应于其图像数据的流对应表的多路位置间隔D可保障在一定值以上[最小的目录大小的(P×S-1)倍以上]。Among them, P is the same as described in the above formula (1), and represents the number of PIDs allocated to the part for transmitting image data in the multiplex information storage unit 104, and S represents the same as described in the above formula (1). The number of Stream_ids, n is the smallest integer satisfying M≤T. In this embodiment, since P=1, S=16, and M=63, T is 64. Also, when the number T of repetition unit directories is greater than the total number of directories M, the multiplexing control unit 110 multiplexes all the directories in the transport stream, and then multiplexes the smallest directory (T-M) or more size zero packets. In this way, the multi-way position interval D between the image data and the stream correspondence table corresponding to the image data can be guaranteed to be at least a certain value [more than (P×S-1) times the minimum directory size].

接着多路控制部110用式(2)求重复单位目录数T的一周长度L[用存储在多路信息存储部104中的位速率B使所有的目录和目录(T-M)个大小零分组多路化时,以90000分之一秒单位表示输送流长度的值]。Then multiplexing control section 110 uses formula (2) to find the cycle length L of repeating unit directory number T [make all directories and directory (T-M) size zero grouping more with bit rate B stored in the multiplexing information storage section 104 The value of conveying stream length expressed in units of 90,000th of a second during roadization].

LL == [[ [[ ΣΣ xx == 00 Mm -- 11 {{ SS __ VEVE (( xx )) ++ SS __ NVTNVT (( xx )) ++ SS __ VETVET ** RR }}

++ {{ SS __ VEVE (( 00 )) ++ SS __ NVTNVT (( 00 )) ++ SS __ VETVET ** RR }} ** (( TT -- Mm )) ]] // BB ]] ** 9000090000 .. .. .. .. .. .. (( 22 ))

其中、M、T是上述目录总数和重复单位目录数,有关S_VE(x)、S_NVT(x)、S_VET、P、B与上述式(1)说明一样。Wherein, M and T are the total number of the above-mentioned directories and the number of repeating unit directories, and the descriptions of S_VE(x), S_NVT(x), S_VET, P, and B are the same as those of the above-mentioned formula (1).

多路控制部110在目录计数器i中设定“0”,在多路开始位置WP上设定“0”。WP值表示在输送流中从多路的目录最初信息位置的时间。The multiplexing control unit 110 sets "0" in the directory counter i, and sets "0" in the multiplexing start position WP. The WP value indicates the time in the transport stream from the first information position of the multiplexed directory.

接着在VET计数器j值中设定“0”。用VET计数器j值求周次数c和目录号N。周次数c是{i+(p×s)-1-j}÷T之商的整数部分,目录号N是{i+(P×s)-1-j}÷T的余数。下面,判断流对应表第N个VET(N)是否存储在流对应信息表生成部111中,当存储着时,在VET(N)的first_pts,Last_pts上加周次数c乘重复单位目录数T的一周长度L之值。Next, "0" is set in the VET counter j value. Use the value of VET counter j to find the cycle number c and catalog number N. The cycle number c is the integer part of the quotient of {i+(p×s)-1-j}÷T, and the catalog number N is the remainder of {i+(P×s)-1-j}÷T. Next, it is judged whether the Nth VET(N) of the stream correspondence table is stored in the stream correspondence information table generator 111, and if it is stored, the number of cycles c multiplied by the number of duplicate unit directories T is added to the first_pts and Last_pts of the VET(N) The value of the length L of the week.

然后对多路化部114指示该VET(N)多路。这时,通知多路开始位置WP、位速率B,把多路信息表601中的“VE_information_component_pid”之值作为PID通知,把对应目录标识符分配表701的目录号“N”的“VE_id”之值作为table_id_extension通知。Then, the multiplexing unit 114 is instructed to multiplex the VET(N). At this time, the multiplexing start position WP and the bit rate B are notified, the value of "VE_information_component_pid" in the multiplexing information table 601 is notified as the PID, and the value of "VE_id" corresponding to the directory number "N" of the directory identifier allocation table 701 is notified. The value is notified as table_id_extension.

当在流对应信息表生成部111中没有存储VET(N)时,S_VET大小的零分组多路被指示给多路化部114,通知多路开始位置WP、位速率B。When VET(N) is not stored in the stream correspondence information table generation unit 111, zero packet multiplexing of S_VET size is instructed to the multiplexing unit 114, and the multiplexing start position WP and the bit rate B are notified.

给多路化部114作多路化指示之后,计算多路开始位置WP。可用WP=+S-VET/B计算。接着在VET计数器j之值上加“1”,判断VET计数器j和流对应表示复多路次数R的值是否一致,当不一致时,再作周次数c、目录号N的计算,继续VET(N)的多路化处理。After a multiplexing instruction is given to the multiplexing unit 114, the multiplexing start position WP is calculated. It can be calculated by WP=+S-VET/B. Then add "1" to the value of the VET counter j to judge whether the value of the VET counter j and the flow corresponding to the number of multi-channels R is consistent. N) multiplex processing.

多路控制部110当在两个计数器之值判定为一致时,用与上述同样的方法计算周次数c、目录号N,判断在标识符信息附加部112或导航信息表生成部113中是否存储目录号N的目录。当判断为存储着时,给多路化部114指示VE(N)的多路。这时,把多路开始位置WP、位速率BV(N)、PIN、Stream_id之值通知到多路化部114。此外,PIN、Stream_id之值从显示图像信息标识符分配表801中取出把“VE_id”值分配给“N”的图像数据的“PIN”和“Stream_id”值。位速率BV(N)由以下所示的式(3)计算。When the values of the two counters are judged to be consistent, the multiplex control unit 110 calculates the number of cycles c and the directory number N in the same manner as above, and judges whether to store them in the identifier information adding unit 112 or the navigation information table generating unit 113. Directory with directory number N. When it is judged that it is stored, multiplexing of VE(N) is instructed to the multiplexing unit 114 . At this time, the multiplexing unit 114 is notified of the values of the multiplexing start position WP, bit rate BV(N), PIN, and Stream_id. Also, the values of PIN and Stream_id are taken from the display image information identifier assignment table 801 to assign the "VE_id" value to the "N" image data "PIN" and "Stream_id" values. The bit rate BV(N) is calculated by Equation (3) shown below.

bit rate Bv(N)={S_VE(N)*B}/{S_VE(N)+S_NVT(N)}.........(3)bit rate Bv(N)={S_VE(N)*B}/{S_VE(N)+S_NVT(N)}......(3)

式中标号与上述式(1)一样。The reference numbers in the formula are the same as those in the above formula (1).

还有向多路化部114指示NVT(N)的多路。这时,向多路化部114通知多路开始位置WP、位速率Bn(N)、PID、table_id_extension值。有关PID,参照多路信息存储部104,取出分配给在导航信息传输中所分配的部分的PID值。对于table_id_extension,从目录标识符分配表701中取出相应于目录号N的“NE_id”值。位速率Bn(N)由下式(4)计算。In addition, multiplexing of NVT (N) is instructed to the multiplexing unit 114 . At this time, the multiplexing unit 114 is notified of the multiplexing start position WP, bit rate Bn(N), PID, and table_id_extension value. Regarding the PID, the multiplexed information storage unit 104 is referred to, and the PID value assigned to the part assigned in the transmission of the navigation information is fetched. For table_id_extension, the "NE_id" value corresponding to the directory number N is fetched from the directory identifier assignment table 701 . The bit rate Bn(N) is calculated by the following equation (4).

Bit rate Bn(N)={s_NVT(N)*B}/{S_VE(N)+S_NVT(N)}............(4)Bit rate Bn(N)={s_NVT(N)*B}/{S_VE(N)+S_NVT(N)}.........(4)

式中标号与上述式(3)中一样。The reference numbers in the formula are the same as in the above formula (3).

接着多路控制部110用计算式WP=WP+{S_VE(N)+S_NVT(N)}/B求多路开始位置Wp。Next, the multiplexing control unit 110 obtains the multiplexing start position Wp using the formula WP=WP+{S_VE(N)+S_NVT(N)}/B.

加之,多路控制部110在目录N设有被存储的情况下,把S_VE(O)+S_NVT(O)大小的零分组多路指示给多路化部114,通知多路开始位置WP。In addition, when the directory N is not stored, the multiplexing control unit 110 instructs the multiplexing unit 114 to multiplex zero packets of the size S_VE(O)+S_NVT(O), and notifies the multiplexing start position WP.

此外虽然设多路的零分组大小为目录号“0”的S_VE(O)和S_NVT(O)相加的大小,但也可设定在所有目录中使大小最小的S_VE(K)+S_NVT(K)的零分组多路。In addition, although the size of the multi-way zero packet is the sum of the S_VE(O) and S_NVT(O) of the directory number "0", it is also possible to set the S_VE(K)+S_NVT( K) zero packet multiplexing.

多路控制部110用计算式WP=WP+{S_VE(O)+S_NVT(O)}/B求多路开始位置WP。The multiplexing control unit 110 obtains the multiplexing start position WP using the calculation formula WP=WP+{S_VE(O)+S_NVT(O)}/B.

再在目录计数器i值上加“1”,再次求VET计数器j之值,使VET(N)多路化以后的处理重复。Then, "1" is added to the value of the directory counter i, the value of the VET counter j is calculated again, and the processing after multiplexing VET(N) is repeated.

2-2-3-6.多路化部1142-2-3-6. Multiplexing section 114

多路化部114在MPG2输送流中使图51中所示的发射数据165多路。图64、65是在图51所示的示意图上附加识别信息的更具体的多路化流的示意图。下面作详细说明。The multiplexing unit 114 multiplexes the transmission data 165 shown in FIG. 51 in the MPG2 transport stream. 64 and 65 are diagrams of more specific multiplexed streams in which identification information is added to the diagram shown in FIG. 51 . Describe in detail below.

多路化部114根据来自多路控制部110的指示,由在MPEG2系统规格中规定的方法使数据在MPEG2输送流中多路。若从多路控制部110接受流对应表VET(N)的多路指示,则从流对应信息表生成部111读出流对应表VET(N),使用由指定的多路开始位置WD指定的PID、table_id_extension、位速率、在输送流中多路。并且,若从多路控制部110接受图像数据VE(N)的多路指示,则读出对应通过标识符信息附加部112附加标识符的图像数据,使用由指定的多路开始位置WP指定的PID、Stream_id、位速率BV(N),在输送流中多路。并且如果通过多路控制部110作导航信息表NVT(N)多路指示,则从导航信息表生成部113读出导航信息表,用由指定的多路开始位置WP指定了的PID、Table_id_extension、位速率Bn(N)在输送流中作多路。一旦指示零分组多路,则用指定了的位速率B使由指定了的多路开始位置WP指定的大小的零分组多路。The multiplexing unit 114 multiplexes data in the MPEG2 transport stream by a method defined in the MPEG2 system specification in accordance with an instruction from the multiplexing control unit 110 . When the multiplexing instruction of the stream correspondence table VET(N) is received from the multiplexing control unit 110, the stream correspondence table VET(N) is read out from the stream correspondence information table generation unit 111, and the stream correspondence table VET(N) specified by the specified multiplexing start position WD is used. PID, table_id_extension, bitrate, multiplexed in transport stream. And, if the multiplexing instruction of image data VE(N) is received from the multiplexing control section 110, the image data corresponding to the identifier added by the identifier information adding section 112 is read out, and the specified multiplexing start position WP is used. PID, Stream_id, bit rate BV(N), multiplexed in transport stream. And if the multi-way instruction of the navigation information table NVT (N) is made by the multi-way control part 110, then the navigation information table is read out from the navigation information table generation part 113, and the PID, Table_id_extension, Table_id_extension, The bit rate Bn(N) is multiplexed in the transport stream. When zero packet multiplexing is instructed, zero packets of the size specified by the specified multiplexing start position WP are multiplexed at the specified bit rate B.

而且,对于PCR设生成的输送流打头的初期值为“0”,通过多路控制部110用通知的PCR_PID作多重。Furthermore, the initial value of the header of the generated transport stream is "0" for the PCR, and the PCR_PID notified by the multiplexing control unit 110 is used for multiplexing.

图64是表示由多路化部114生成的输送流之例子。在输送流1701中使存储在发射数据存储部102中的63个目录多路。向63个图像数据VE(0)~VE(62)提供作为PID由多路信息表601给予的值“0X0084”,作为Stream_id循环提供并作多路。FIG. 64 shows an example of a transport stream generated by the multiplexing unit 114 . In the transport stream 1701, 63 directories stored in the transmission data storage unit 102 are multiplexed. The value "0X0084" given by the multiplexing information table 601 as PID is supplied to 63 image data VE(0) to VE(62), and is supplied cyclically as Stream_id and multiplexed.

还有,向流对应表VET(N)提供由多路信息表601给予的值“0X0083”,作为table_id_extension提供与图像数据标识符“VE_id”一样的值。使流对应表VET(N)每逢图像数据VE(N)作一次多路。流对应表重复多路次数R为“1”。Also, the value "0X0083" given by the multiplex information table 601 is given to the stream correspondence table VET(N), and the same value as the image data identifier "VE_id" is given as table_id_extension. The stream correspondence table VET(N) is multiplexed every video data VE(N). The stream correspondence table repeats multiple times R to be "1".

并且,63个导航信息表NE(0)~NE(62)提供作为PID由多路信息表601给予的值“0X0082”,作为table_id_extension提供导航信息标识符“NE_id”之值并多路。并使包括时间基准信息的PCR 1702多路。In addition, 63 navigation information tables NE(0)-NE(62) provide the value "0X0082" given by the multiplex information table 601 as PID, and provide the value of the navigation information identifier "NE_id" as table_id_extension and multiplex it. And multiplex the PCR 1702 including the time reference information.

图51所示的1个发射数据165如箭标1708所示,是从流对应表VET(15)至零分组1705的范围。One transmission data 165 shown in FIG. 51 ranges from the flow correspondence table VET(15) to the zero packet 1705 as indicated by the arrow 1708 .

在输送流1701,仅在对应的图像数据VE(N)的图像数据15幅前的位置使流对应表VET(N)多路。因循环地把16个Stream_id提供给图像数据,所以流对应表VET(N)和在对应的图像数据VE(N)之间,具有与VE(N)同样的PID、stream_id的其他图像数据不被多路。因此,数据接收装置121取得流对应表VET(N)之后,在提供多个存在的同样的PID、Stream_id的图像数据内仅分离最初出现的,以此,可提取所要求的图像数据VE(N)。例如,在流对应表VET(16)1703和图像数据VE(16)1704之间。不存在提供PID“0X0084”、Stream_id“oxeo”的其他图像数据。所以数据接收装置121具有PID“0X0084”、Stream_id“oxeo”的4个图像数据、VE(0)、VE(16)、VE(32)、VE(48)内,通过分离流对应表VET(16)1703之后最初出现的图像数据VE(16),可使所要求的图像数据VE(16)重放。In the transport stream 1701, the stream correspondence table VET(N) is multiplexed only at the position preceding 15 pieces of image data corresponding to the image data VE(N). Because 16 Stream_ids are provided to the image data cyclically, between the stream correspondence table VET(N) and the corresponding image data VE(N), other image data having the same PID and stream_id as VE(N) are not Multiple ways. Therefore, after the data receiving device 121 obtains the stream correspondence table VET(N), it can extract the desired image data VE(N) by separating only the one that appears first among the image data provided with the same PID and Stream_id that exists in a plurality. ). For example, between the stream correspondence table VET(16)1703 and the image data VE(16)1704. There is no other image data providing PID "0X0084", Stream_id "oxeo". Therefore, the data receiving device 121 has four image data, VE(0), VE(16), VE(32), and VE(48) of PID "0X0084" and Stream_id "oxeo", and separates the stream correspondence table VET(16 ) 1703, the first video data VE(16) appears, and the requested video data VE(16) can be reproduced.

而且,输送流1701的构成要使得流对应表VET(N)和对应的VE(N)之间使15个目录数据多路。即,在流对应表VET(N)出现之后,直至对应的图像数据VE(N)出现的时间D要保障大于至少最少大小目录15个被传输所需的时间。数据接收装置121在该时间D期间解释流对应表信息,为了分离图像数据若作必要处理,则能可靠地使要求的图像数据重放。在重复的周次点附近也要保证时间D高于15个目录的传输时间,所以在周次最后使1个目录大小的零分组1705多路。以此,在VET(N)和VE(N)之间使周次点连续的情况下,例如在VET(O)1706和VE(O)1707的间隔也要保证大于传输最小大小15个目录所需时间。Furthermore, the configuration of the transport stream 1701 is such that 15 content data are multiplexed between the stream correspondence table VET(N) and the corresponding VE(N). That is, after the stream correspondence table VET(N) appears, the time D until the corresponding image data VE(N) appears must be guaranteed to be longer than the time required for at least 15 directories of the minimum size to be transmitted. During this time D, the data receiving device 121 interprets the stream correspondence table information, and if necessary processing is performed to separate the image data, the desired image data can be reproduced reliably. The transmission time of time D higher than 15 directories will also be ensured near the repeated cycle point, so the zero packet 1705 with the size of 1 directory is multiplexed at the end of the cycle. In this way, when the cycle point is continuous between VET (N) and VE (N), for example, the interval between VET (O) 1706 and VE (O) 1707 must also be guaranteed to be greater than the transmission minimum size of 15 directories. It takes time.

图65是表示把流对应表重复多路次数R设定为“16”的情况下,由多路化部114生成的输送流之例。FIG. 65 shows an example of transport streams generated by the multiplexing unit 114 when the number of repetitions R of the stream correspondence table is set to "16".

在输送流1711中,从对应的图像数据VE(N)15个目录前的位置在VE(N)多路开始位置之间,使流对应表VET(N)作16次多路。数据接收装置121首先取得流对应表,由于使其后对应的图数据重放、所以能使所述时间D越短则能越快地重放所要求的图像数据。然而,一旦时间D变短,则数据接收装置121更高速地解释流对应表,为分离图像必须作必要的处理。像输送流1711,如若使流对应表作多次多路,则在数据接收装置121中,负荷小的情况下在接近图像数据的位置取得多路了的流对应表,高速重放图像数据,负荷大的情况下在距图像数据远的位置取得多路了的流对应表,可靠地重放图像数据,对上述控制是可能的。In the transport stream 1711, the stream correspondence table VET(N) is multiplexed 16 times from the position 15 directories ahead of the corresponding image data VE(N) to the multiplexing start position of VE(N). The data receiving device 121 acquires the stream correspondence table first, and reproduces the corresponding image data after that, so the shorter the time D is, the faster the required image data can be reproduced. However, once the time D becomes shorter, the data receiving device 121 interprets the stream correspondence table at a higher speed, and must perform necessary processing for separating images. For the transport stream 1711, if the stream correspondence table is multi-multiplexed, the data receiving device 121 can obtain the multi-channel stream correspondence table at a position close to the image data when the load is light, and reproduce the image data at high speed. When the load is heavy, it is possible to obtain the multi-channel stream correspondence table at a position far from the image data, and reliably reproduce the image data, which is possible for the above-mentioned control.

多路化部114趟若生成图64所示的输送流1701,则依次向发射部输出。When the multiplexing unit 114 generates the transport stream 1701 shown in FIG. 64 , it sequentially outputs it to the transmitting unit.

2-2-4.系统信息表生成部1052-2-4. System information table generation unit 105

系统信息表生成部105参照多路信息存储部104等,生成作为在数据接收装置121中为节目选择而使用的程序说明(プロゲラム仕样)信息的NIT(Network Information Table)、EIT(Event Information Table)、SDT(Service Description Table)、PAT(Program Association Table)及PMT(Program Map Table)。The system information table generation unit 105 refers to the multiplex information storage unit 104, etc., and generates NIT (Network Information Table), EIT (Event Information Table) as program description (program specification) information used for program selection in the data receiving device 121. ), SDT (Service Description Table), PAT (Program Association Table) and PMT (Program Map Table).

具体来说,由于与第1实施形式的系统信息表生成部5105一样,所以此处仅限于本实施形式的生成结果(系统信息表)的介绍。Specifically, since it is the same as the system information table generation unit 5105 in the first embodiment, the description here is limited to the generation result (system information table) in this embodiment.

图66A~图66C表示由系统信息表生成部105生成的NIT、SDT、EIT之一例。66A to 66C show examples of NIT, SDT, and EIT generated by the system information table generating unit 105 .

图67、图68表示由系统信息表生成部105生成的PAT、PMT之一例。67 and 68 show examples of PAT and PMT generated by the system information table generating unit 105 .

图69A~图69D表示具体的由系统信息表生成部生成的PMT中的EnntryDescriptor、NE_Component Descriptor、VE_Information Descriptor、Stream identifier descriptor。FIGS. 69A to 69D show specific EnntryDescriptor, NE_Component Descriptor, VE_Information Descriptor, and Stream identifier descriptor in the PMT generated by the system information table generating unit.

在图69A的“Entry Descriptor”上记述“entry VE-id”、“entryAE_id”、“entry NE_id”之值。这表示进入目录是页基目录。这一点与第1实施形式的图25所示的“Entry Descriptor”不同。即,在图25中,记述着表示进入目录是页基目录的“entry VE_Comp_tag”、“entry_AE_Comp_tag”、“entry_NE_id”之值。The values of "entry VE-id", "entryAE_id", and "entry NE_id" are described in "Entry Descriptor" in FIG. 69A. This indicates that the entry directory is the page base directory. This point is different from "Entry Descriptor" shown in FIG. 25 of the first embodiment. That is, in FIG. 25, the values of "entry VE_Comp_tag", "entry_AE_Comp_tag", and "entry_NE_id" indicating that the entry directory is a page base directory are described.

系统信息表生成部105一旦接收来自多路控制部110的通知,则首先参照多路信息存储部104,根据DVB-SI规格、MPEG2系统规格的要求,生成NIT、EIT、SDT及PAT,所述生成部分包括用于数据接收装置121选择事件必要的信息,所述事件是使发射数据存储部102存储的数据多路化了的。Once the system information table generation unit 105 receives the notification from the multiplexing control unit 110, it first refers to the multiplexing information storage unit 104, and generates NIT, EIT, SDT, and PAT according to the requirements of the DVB-SI standard and the MPEG2 system standard. The generation section includes information necessary for the data reception device 121 to select an event that multiplexes the data stored in the transmission data storage section 102 .

NIT对于由通过特定网络识别的网络发射的各输送流,记录有关传输线路的物理信息等。图66A表示在系统信息表生成部105生成的NIT1301之一例。network_id是由“0X0001”识别的网络、在由“0X0001”识别network_id的网络中,发射由“0X0001”识别Original_network_id、transport_Stream_id的输送流,展示着在“传输诸元”中显示的有关其频率和调制方式的说明。The NIT records physical information on transmission lines and the like for each transport stream transmitted by a network identified through a specific network. FIG. 66A shows an example of the NIT 1301 generated by the system information table generating unit 105. network_id is the network identified by "0X0001", in the network identified by "0X0001" network_id, transmits the transport stream identified by "0X0001" Original_network_id, transport_Stream_id, showing the frequency and modulation displayed in the "transmission elements" Description of the method.

SDT就有关在特定输送流中所包括的各服务,记录服务名称等。图66B表示在系统信息表生成部105中生成的SDT 1302之一例。在由“0X0001”识别transport_Stream_id的输送流中,包括由“0X0001”识别Service_id的服务,展示着在“service名称等信息”中表示的其服务名称等的信息目录。The SDT records service names and the like with respect to each service included in a specific transport stream. FIG. 66B shows an example of the SDT 1302 generated by the system information table generating unit 105. In the transport stream whose transport_Stream_id is identified by "0X0001", the service whose Service_id is identified by "0X0001" is included, and the information content such as the service name indicated in the "information such as service name" is displayed.

EIT对于在特定服务中包括的各事件,记录着有关事件名称和开始时间、结束时间的信息。图66c表示在系统信息表生成部105生成的EIT1303之一例。在由“0X0001”识别Service_id的服务中,包括由“0X0001”识别erent_id的事件,展示着在“event名称等信息”中表示其事件名称等的信息目录。The EIT records information on event names, start times, and end times for each event included in a specific service. FIG. 66c shows an example of the EIT 1303 generated by the system information table generating unit 105. In the service whose Service_id is identified by "0X0001", the event whose erent_id is identified by "0X0001" is included, and the information list which shows the event name etc. in "event name etc. information" is displayed.

PAT就有关在特定输送流中包括的各程序,记录着PMT(程序表)的PID信息。图67表示在系统信息表生成部105中生成的PAT 1401之一例。在由“0X0001”识别transport_Stream_id的输送流中,Program_no包括“0X0001”的程序,展示着其PMT的PID是“0X0080”的目录。Program_no与Serrice_id一致,程序相当于事件。The PAT records PID information of a PMT (Program Table) regarding each program included in a specific transport stream. FIG. 67 shows an example of the PAT 1401 generated by the system information table generating unit 105. In the transport stream whose transport_Stream_id is identified by "0X0001", Program_no includes the program of "0X0001", showing the directory whose PMT's PID is "0X0080". Program_no is the same as Serrice_id, and the program is equivalent to an event.

接着系统信息表生成部105参照多路信息存储部104、多路控制部110及结构信息存储部109,根据MPEG2系统规格要求生成对应于使发射数据多路的程序的PMT,而发射数据存储于发射数据存储部102中。图68表示在系统信息表生成部105中生成的PMT之一例。“program_number”是表示使发射数据多路的程序号的值,对此作多路信息表601的“Service_id”值“0X0001”的读出写入。Next, the system information table generation unit 105 refers to the multiplex information storage unit 104, the multiplex control unit 110, and the configuration information storage unit 109, and generates a PMT corresponding to a program for multiplexing transmission data according to the requirements of the MPEG2 system standard, and the transmission data is stored in In the transmission data storage unit 102. FIG. 68 shows an example of the PMT generated by the system information table generating unit 105. "program_number" is a value indicating the program number for multiplexing transmission data, and the "Service_id" value "0X0001" of the multiplexing information table 601 is read and written.

“PCR-PID”是表示分组PID的值,所述分组包括成为使该程序解码时其准的程序信息(PCR),对此作多路信息表601的“PCR_PID”之值“0X0081”的取出写入。"PCR-PID" is a value indicating the PID of the packet including the program information (PCR) to make the program decoding accurate. For this, the value "0X0081" of "PCR_PID" in the multiplex information table 601 is taken out. write.

“Entry_Desriptor”是包括在选择该程序时最近重放的进入目录标识符信息的解说符。图69A表示“Entry_Descriptor”之一例。descriptor_tag是表示解说符的种类的标识符,在其中写入在“Entry_Descriptor”使用中确定的值(其中为0X98)。"Entry_Desriptor" is a descriptor including the identifier information of the entry directory reproduced most recently when the program is selected. Fig. 69A shows an example of "Entry_Descriptor". The descriptor_tag is an identifier indicating the type of a descriptor, and a value determined during use of "Entry_Descriptor" (here, 0X98) is written therein.

“entry_VE_id”、“entry_AE_id”、“entry_NE_id”表示识别构成进入目录的图像数据、声音数据、导航信息的标识符值。系统信息表生成部105参照结构信息存储部109的目录信息502,得到进入目录的目录号“5”,参照多路控制部110标识符分配表701,取出对应于目录号“5”的“VE_id”值“0X0005”和“AE_id”值“-”和“NE_id”值“0X0005”,分别写入“entry_VE-id”、“entry_AE_id”、“entry_NE_id”。"entry_VE_id", "entry_AE_id", and "entry_NE_id" represent identifier values for identifying image data, audio data, and navigation information constituting the entry list. The system information table generation unit 105 refers to the directory information 502 of the structure information storage unit 109 to obtain the directory number "5" of the entry directory, and refers to the identifier allocation table 701 of the multiplexing control section 110 to extract the "VE_id" corresponding to the directory number "5". "value "0X0005" and "AE_id" value "-" and "NE_id" value "0X0005", respectively write "entry_VE-id", "entry_AE_id", "entry_NE_id".

PMT1501中一览表1502表示识别构成该程序的各部分的PID值“PID”、表示在各网络中传输的数据种类的“Stream_type”、对应于各部分的解说符信息。Table 1502 in PMT 1501 shows a PID value "PID" for identifying each part constituting the program, "Stream_type" indicating the type of data transmitted in each network, and descriptor information corresponding to each part.

首先,系统信息表生成部105就有关传输导航信息的部分,从多路信息表601取出对应于“NE_component_pid”的值“0X0082”,作为“PID”写入,把表示在该网络中传输的数据种类是区段数据的值“0X05”作为“Stream_type”写入。把表示该部分传输导航信息的NE_component_Descriptor作为“descriptor(解说符)”写入。图69B表示NE_Component_Descriptor之一例。在descriptor_tag上写入用于“NE_Component_Desriptor”所规定的值(其中为0X9a)。First, the system information table generator 105 takes out the value "0X0082" corresponding to "NE_component_pid" from the multiplex information table 601 for the part related to the transmission of navigation information, and writes it as "PID" to represent the data transmitted in the network. The type is the value "0X05" of the sector data is written as "Stream_type". NE_component_Descriptor indicating that the part transmits navigation information is written as "descriptor". Fig. 69B shows an example of NE_Component_Descriptor. The value specified for "NE_Component_Desriptor" (where 0X9a) is written in the descriptor_tag.

接着就有关传输流对应表的部分,从多路信息表601取出对应于“VE_information_component_Pid”的值“0X0083”,作为“PID”写入,把表示以该部分传输的数据种类是区段数据的值“0X05”作为“Stream_type”写入,把表示该部分传输流对应表的VE_Information_Component_Descriptor作为“descriptor”写入。图69C表示VE_Information_Component_Descriptor之一例。在“descriptor-tag”上写入用于“VE_information_Component_Descriptor”确定的值(其中为0X9a)。Next, with respect to the part of the transport stream correspondence table, the value "0X0083" corresponding to "VE_information_component_Pid" is taken out from the multiplex information table 601, written as "PID", and the value indicating that the type of data transmitted by this part is segment data "0X05" is written as "Stream_type", and VE_Information_Component_Descriptor indicating the corresponding table of this part of the transport stream is written as "descriptor". FIG. 69C shows an example of VE_Information_Component_Descriptor. Write the value for "VE_information_Component_Descriptor" determination on "descriptor-tag" (where 0X9a).

然后,系统信息表生成部105就有关传输图像数据的部分,从多路信息表601中取出对应于“VE_Component_pid”的值“0X0084”,作为“PID”写入,把表示用该部分传输的数据种类为视频流的值“0X02”作为“Stream_type”写入,把表示该部分的部分标记值的Stream_identifier_descriptor作为“descriptor”写入。图69D表示Stream_identifier_descriptor之一例。在“descptor_tag”上写入用于stream_identifier_deseriptor规定的值(其中为0X52)。在“component_tag”上,参照多路控制部110的显示图像信息标识符分配表801,取出写入把“PID”分配给“0X0084”部分的component_tag值“0X00”。Then, the system information table generator 105 takes out the value "0X0084" corresponding to "VE_Component_pid" from the multiplexing information table 601 for the part related to the transmission of image data, writes it as "PID", and writes the data indicating that the part is transmitted. A value "0X02" whose type is a video stream is written as "Stream_type", and a Stream_identifier_descriptor indicating a part tag value of the part is written as "descriptor". Fig. 69D shows an example of Stream_identifier_descriptor. Write the value specified for stream_identifier_deseriptor (where 0X52) on "descptor_tag". For "component_tag", the display image information identifier assignment table 801 of the multiplexing control unit 110 is referred to, and the component_tag value "0X00" written in the part where "PID" is assigned to "0X0084" is fetched.

2-2-5.发射部1062-2-5. Transmitter 106

发射部106具有调度程序,比起事件发射开始时间、按规定时间比如提前5分钟,则使多路控制部110起动。并且,一旦成为事件发射开始时间,则在多路化部114输出的输送流中根据DVB-SI规格、MPEG2系统规格的要求、以使用规定了的PID确定的间隔使系统信息表生成部105生成了的NIT、PAT、PMT、SDT、EIT等的系统信息表重复多路,实施调制处理,向数据接收装置121等发射。The transmission unit 106 has a scheduler, and activates the multiplexing control unit 110 at a predetermined time, for example, 5 minutes earlier than the event transmission start time. Then, when the event transmission start time is reached, the system information table generation unit 105 generates the transport stream outputted by the multiplexing unit 114 at intervals determined using a predetermined PID in accordance with the requirements of the DVB-SI standard and the MPEG2 system standard. The system information tables of NIT, PAT, PMT, SDT, EIT, etc. are repeatedly multiplexed, subjected to modulation processing, and transmitted to the data receiving device 121 or the like.

图70表示使多路化了的输送流1801模式化。在多路化部114中多路化了的输送流1701中再使NITI1802、PAT1803、PMT1804、SDT1805、EIT1806多路化。FIG. 70 shows that the multiplexed transport stream 1801 is modeled. The NITI 1802 , PAT 1803 , PMT 1804 , SDT 1805 , and EIT 1806 are further multiplexed in the transport stream 1701 multiplexed in the multiplexing unit 114 .

2-2-6.数据发射装置101的工作2-2-6. Operation of the data transmitter 101

以下使用图71、72、73所示的流程说明本实施例的数据发射装置101的工作。The operation of the data transmitting device 101 of this embodiment will be described below using the flow charts shown in FIGS. 71 , 72 , and 73 .

首先,多路控制部110每逢目录号提供VE_id、NE_id,制成标识符分配表(S1902)。然后,制成显示图像信息标识符分配表801(S1904),指示在标识符信息附加部112上附加标识符信息、在导航信息表生成部113中制成导航信息表、在流对应信息表生成部111中生成流对应表。First, the multiplexing control unit 110 provides VE_id and NE_id for each directory number, and creates an identifier assignment table (S1902). Next, create the display image information identifier allocation table 801 (S1904), instruct to add identifier information to the identifier information adding unit 112, create a navigation information table in the navigation information table generating unit 113, and create a stream corresponding information table. The flow correspondence table is generated in the unit 111.

标识符信息附加部112在存储于展示信息存储部107中的图像数据的位流的专用区域上,附加存储图像数据标识符。一旦使有关所有的图像数据的标识符的附加结束,则向多路控制部110通知其宗旨(S1906)。The identifier information adding unit 112 adds and stores an image data identifier in a dedicated area of the bit stream of the image data stored in the presentation information storage unit 107 . Once the addition of the identifiers for all the image data is completed, the multiplexing control unit 110 is notified of its purpose (S1906).

导航信息表生成部113通过存储在导航信息存储部108中的导航信息制成导航信息表。一旦所有的导航信息表制作完,则向多路控制部110通知其宗旨(S1908)。The navigation information table creation unit 113 creates a navigation information table from the navigation information stored in the navigation information storage unit 108 . Once all the navigation information tables are created, the purpose is notified to the multiplex control unit 110 (S1908).

流对应信息表生成部111参照多路控制部110制成的显示图像信息标识符表801,生成流对应表。如果所有的流对应表生成结束,则向多路控制部110通知其宗旨(S1910)。The stream correspondence information table generation unit 111 refers to the display image information identifier table 801 created by the multiplexing control unit 110 to generate a stream correspondence table. When all the stream correspondence tables have been created, the multi-path control unit 110 is notified of its contents (S1910).

系统信息表生成部105生成NIT、SDT、EIT、PAT、PMT等各种系统信息表(S1912)。The system information table generating unit 105 generates various system information tables such as NIT, SDT, EIT, PAT, and PMT (S1912).

多路控制部110确定在输送流中使目录多路时的重复单位的目录数T(S1914)。用90000分之一秒单位计算目录数T的1周长度L(用使所有的目录和目录M-T个大小的零分组存储在多路重储部104中的位速率作多路时的输送流长度)(S1916)。多路控制部110向多路化部114通知PCR_PID多路,指示PCR的多路化(S1918)。接着给目录计数器i和多路开始位置WP都设定“0”(S2002)。The multiplexing control unit 110 determines the number T of directories in repetition units when the directories are multiplexed in the transport stream (S1914). Use the unit of 90000th of a second to calculate the length L of one cycle of the directory number T (use the bit rate to store all directories and zero packets of the size of M-T in the multiplexing re-storage section 104 as the length of the transport stream when multiplexing ) (S1916). The multiplexing control unit 110 notifies the multiplexing unit 114 of PCR_PID multiplexing and instructs multiplexing of PCRs (S1918). Next, "0" is set to both the directory counter i and the multiplexing start position WP (S2002).

然后,多路控制部110给VET计数器设定“0”(S2004)。求周次数C和目录号N。C为{i+(p×s)-1-j}÷T之商(整数部分),N为其余料(整数)(S2006)。Then, the multiplexing control unit 110 sets "0" to the VET counter (S2004). Find the cycle number C and the catalog number N. C is the quotient of {i+(p×s)-1-j}÷T (integer part), and N is the remaining material (integer) (S2006).

接着多路控制部110判断在流对应信息表生成部111的存储区域上是否存储流对应表VET(N)(S2008),存储着时在VET(N)的first_pts、last_pts上加CXL(S2010)。Next, the multiplexing control unit 110 judges whether the flow correspondence table VET(N) is stored in the storage area of the flow correspondence information table generation unit 111 (S2008), and if stored, adds CXL to first_pts and last_pts of the VET(N) (S2010) .

多路控制部110向多路化部114指示在输送流中使流对应表VET(N)多路化,通知多路开始位置WP、位速率B、PID、table_id_extension(S2012)转移到S2014。The multiplexing control unit 110 instructs the multiplexing unit 114 to multiplex the stream correspondence table VET(N) in the transport stream, and notifies the multiplexing start position WP, bit rate B, PID, and table_id_extension (S2012) and proceeds to S2014.

在S2008中,多路控制部110当判断设有存储流对应表的VET(N)时,向多路化部114指示使和S_VET同样大小的零分组多路。同时通知多路开始位置WP和位速率B。多路化部114在输送流中使零分组多路(S2018)、移至S2014。In S2008, when the multiplexing control unit 110 determines that a VET (N) having a stored flow correspondence table is provided, it instructs the multiplexing unit 114 to multiplex a zero packet having the same size as the S_VET. The multiplexing start position WP and the bit rate B are simultaneously notified. The multiplexing unit 114 multiplexes the zero packets in the transport stream (S2018), and proceeds to S2014.

在S2014,多重控制部110计算WP=WP+{S-VET/B},在VET计数器;值上加“1”(S2015),使VET计数器j值和流对应表VET(N)的重复多路次数R值作比较(S2016)。当j=R时,移至S2102,当j<R时返回S2006。In S2014, the multiple control unit 110 calculates WP=WP+{S-VET/B}, and adds "1" to the VET counter; The number of times R value is compared (S2016). When j=R, move to S2102, and when j<R, return to S2006.

在S2102中多路控制部110设周次数c为i/T的商(整数部分),设目录号N为i/T的余数(整数)。再参照结构信息存储部109的目录标识符分配表判断目录号N的目录是否存在(S2104),若存在时,则向多路化部114指示图像数据VE(N)的位流多路。这时,计算位速率BV(N),把BV(N)连同在显示图像信息标识符分配表801上记录的“PID”、“Stream_id”之值一起通知给多路化部114。多路化部114在输送流中使图像数据VE(N)多路(S2106)。In S2102, the multiplex control unit 110 sets the number of cycles c to be the quotient (integer part) of i/T, and sets the catalog number N to be the remainder (integer) of i/T. Referring to the directory identifier allocation table of the structure information storage unit 109, it is judged whether the directory number N exists (S2104), and if it exists, the multiplexing unit 114 is instructed to multiplex the bit stream of the image data VE(N). At this time, the bit rate BV(N) is calculated, and the multiplexer 114 is notified of BV(N) together with the values of "PID" and "Stream_id" recorded in the display image information identifier allocation table 801 . The multiplexing unit 114 multiplexes the image data VE(N) into the transport stream (S2106).

然后多路控制部110向多路化部114指示导航信息表NVT(N)的多路。这时,计算位速率Bn(N),把Bn(N)连同多路开始位置Wp、PID、table_id_extension一起向多路化部114通知。多路化部114在输送流中使导航信息表NVT(N)多路(S2108)。Then, the multiplexing control unit 110 instructs the multiplexing unit 114 to multiplex the navigation information table NVT(N). At this time, the bit rate Bn(N) is calculated, and Bn(N) is notified to the multiplexing unit 114 together with the multiplexing start position Wp, PID, and table_id_extension. The multiplexing unit 114 multiplexes the navigation information table NVT(N) in the transport stream (S2108).

多路控制部110计算多路开始位置WP。The multiplexing control unit 110 calculates the multiplexing start position WP.

WP=WP+{S_VE(N)+S_NVT(N)}/B(S2110)。在目录计数器i上加“1”(S2112),返回S2004。WP=WP+{S_VE(N)+S_NVT(N)}/B (S2110). Add "1" to the directory counter i (S2112), and return to S2004.

在S2104中,当判定为没有时,多路控制部110连同多路开始位置WP、位速率B一起指示S_VE(O)+S_NVT(O)大小的零分组多路。多路化部114在输送流中使指示了的量的零分组多路(S2114)。In S2104, when it is determined that there is no multiplex, the multiplex control unit 110 instructs the multiplex of zero packets of the size S_VE(O)+S_NVT(O) together with the multiplex start position WP and the bit rate B. The multiplexing unit 114 multiplexes the indicated amount of zero packets in the transport stream ( S2114 ).

多路控制部110用WP=WP+{S_VE(O)+S_NVT(O)}/B求多路开始位置WP(S2116),并移至S2112。The multiplex control unit 110 obtains the multiplex start position WP by using WP=WP+{S_VE(O)+S_NVT(O)}/B (S2116), and proceeds to S2112.

根据上述动作,比如作流对应表VET(N)的重复设多路次数R为“1”时,在如图64所示的多路化流中,当设R为“6”时,在如图65所示的多路化流中,发射使NIT、RAT等多路化的图70所示的输送流。According to the above operation, for example, when the number of multiplexing R is set to "1" for the repetition of the stream correspondence table VET(N), in the multiplexed stream as shown in FIG. 64, when R is set to "6", the In the multiplexed stream shown in FIG. 65 , the transport stream shown in FIG. 70 in which the NIT, RAT, etc. are multiplexed is transmitted.

2-2-7.总括2-2-7. Summary

如上所述,本实施例的数据发射装置101分配标识符在输送流中,使构成各目录的图像数据及导航信息多路重复发射。As described above, the data transmission device 101 of this embodiment assigns identifiers to the transport stream, and multiplexes and repeatedly transmits image data and navigation information constituting each content.

在导航信息中包括作高连接的目录图像数据的标识符和导航信息标识符、用于显示菜单等的辅助图像信息、和用于图像切换等的原本。因此,数据接收装置121根据导航信息,从输送流中指定标识符,可取出重放任意目录,可以单向信道实现对话。The navigation information includes the identifier of the catalog image data and the navigation information identifier that are highly linked, auxiliary image information for displaying menus, etc., and scripts for image switching and the like. Therefore, the data receiving device 121 can fetch and replay any content by designating an identifier from the transport stream based on the navigation information, and realize dialogue through a one-way channel.

2-2-8.其他2-2-8. Others

2-2-8-1.2-2-8-1.

此外,在本实施例中,虽然描述了有关图像数据的静止图像的情况,但图像数据也可以是活动图像。图像数据为活动图像数据情况下,使式(1)的“first_pts”、“last_pts”的计算式、式(2)的流长度L计算式、分配给式(3)的图像数据VE(N)的位速率BV(N)的计算式、分配给式(4)的导航信息表NVT(N)的位速率Bn(N)的计算式,以及在多路控制部110中使图像数据VE(N)、导航信息表NVT(N)多路化之后再计算多路开始位置WP的式子,例如可实现作如下变更。Furthermore, in the present embodiment, although the case of a still image of the image data is described, the image data may also be a moving image. When the image data is moving image data, the calculation formula of "first_pts" and "last_pts" in the formula (1), the calculation formula of the stream length L in the formula (2), and the image data VE(N) assigned to the formula (3) The calculation formula of the bit rate BV(N), the calculation formula of the bit rate Bn(N) of the navigation information table NVT(N) assigned to the formula (4), and the image data VE(N) in the multiplexing control section 110 ) and the navigation information table NVT(N) are multiplexed and then the formula for calculating the multiplex start position WP can be changed as follows, for example.

在活动图像情况下,分配给图像数据VE(N)的位速率BV(N )以视频基本流予先确定了的位速率为基准,估计决定在输送流中变换时增加部分。把从所有位速率B减去分配给图像数据VE(N)的位速率BV(N)的剩余部分分配给导航信息表NVT(N)。In the case of moving images, the bit rate BV(N) assigned to the image data VE(N) is based on the predetermined bit rate of the video elementary stream, and is estimated to be increased during conversion in the transport stream. The remainder of subtracting the bit rate BV(N) allocated to the image data VE(N) from all the bit rates B is allocated to the navigation information table NVT(N).

这时根据式(5)可计算图像数据VE(N)的“first_pts”值。At this time, the "first_pts" value of the image data VE(N) can be calculated according to formula (5).

firstfirst __ ptspts (( NN )) ,,

== [[ &Sigma;&Sigma; xx == 00 NN -- 11 {{ MAXMAX (( SS __ VEVE (( xx )) // BvBv (( xx )) ,, SS __ NENE (( xx )) // (( BB -- BvBv (( xx )) )) ++ (( SS __ VETVET ** RR // BB )) }}

++ SS __ VEVE __ FIRSTFIRST (( NN )) // BvBv (( xx )) ++ (( SS __ VETVET ** RR // BB )) }} ]] ** 9000090000 .. .. .. .. .. .. (( 55 ))

但是,BV(x)表示分配给图像数据VE(x)的位速率;S_VE_FIRST(x)表示根据以图像数据VE(x)最初帧为MPEG2系统标准,在输送流中变换时的大小;MAX{A,B}表示A和B中大的值。However, BV(x) represents the bit rate assigned to the image data VE(x); S_VE_FIRST(x) represents the size when converted in the transport stream according to the MPEG2 system standard with the image data VE(x) as the first frame; MAX{ A, B} represents the larger value of A and B.

在活动图像情况下,“last_pts”与“first_pts”不一致,例如可用式(6)求得。In the case of a moving image, "last_pts" and "first_pts" do not match, and can be obtained, for example, using Equation (6).

last_pts(N)=first_pts(N)+{(N_FRAME(x)/Frame_per_sec)*90000}......(6)last_pts(N)=first_pts(N)+{(N_FRAME(x)/Frame_per_sec)*90000}...(6)

但是,N-FRAME(x)表示活动图像数据VE(x)的帧数;FRAME_PER_SEC表示1秒的帧数(例如若为NTSC方式,则为29.97)。However, N-FRAME(x) represents the number of frames of moving image data VE(x), and FRAME_PER_SEC represents the number of frames per second (for example, 29.97 in NTSC format).

这时,活动图像情况下多路控制部110在把VE(x)和NE(x)的多路指示给多路化部114之后,根据式(7)更新WP。In this case, in the case of a moving image, the multiplexing control unit 110 instructs the multiplexing of VE(x) and NE(x) to the multiplexing unit 114, and then updates WP according to equation (7).

wp=wp+MAX(S_VE(x)/Bv(x)S_NE(x)/(B-Bv(x)))......(7)wp=wp+MAX(S_VE(x)/Bv(x)S_NE(x)/(B-Bv(x)))...(7)

2-2-8-2.2-2-8-2.

此外,在该数据发射装置101中,利用多路化部114构成在事件发射时间依次生成输送流1701,但是多路化部114生成存储只是1个周期长度L的输送流,发射部106向数据接收装置121发射时,重复读出该输送流,也可作一定处理重复发射。In addition, in the data transmission device 101, the multiplexing unit 114 is configured to sequentially generate the transport stream 1701 at the time of event transmission, but the multiplexing unit 114 generates and stores a transport stream with a length L of only one cycle, and the transmitting unit 106 sends data to When the receiving device 121 transmits, it repeatedly reads the transport stream, and can also do certain processing to repeat the transmission.

2-2-8-3.2-2-8-3.

此外,在本实施例中,在同样的时间使对应的图像数据和导航信息表多路,但不必设定同样的时间。由于导航信息表和与此对应的图像数据如上所述,要能分别分离成单个,所以也可在各单个时间里多路。Also, in this embodiment, corresponding image data and navigation information tables are multiplexed at the same time, but it is not necessary to set the same time. Since the navigation information table and the image data corresponding thereto need to be separated into individual pieces as described above, they may be multiplexed at each individual time.

2-3.数据接收装置1212-3. Data receiving device 121

数据接收装置121用图49予以说明,从由数据发射装置101发射的MPEG2输送流中根据用户操作,对话性取出重放目录。The data receiving unit 121, which will be described with reference to FIG. 49, interactively retrieves the playback list from the MPEG2 transport stream transmitted by the data transmitting unit 101 according to user operations.

2-3-1.接收部1222-3-1. Receiving unit 122

接收部122接收对应于由接收控制部126指定的输送流标识符的MPEG2输送流,向TS译码器部123输出。The reception unit 122 receives the MPEG2 transport stream corresponding to the transport stream identifier designated by the reception control unit 126 and outputs it to the TS decoder unit 123 .

2-3-2.TS译码器部1232-3-2. TS decoder unit 123

TS译码器部123具有存储由接收控制部126设定的滤波条件的滤波条件存储部131,根据该滤波条件,从由接收部122输出的输送流中仅分离有指定了的标识符的图像数据或声音数据,向AV译码部124输出。并且分离有指定了的标识符的表数据,根据标识符向在接收数据存储部125中保障了的区域输出。并分离指定了的标识符PCR(基准时钟信息),向AV译码器部124输出。并且在滤波条件存储部131中可同时存储多个滤波条件。TS译码器部123可与多个分离处理平行进行。The TS decoder unit 123 has a filter condition storage unit 131 that stores a filter condition set by the reception control unit 126, and separates only images with specified identifiers from the transport stream output from the reception unit 122 based on the filter conditions. Data or audio data is output to the AV decoding unit 124 . Then, the table data with the designated identifier is separated, and output to the area secured in the received data storage unit 125 according to the identifier. And the specified identifier PCR (reference clock information) is separated and output to the AV decoder unit 124 . In addition, a plurality of filter conditions may be stored in the filter condition storage unit 131 at the same time. The TS decoder unit 123 can perform a plurality of separation processes in parallel.

图74A、图74B是表示存储在滤波条件存储部131中的滤波条件表之一例。滤波条件表2201的各行表示1个滤波条件。在“滤波识别号”栏2202上记载着识别各滤波条件的号。“START/STOP”栏2203上,当各滤波条件为开始状态情况下设定“START”,停止状态下设定“Stop”。TS译码器部123依据开始状态的滤波条件作分离处理,根据停止状态的滤波条件不作分离。在“PID”栏2204上设定以各滤波条件分离的数据PID之值。在“Stream_id”栏2205上设定以各滤波条件分离的数据的Stream_id之值。在“table_id_extension”栏2206上设定以各滤波条件分离的数据的table_id_extensi-on之值。当在“PID”栏2201、“Stream_id”栏2205、“table_id_extension”栏2206上设定为“-”值情况下,无条件,即其标识符之值在任意数情况下都表示分离。在“输出端”栏2207上设定输出分离的数据的输出端。74A and 74B show an example of a filter condition table stored in the filter condition storage unit 131 . Each row of the filter condition table 2201 represents one filter condition. In the "filter identification number" column 2202, a number for identifying each filter condition is described. In the "START/STOP" column 2203, "START" is set when each filter condition is in the start state, and "Stop" is set in the stop state. The TS decoder unit 123 performs separation processing according to the filter condition in the start state, and does not perform separation according to the filter condition in the stop state. In the "PID" column 2204, the value of the data PID separated by each filter condition is set. In the "Stream_id" column 2205, the value of Stream_id of the data separated by each filter condition is set. In the "table_id_extension" column 2206, the value of table_id_extension of the data separated by each filter condition is set. When the "-" value is set in the "PID" column 2201, "Stream_id" column 2205, and "table_id_extension" column 2206, there is no condition, that is, the value of the identifier indicates separation in any number of cases. In the "Output" column 2207, an output to output the separated data is set.

对应于滤波条件表2201的滤波识别号“0”的行,表示图像数据滤波条件。在“输出端”栏2207上设定AV译码器部124,“table_id_extension”2206不能设定。在“PID”2204和“Stream_id”2205上利用接收控制部126设定应分离的图像数据PID、Stream_id之值。相应于滤波识别号“1”的行表示声音数据的滤波条件。在“输出端”栏2207上设定AV译码器部124,在“table_id_extension”栏2206上不能设定值。在“PID”栏2204和“Stream_id”栏2205上根据接收控制部126设定应分离的声音数据的PID、Stream_id值。The row corresponding to the filter identification number "0" of the filter condition table 2201 indicates the image data filter condition. The AV decoder unit 124 is set in the "output terminal" column 2207, and the "table_id_extension" 2206 cannot be set. In the "PID" 2204 and "Stream_id" 2205, the reception control unit 126 sets the values of the image data PID and Stream_id to be separated. The row corresponding to the filter identification number "1" indicates the filter condition of the sound data. The AV decoder unit 124 is set in the "output terminal" column 2207, and no value can be set in the "table_id_extension" column 2206. In the "PID" column 2204 and the "Stream_id" column 2205, the PID and Stream_id values of the audio data to be separated are set by the reception control unit 126 .

对应滤波识别号“2”的行表示流对应表VET的滤波条件。在“输出端”2207上设定流对应信息表存储部132,在“stream_id”栏2205不能设定值。在“PID”栏2204、“table_id_extension”2206上利用接收控制部126设定应分离的流对应表的PID和table_id_extension之值。The row corresponding to the filter identification number "2" indicates the filter condition of the stream correspondence table VET. The stream correspondence information table storage unit 132 is set in the "output terminal" 2207, and a value cannot be set in the column 2205 of "stream_id". In the "PID" column 2204 and "table_id_extension" 2206, the reception control unit 126 sets the value of the PID and table_id_extension of the stream correspondence table to be separated.

对应于滤波识别号“3”的行表示导航信息表的滤波条件。在“输出端”栏2207上设定导航信息表存储部133,在“Stream_id”栏220上不能设定值。在“PID”栏2204和“table_id_extension”栏2206上利用接收装置设定应分离的导航信息表的PID和table_id_extension之值。The row corresponding to the filter identification number "3" indicates the filter condition of the navigation information table. The navigation information table storage unit 133 is set in the “output terminal” column 2207 , and no value can be set in the “Stream_id” column 220 . In the "PID" column 2204 and the "table_id_extension" column 2206, the values of the PID and table_id_extension of the navigation information table to be separated are set by the receiving device.

并且,在各滤波条件“START/STOP”栏2203上利用接收控制部126设定“START”或“STOP”,把TS译码器部123的分离处理设定为开始状态或停止状态。Then, "START" or "STOP" is set in each filter condition "START/STOP" column 2203 by the reception control unit 126, and the separation process of the TS decoder unit 123 is set to start or stop.

而且,滤波条件存储部131除这些以外还存储NIT、SDT、EIT、PAT、PMT等的系统信息表和用于PCR(基准时钟信息)的未图示的滤波条件。In addition, the filter condition storage unit 131 stores system information tables such as NIT, SDT, EIT, PAT, and PMT, and unillustrated filter conditions for PCR (reference clock information) in addition to these.

在滤波条件表2201中,对应于滤波识别号“0”的图像数据的滤波条件,以及对应于滤波识别号“1”的声音数据的滤波条件利用接收控制部126设定为停止状态,这时,TS译码部123不分离图像数据及声音数据。In the filter condition table 2201, the filter condition corresponding to the image data of the filter identification number "0" and the filter condition of the sound data corresponding to the filter identification number "1" are set to a stop state by the receiving control section 126, at this time , the TS decoding unit 123 does not separate image data and audio data.

而且,在滤波条件表2201中,对应于滤波识别号“2”的流对应表VET的滤波条件利用接收控制部126,“PIQ”值设定为“0X0083”,“table_id_extension”值设定为“0X0005”,START/STOP栏2203设定成开始状态。这时,TS译码器部123从由发射部106发射的图70中所示的输送流1801中分离根据设定了的滤波条件的流对应表VET(5),存储在流对应信息表存储部132中,通知给接收控制部126。VET(5)的目录如图63A所示。Furthermore, in the filter condition table 2201, the filter condition of the flow correspondence table VET corresponding to the filter identification number "2" is used by the reception control unit 126, the value of "PIQ" is set to "0X0083", and the value of "table_id_extension" is set to " 0X0005", the START/STOP column 2203 is set to the start state. At this time, the TS decoder unit 123 separates the stream correspondence table VET(5) according to the set filter condition from the transport stream 1801 shown in FIG. 70 transmitted by the transmission unit 106, and stores it in the stream correspondence information table The receiving control unit 126 is notified by the receiving control unit 132. The catalog of VET(5) is shown in Fig. 63A.

在滤波条件表2201中,对应于滤波识别号“3”的导航信息表NVT的滤波条件,由接收控制部126把“PID”值设定为“0X0084”,把“table_id_extension”值设定为“0X0005”,START/STOP栏2203被设定为开始状态。In the filter condition table 2201, the filter condition of the navigation information table NVT corresponding to the filter identification number "3", the value of "PID" is set to "0X0084" by the reception control unit 126, and the value of "table_id_extension" is set to " 0X0005", the START/STOP column 2203 is set as the start state.

这时TS译码器部123从由发射部106发射的图70所示的输送流S01中分离根据设定了的滤波条件的导航信息表NVT(5),存储在导航信息表存储部133中,通知给接收控制部126。导航信息表NVT(5)的目录如图61所示。At this time, the TS decoder unit 123 separates the navigation information table NVT(5) according to the set filter condition from the transport stream S01 shown in FIG. , and notify the reception control unit 126. The content of the navigation information table NVT(5) is as shown in FIG. 61 .

而且,在滤波条件2208中,对应于滤波识别号“0”的图像数据的滤波条件,由接收控制部126把“PID”设定为“0X0084”,把“Stream_id”设定为“0Xe5”,设定成开始状态。这时,TS译码器部123从由发射部106发射的图20中所示的输送流2801中,依次按接收顺序分离根据设定的滤波条件的图像数据VE(5)、图像数据VE(21)、图像数据VE(37)、及图像数据VE(53),向AV译码器部124输出。在4个图像数据内,最初分离哪个图像取决于将该滤波条件设定为开始状态的定时。并且,接收控制部126根据以适当地定时将该滤波条件设定为停止状态,在4个图像数据内分离仅是最初的一个,要向AV译码器部124输出。Furthermore, in the filter condition 2208, the reception control unit 126 sets the "PID" to "0X0084" and the "Stream_id" to "0Xe5" corresponding to the filter condition of the image data with the filter identification number "0", Set to start state. At this time, the TS decoder section 123 sequentially separates the image data VE(5), image data VE( 21), the image data VE(37), and the image data VE(53) are output to the AV decoder unit 124. Among the four image data, which image to separate first depends on the timing at which the filter condition is set to the start state. Then, the reception control unit 126 separates only the first one of the four image data by setting the filter condition to a stop state at an appropriate timing, and outputs it to the AV decoder unit 124 .

2-3-3.AV译码器部1242-3-3. AV decoder unit 124

AV译码器部124具有未图示的时钟部。利用由TS译码器部123输出的PCR(基准时钟信息)值将该时钟部设定成正确的基准时间,对成为基准的时间计数,所述基准用于采取正确同步使图像数据、声音数据译码。The AV decoder unit 124 has a clock unit not shown. Using the PCR (reference clock information) value output from the TS decoder section 123, the clock section is set to a correct reference time, and the time that becomes the reference is counted, and the reference is used to accurately synchronize image data, audio data decoding.

并且AV译码器部124一旦接受自TS译码器部123输出的图像数据或声音数据两者,则首先根据接收控制部126的指示,读出写入专用区域的图像数据、声音数据的标识符,通知到接收控制部126。接着根据接收控制部126指示,每逢译码单位使图像数据、声音数据译码,利用时钟部一边取得同步一边向重放部128输出,同时向接收控制部126通知译码结束。In addition, once the AV decoder unit 124 receives both the image data and the audio data output from the TS decoder unit 123, it first reads out the identification of the image data and audio data written in the dedicated area according to the instruction of the reception control unit 126. character, and notify the reception control unit 126. Next, according to the instructions of the reception control unit 126, the image data and audio data are decoded every decoding unit, and are output to the playback unit 128 while being synchronized by the clock unit, and at the same time, the reception control unit 126 is notified of the completion of decoding.

2-3-4.接收数据存储部125结构2-3-4. Structure of received data storage unit 125

接收数据存储部125比如由RAM等构成,备有流对应信息表不存储部132、和导航信息表存储部133、和系统信息表存储部134。The received data storage unit 125 is constituted by, for example, RAM, and includes a stream correspondence information table storage unit 132 , a navigation information table storage unit 133 , and a system information table storage unit 134 .

流对应信息表存储部132存储在TS译码部132分离的流对应表。导航信息表存储部133存储在TS译码器部123分离了的导航信息表。系统信息表存储部134存储在TS译码器部123分离了的NIT、SDT、EIT、PAT、PMT等系统信息表。The stream correspondence information table storage unit 132 stores the stream correspondence table separated by the TS decoding unit 132 . The navigation information table storage unit 133 stores the navigation information table separated by the TS decoder unit 123 . The system information table storage unit 134 stores system information tables such as NIT, SDT, EIT, PAT, and PMT separated by the TS decoder unit 123 .

2-3-5.信号接收部1272-3-5. Signal receiving unit 127

信号接收部127接收用户遥控操作等,向接受控制部126通知。The signal receiving unit 127 receives a user's remote control operation and the like, and notifies the acceptance control unit 126 .

2-3-6.重放部1282-3-6. Replay section 128

重放部128根据来自接收控制部126的指示,在由AV译码器部124译了码的图像数据上迭加在从接收控制都126输出的导航信息表中包括的图形信息,向显示部129输出,向声音输出部130输出由AV译码器部124译了码的声音数据。The playback unit 128 superimposes the graphic information included in the navigation information table output from the reception control unit 126 on the image data decoded by the AV decoder unit 124 according to an instruction from the reception control unit 126, and presents the graphics information to the display unit. 129 to output the audio data decoded by the AV decoder unit 124 to the audio output unit 130 .

2-3-7.显示部1292-3-7. Display unit 129

显示部129通过CRT和液晶显示器等实现,显示由重放部128输出的图像。显示图49所示的目录151、152、153等。The display unit 129 is realized by a CRT, a liquid crystal display, or the like, and displays an image output from the playback unit 128 . Lists 151, 152, 153, etc. shown in Fig. 49 are displayed.

2-3-8.声音输出部1302-3-8. Sound output unit 130

声音输出部130由扬声器等实现,输出从重放部128输出的声音。The audio output unit 130 is realized by a speaker or the like, and outputs the audio output from the playback unit 128 .

2-3-9.接收控制部1262-3-9. Reception control unit 126

接收控制部126控制接收部122,接收所要求的输送流。并且如果通过信号接收部127接受用户的操作信号,则参照在当前存储在导航信息表存储部133的导航信息表,在TS译码器部123的滤波条件存储器131中设定接着应分离的导航信息表的滤波条件和用于取得图像数据的流对应表的滤波条件。在TS译码器部123中分离,参照存储在流对应信息表存储部132中的流对应表,在滤波条件存储部131中设定图像数据的滤波条件。The reception control unit 126 controls the reception unit 122 to receive the requested transport stream. And if the user's operation signal is accepted by the signal receiving section 127, then refer to the navigation information table currently stored in the navigation information table storage section 133, and set the navigation information to be separated next in the filter condition memory 131 of the TS decoder section 123. The filter conditions of the information table and the filter conditions of the stream correspondence table for acquiring image data. Separated in the TS decoder unit 123 , the filter condition of the image data is set in the filter condition storage unit 131 by referring to the stream correspondence table stored in the stream correspondence information table storage unit 132 .

接收控制部126参照在图像数据专用区域中写入的图像数据标识符,判定由TS译码器部123分离的图像数据是否为适当的图像数据。当为适当的图像数据时,在AV译码器部124中译码,向重放部128输出。当不是适当的图像数据时,变更滤波条件存储部131的条件,再指示分离流对应表。The reception control unit 126 refers to the image data identifier written in the image data dedicated area, and judges whether or not the image data separated by the TS decoder unit 123 is appropriate image data. When it is appropriate image data, it is decoded by the AV decoder unit 124 and output to the playback unit 128 . If it is not suitable image data, the condition of the filter condition storage unit 131 is changed, and the separated stream correspondence table is instructed again.

并且,读出由TS译码器部123分离了的导航信息表中包括的目标的位标志数据,通知到重放部128,在图像数据上重叠显示。Then, the bit flag data of the destination included in the navigation information table separated by the TS decoder unit 123 is read out, notified to the playback unit 128, and displayed superimposed on the image data.

2-3-9-1初期控制2-3-9-1 Initial Control

接收控制部126由CPU和由对此控制的程序构成,由使用者在最初选择使发射数据多路的事件时,其中所述发射数据存储在数据发射装置101的发射部106发射的输送流中的发射数据存储部102中,首先根据由在普通卫星数字广播接收装置中使用着的MPEG2系统规格及DVB-SI规格确定的程序,参照系统信息表,给接收部122指示发射部106发射的输送流接收,向TS译码器部123指示对应于选择了的事件的PMT的分离。The reception control unit 126 is composed of a CPU and a program for controlling it. When the user initially selects an event to multiplex transmission data stored in the transport stream transmitted by the transmission unit 106 of the data transmission device 101 In the transmission data storage unit 102, first, refer to the system information table according to the program determined by the MPEG2 system standard and DVB-SI standard used in the ordinary satellite digital broadcasting receiving device, and instruct the receiving unit 122 to transmit the data transmitted by the transmitting unit 106. Stream reception instructs the TS decoder unit 123 to separate the PMT corresponding to the selected event.

然后,接收控制部126参照记录在系统信息表存储部134上的PMT,取得PCR标识符,设定在滤波条件存储部131中。进一步,接收控制部126取得进入目录图像数据和导航信息的标识符,对滤波条件存储部131的流对应表的滤波条件和导航信息表的滤波条件分别设定。Then, the reception control unit 126 refers to the PMT recorded in the system information table storage unit 134 to obtain a PCR identifier, and sets it in the filter condition storage unit 131 . Furthermore, the reception control unit 126 acquires the entry list image data and the identifier of the navigation information, and sets the filter conditions of the stream correspondence table and the filter conditions of the navigation information table in the filter condition storage unit 131 respectively.

进而,接收控制部126参照系统信息表存储部134中的PMT,取得输送流对应表的部分和输送导航信息的部分的PID值,对滤波条件存储部131的流对应表的滤波条件和导航信息表的滤波条件分别作设定,把这些滤波条件设定成开始状态。Furthermore, the reception control unit 126 refers to the PMT in the system information table storage unit 134, obtains the PID value of the part of the transport flow correspondence table and the part of the transport navigation information, and applies the filter condition and navigation information of the stream correspondence table of the filter condition storage unit 131 The filter conditions of the table are set separately, and these filter conditions are set to the start state.

接收控制部126利用译码器部123一旦接受流对应表分离通知,则设定滤波条件存储部131流对应表的滤波条件为停止状态。接着接收控制部126参照流对应信息表存储部132中的流对应表,读出图像数据的“stream_id”之值,设定滤波条件存储部131图像数据滤波条件。然后参照流对应信息表存储部132中的流对应表,读出“component_tag”之值,再取得对应于参照系统信息表存储部134中PMT读出的“component_tag”之值的PID值,设定滤波条件存储部131的图像数据的滤波条件,将该滤波条件设定为开始状态。The reception control unit 126 sets the filter condition of the stream correspondence table in the filter condition storage unit 131 to a stop state upon receiving the stream correspondence table separation notification by the decoder unit 123 . Next, the reception control unit 126 refers to the stream correspondence table in the stream correspondence information table storage unit 132 , reads out the value of “stream_id” of the image data, and sets the image data filter condition in the filter condition storage unit 131 . Then refer to the stream correspondence table in the stream correspondence information table storage unit 132, read the value of “component_tag”, and then obtain the PID value corresponding to the value of “component_tag” read by referring to the PMT in the system information table storage unit 134, and set As for the filter condition of the image data in the filter condition storage unit 131 , the filter condition is set to start.

2-3-9-2.判断图像数据是否适当2-3-9-2. Judging whether the image data is appropriate

此外,数据发射装置101虽然有时向多个不同的图像数据提供同样值PID、Stream_id进行发射,但在对应于某图像数据的流对应表发射之后进行发射,使得一定时间之后其图像数据比具有同样值的PID、Stream_id的其他图像数据还要先出现。因此,在接收控制部126接收流对应表之后,如若在一定时间以内完成图像数据的滤波条件设定,则TS译码器部123无误地分离所要求的图像数据,可向AV译码器部124输出。In addition, although the data transmitting device 101 sometimes provides multiple different image data with the same value PID and Stream_id for transmission, it transmits after the stream correspondence table corresponding to a certain image data is transmitted, so that after a certain period of time, the image data has the same value than the other image data. The PID of the value and other image data of the Stream_id must appear first. Therefore, after the reception control section 126 receives the stream correspondence table, if the filter condition setting of the image data is completed within a certain period of time, the TS decoder section 123 can separate the required image data without error, and can send the required image data to the AV decoder section. 124 outputs.

接着接收控制部126通过AV译码器部124,取得记述在由TS译码器部123输出的图像数据的专用区域上的图像数据标识符,检查与现在要取得的图像数据的识别是否一致。根据一致情况,把滤波条件存储部131的图像数据的滤波条件设定为停止状态,在流对应表的滤波条件中,设定传输流对应表的部分的PID和现在要取得的图像数据的标识符,设流对应表的滤波条件为开始状态。此外,流对应表标识符“table_id_extension”值与图像数据标识符“VE_id”之值一致。以此,由于某些原因,即使接收控制部126参照流对应表,在设定图像数据的滤波条件的处理中发生延迟情况下,也能防止显示错误的其他图像。Next, the reception control unit 126 acquires the image data identifier described in the dedicated area of the image data output from the TS decoder unit 123 through the AV decoder unit 124, and checks whether it matches the identification of the image data to be acquired now. According to the coincidence situation, the filter condition of the image data in the filter condition storage unit 131 is set to the stop state, and in the filter condition of the stream correspondence table, the PID of the part of the transport stream correspondence table and the identification of the image data to be obtained now are set character, set the filter condition of the flow correspondence table as the start state. Also, the value of the stream correspondence table identifier "table_id_extension" matches the value of the video data identifier "VE_id". Thus, even if the reception control unit 126 refers to the stream correspondence table and a delay occurs in the process of setting the filter condition of the image data for some reason, it is possible to prevent another wrong image from being displayed.

接收控制部126当在由TS译码器部123输出的图像数据专用区域上记述的标识符之值,与现在要取得的图像数据标识符之值一致情况下,参照流对应信息表存储部132中流对应表,读入“first_pts”之值。然后,参照AV译码器部124的时钟部,在读入的“first_pts”值时间之前,检验从AV译码器部124帧译码结束的通知是否过来。当译码结束通知没有时,把滤波条件存储部131图像数据的滤波条件设定为停止状态,在流对应表滤波条件中,再设定传输流对应表的部分PID和现在要取得的图像数据的标识符,把流对应表的滤波条件设成开始状态。The reception control unit 126 refers to the stream correspondence information table storage unit 132 when the value of the identifier described in the image data dedicated area output from the TS decoder unit 123 matches the value of the image data identifier to be acquired now. The mid-stream correspondence table reads the value of "first_pts". Then, referring to the clock unit of the AV decoder unit 124, it is checked whether or not the frame decoding completion notification from the AV decoder unit 124 has come before the read “first_pts” value time. When there is no decoding end notification, the filter condition of the image data in the filter condition storage unit 131 is set to a stop state, and in the filter condition of the stream correspondence table, the partial PID of the transport stream correspondence table and the image data to be acquired now are set again The identifier of the stream correspondence table is set to the start state of the filter condition.

以此,因某些原因,即便接收控制部126参照流对应表在设定图像数据的滤波条件的处理中发生的迟误情况下,也能防止最初图像数据被断开,从中间重放。Thus, even if the reception control unit 126 delays in setting the filter conditions of the image data by referring to the stream correspondence table for some reason, it is possible to prevent the first image data from being disconnected and played back from the middle.

从AV译码器部124过来帧译码结束的通知时,接收控制部126参照流对应信息表存储部132中的流对应表,读入“last_pts”之值。然后,参照AV译码器部124的时钟部,一旦成为读入的“last_Pts”值时间,则把滤波条件存储部131图像数据的滤波条件设定为停止状态。借此,仅分离所要求的图像数据,向AV译码器部124输出。从而,往往不分离具有同样的PID和Stream_id的其他图像数据。When a frame decoding completion notice is received from the AV decoder unit 124, the reception control unit 126 refers to the stream correspondence table in the stream correspondence information table storage unit 132, and reads the value of "last_pts". Then, referring to the clock section of the AV decoder section 124, when the read "last_Pts" value time is reached, the filter condition of the image data in the filter condition storage section 131 is set to stop. In this way, only required image data is separated and output to the AV decoder unit 124 . Therefore, other image data having the same PID and Stream_id are often not separated.

2-3-9-3.图形信息的生成2-3-9-3. Generation of graphic information

还有接收控制部126一旦从TS译码器部123接受导航信息表分离通知,则把滤波条件存储部131的导航信息表的滤波条件设定为停止状态。接着,接收控制部126参照导航信息表存储部133中的导航信息表中的目标定义,取得键目标的显示座标“X”、“Y”,接着检索值对于“0”键取得“Focused Bitmap”索引值,对于那以外的键,取得“Normal Bitmap”索引值,参照位标志表,取得对应于索引值的位标志数据,与此同时,生成图形信息向重放部128输出。Furthermore, when receiving the navigation information table separation notification from the TS decoder unit 123, the reception control unit 126 sets the filter condition of the navigation information table in the filter condition storage unit 131 to a stop state. Next, the reception control unit 126 refers to the object definition in the navigation information table in the navigation information table storage unit 133 to obtain the display coordinates "X" and "Y" of the key object, and then obtains "Focused Bitmap" for the key "0" as the search value. " index value, for keys other than that, obtain the "Normal Bitmap" index value, refer to the bit mark table, obtain the bit mark data corresponding to the index value, and at the same time, generate graphic information and output it to the playback unit 128.

2-3-9-4.解释用户操作2-3-9-4. Explain user operations

接收控制部126使表示处于现在选择状态的键目标的检索值的变量Cur_focus初始为“0”。The reception control unit 126 initializes the variable Cur_focus indicating the retrieval value of the key object currently selected to "0".

并且,接收控制部126一旦从信号接收部127接收用户操作信号,则判定用户操作信号是“上”、是“下”、还是“确定”。当用户操作信号是“上”或“下”时,变量Cur-focus值减少或增加“1”。下面,参照导航信息表存储部133中的导航信息表,首先参照目标定义表,取得键目标的显示座标“X”、“Y”,接着索引值对于与变量Cur-focus值相等的键取得“FocusedBitmap”检索值,对于那以外的键取得“Normal Bitmap”索引值,参照位标志表,取得相应于索引值的位标志数据,与这些一起生成键图形信息,向重放部128输出。Furthermore, upon receiving the user operation signal from the signal receiving unit 127 , the reception control unit 126 determines whether the user operation signal is “up”, “down”, or “OK”. When the user operation signal is "up" or "down", the value of the variable Cur-focus is decreased or increased by "1". Next, refer to the navigation information table in the navigation information table storage unit 133, first refer to the object definition table, obtain the display coordinates "X" and "Y" of the key object, and then obtain the index value for the key equal to the variable Cur-focus value The "FocusedBitmap" search value acquires the "Normal Bitmap" index value for keys other than that, refers to the bitmark table, acquires bitmark data corresponding to the index value, generates key pattern information together with these, and outputs it to the playback unit 128.

而且,当用户操作信号为“确定”时,接收控制部126参照存储在导航信息表存储部133中的导航信息表NVT的目标定义表,索引值取得与变量Cur_focus值相等的键目标的处理程序的索引值,参照处理程序定义表,从对应索引值的处理程序读入指令字。指令字在“goto_contents”情况下,再读入引数索引值,参照高连接表,读入对应于读入的索引值的连接端目录标识符作为下一次重放的目录标识符。Moreover, when the user operation signal is "OK", the reception control unit 126 refers to the object definition table of the navigation information table NVT stored in the navigation information table storage unit 133, and the index value obtains the processing program of the key object equal to the variable Cur_focus value. The index value of , refer to the processing program definition table, and read the instruction word from the processing program corresponding to the index value. When the instruction word is in the "goto_contents" situation, read in the index index value again, refer to the high connection table, and read in the directory identifier of the connection end corresponding to the index value read in as the directory identifier for next replay.

当指令字在“goto_entry”时,参照系统信息表存储部134中的现在重放中目录的导航信息表所属的事件PMT,读入进入目录标识符作为接着重放的目录标识符。When the command word is "goto_entry", refer to the event PMT to which the navigation information table of the currently playing content in the system information table storage unit 134 belongs, and read the entering content identifier as the content identifier to be played next.

2-3-9-5.滤波条件设定2-3-9-5. Filter condition setting

接收控制部126在后重放的目录标识符和当前重放的目录标识符相等的情况下无动作。当后重放的目录original_network_id和transport_stream_id不同于当前接收的输送流时,根据以MPEG2系统规格及DVB-SI规格确定的程序,参照系统信息表,向接收部122指示所要求的输送流的接收。作为接收部122的动作,当其指定的输送流属于别的网络情况下,进行改变天线方向等处理,接收指定的输送流。The reception control unit 126 takes no action when the content identifier to be reproduced later is equal to the content identifier to be reproduced currently. When the contents original_network_id and transport_stream_id to be reproduced later are different from the currently received transport stream, the receiving unit 122 is instructed to receive the requested transport stream by referring to the system information table according to the procedure determined by the MPEG2 system standard and the DVB-SI standard. As an operation of the receiving unit 122, when the designated transport stream belongs to another network, processing such as changing the direction of the antenna is performed to receive the designated transport stream.

接收控制部126在后重放的目录的图像数据所属事件与现在重放的目录的图像数据所属事件不同时,同样参照系统信息表,将后重放的目录图像数据所属事件的PMT标识符设定在TS译码器部123的滤波条件存储部131中。The reception control unit 126 also refers to the system information table and sets the PMT identifier of the event to which the image data of the content to be reproduced later belongs to when the event to which the image data of the content to be reproduced later is different from the event to which the video data of the content to be reproduced now is different. is stored in the filter condition storage unit 131 of the TS decoder unit 123.

TS译码器部123按滤波条件分离PMT,存储在系统信息表存储部134中,通知到接收控制部126。The TS decoder unit 123 separates the PMTs according to filter conditions, stores them in the system information table storage unit 134 , and notifies the reception control unit 126 .

接收控制部126若从TS译码器部123接收图像数据所属的事件PMT分离通知,则参照其PMT,把“PCR-PID”的值设定在滤波条件存储部131中。When the reception control unit 126 receives the event PMT separation notification to which the image data belongs from the TS decoder unit 123 , it refers to the PMT and sets the value of “PCR-PID” in the filter condition storage unit 131 .

并且,接收控制部126在后重放的目录导航信息所属的事件与现在重放的目录导航信息所属的事件不同时,也同样参照系统信息表,把后重放的目录的导航信息所属的事件PMT标识符设定在TS译码器部123的滤波条件存储部131中。接收控制部126当后重放的目录图像数据标识符“VE_id”之值与现在重放的目录图像数据的标识符“VE_id”之值不同时,参照系统信息表存储部134后重放的目录图像数据所属的事件PMT,取得附加在VE_In formation Component_Descriptor的部分的PII),与“VE_id”值一起设定成滤波条件存储部131中的流对应表的滤波条件,使该条件成为开始状态。In addition, when the event to which the content navigation information to be reproduced later belongs is different from the event to which the content navigation information to be reproduced now belongs, the reception control unit 126 also refers to the system information table, and sets the event to which the content navigation information to be reproduced later belongs. The PMT identifier is set in the filter condition storage unit 131 of the TS decoder unit 123 . When the value of the identifier "VE_id" of the content video data to be reproduced later is different from the value of the identifier "VE_id" of the content video data to be reproduced now, the reception control unit 126 refers to the content to be reproduced later in the system information table storage unit 134. The event PMT to which the image data belongs obtains the PII attached to the VE_Information Component_Descriptor, and sets it together with the "VE_id" value as the filter condition of the stream correspondence table in the filter condition storage unit 131, and makes this condition a start state.

接收控制部126在后重放的目录的导航信息标标识符之值“NE_id”与现在重放的目录导航信息的标识符“NE_id”之值不同时,参照系统信息表存储部134后重放的目录导航信息所属事件的PMT,取得附加在NE_component_Descriptor上的部分的PID,与“NE_id”之值一起设定成滤波条件存储部131中的导航信息表滤波条件,将该滤波条件定为开始状态。When the value "NE_id" of the identifier "NE_id" of the navigation information identifier of the content to be reproduced later by the reception control unit 126 is different from the value of the identifier "NE_id" of the currently reproduced content navigation information, the system information table storage unit 134 is referred to and reproduced. The PMT of the event to which the directory navigation information belongs, obtains the PID of the part attached to the NE_component_Descriptor, sets it together with the value of "NE_id" as the navigation information table filter condition in the filter condition storage unit 131, and sets the filter condition as the start state .

2-3-10.在数据接收装置121中的目录表示具体例2-3-10. Specific example of directory display in data receiving device 121

例如根据使用者在最初选择这样的事件时,即用“0X0001”识别在图70的输送流1801中多路了的Original_network_id、transport_stream_id、service_id、event_id,接收控制部126根据用MPEG2系统规格和DVB-SI规格确定的程序,参照图66A所示的NITI301,取得用“0X001”识别Original_network_id、transport_Stream_id的输送流1801频率等的输送诸元,给接收部122指示输送流1801的接收,同样参照图67所示的PAT1401,“program_no”与Service_id值相等,即,得到“0X000”程序的PMT的PID值“0X0080”,将此设定成滤波条件存储部131中的PMT的滤波条件。For example, when the user initially selects such an event, the original_network_id, transport_stream_id, service_id, and event_id multiplexed in the transport stream 1801 in FIG. The procedure for determining the SI specification refers to NITI 301 shown in FIG. 66A , obtains transport elements such as “0X001” to identify the frequency of the transport stream 1801 of Original_network_id and transport_Stream_id, and instructs the receiving unit 122 to receive the transport stream 1801. Also refer to FIG. 67 In the PAT1401 shown, "program_no" is equal to the Service_id value, that is, the PID value "0X0080" of the PMT of the "0X000" program is obtained, and this is set as the filter condition of the PMT in the filter condition storage unit 131.

TS译码器部123分离图68所示的PMT 1501,使存储在系统信息表存储部134中,通知到接收控制部126。接收控制部126从存储在系统信息表存储部134中的PMT 1501读出“PCR-PID”值“0X0081”,设定为滤波条件存储部131中的PCR的滤波条件。接着,接收控制部126参照PMT 1501中图69A所示的Entry_Descriptor,取出“entry_VE_id”值“0X0005”,设定成滤波条件存储部131中流对应表的滤波条件“table_id_extension”。然后,接收控制部126从PMT1501取得附加在VE_Information_Component_Desoripor上的部分的PID值“0X0083”,同样设定为流对应表滤波条件的“PID”,设流对应表滤波条件为开始状态。The TS decoder unit 123 separates the PMT 1501 shown in FIG. 68, stores it in the system information table storage unit 134, and notifies the reception control unit 126. The reception control unit 126 reads out the “PCR-PID” value “0X0081” from the PMT 1501 stored in the system information table storage unit 134, and sets it as the PCR filter condition in the filter condition storage unit 131. Next, the reception control unit 126 refers to the Entry_Descriptor shown in FIG. 69A in the PMT 1501, extracts the "entry_VE_id" value "0X0005", and sets it as the filter condition "table_id_extension" of the stream correspondence table in the filter condition storage unit 131. Then, the reception control unit 126 acquires the PID value "0X0083" of the part added to the VE_Information_Component_Desoripor from the PMT 1501, sets it as the "PID" of the flow correspondence table filter condition similarly, and sets the flow correspondence table filter condition to start state.

随之,接收控制部126参照在PMT 1501中图69A所示的Entry_Descriptor,取出“entry_NE_id”值“0X0005”,设定为滤波条件存储部131中的导航信息表滤波条件“table_id_extension”。接着,接收控制部126从PMT 1501取得附加在NE-component_Descripor上部分的PID值“0X0082”,同样,设定为导航信息表滤波条件的“PID”,把导航信息表的滤波条件作为开始状态。Then, the reception control unit 126 refers to the Entry_Descriptor shown in FIG. Next, the reception control unit 126 acquires the PID value "0X0082" added to the NE-component_Descripor from the PMT 1501, similarly sets it as the "PID" of the filter condition of the navigation information table, and sets the filter condition of the navigation information table as the start state.

译码器部123分离图63A所示的流对应表1201,存储在流对应信息表存储部132中,通知到接收控制部126,同时分离图61所示的导航信息表1001,存储在导航信息表存储部133中,通知到接收控制部126。接收控制部126如果接受流对应表分离通知,则参照流对应信息表存储部132的流对应表1201,取得“stream_id”之值“0XE5”,在滤波条件存储部131中设定成图像数据滤波条件的“stream_id”。下面,从流对应表1201中取得“Component_tag”之后“0X00”,再参照系统信息表存储部134中的PMT1501,在“0X00”的Stream_identifier_descriptor上附加“Component_tag”值,取得传输的数据种类为图像数据的部分“PID”值“0X0084”,设定为滤波条件存储部131中的图像数据滤波条件“PID”,使该滤波条件成为开始状态。The decoder unit 123 separates the stream correspondence table 1201 shown in FIG. 63A, stores it in the stream correspondence information table storage unit 132, notifies the reception control unit 126, and simultaneously separates the navigation information table 1001 shown in FIG. 61 and stores it in the navigation information table 1201. The table storage unit 133 notifies the reception control unit 126 . When the reception control unit 126 receives the stream correspondence table separation notification, it refers to the stream correspondence table 1201 of the stream correspondence information table storage unit 132, obtains the value “0XE5” of the “stream_id”, and sets it in the filter condition storage unit 131 as image data filter The "stream_id" of the condition. Next, obtain "0X00" after "Component_tag" from the stream correspondence table 1201, then refer to the PMT1501 in the system information table storage unit 134, add the "Component_tag" value to the Stream_identifier_descriptor of "0X00", and obtain the transmitted data type as image data The part "PID" value "0X0084" is set as the image data filter condition "PID" in the filter condition storage unit 131, and the filter condition is put into a start state.

此外,在流对应表中替换为“Component_tag”值,当直接记载“PID”值时,接收控制部126不参照PMT,从流对应表取得“Stream_id”和“PID”,设定滤波条件存储部131中图像数据滤波条件。In addition, when replacing the "Component_tag" value in the stream correspondence table with the "PID" value directly, the reception control unit 126 acquires "Stream_id" and "PID" from the stream correspondence table without referring to the PMT, and sets the filter condition storage unit Image data filtering conditions in 131.

TS译码器部123分离图60所示的图像数据的位流901,向AV译码器部124输出。图像数据位流901在图53A所示的静止图像数据201的专用区域写入“VE_id”值“0X0005”。The TS decoder unit 123 separates the bit stream 901 of image data shown in FIG. 60 and outputs it to the AV decoder unit 124 . The image data bit stream 901 writes the "VE_id" value "0X0005" in the dedicated area of the still image data 201 shown in FIG. 53A.

接收控制部126通过AV译码器部124,接受写入分离的图像数据专用区域的标识符值“0X0005”的通知,确认与在前面设定为流对应表tabl_id_extension的值“0X0005”一致。然后一边参照AV译码器部124时钟部,一边在流对应表1201“first_pts”值“112500”时间之前一旦确认通过AV译码器部124使图像数据译码成功的成功通知,则等待流对应表1201“last_pts”之值“112500”的时间,把滤波条件存储部131的图像数据滤波条件设定为停止状态。The reception control unit 126 receives a notification from the AV decoder unit 124 of the identifier value “0X0005” written in the area dedicated to the separated image data, and confirms that it matches the value “0X0005” previously set in the stream correspondence table tabl_id_extension. Then, while referring to the clock section of the AV decoder section 124, once the success notification that the image data has been successfully decoded by the AV decoder section 124 is confirmed before the "first_pts" value "112500" in the stream correspondence table 1201, the stream correspondence is waited. When the value of "last_pts" in the table 1201 is "112500", the image data filter condition of the filter condition storage unit 131 is set to stop.

还有接收控制部126一旦接受导航信息表分离通知,则首先把变量Cus_focus设定为“0”,参照导航信息表存储器部133的导航信息表1001,取得与索引值“0”对应的键显示座标、与“Focused Bitmap”的索引值对应的位标志数据、与索引值“1”对应的键显示座标、与“Normal Bitmap”的索引值对应的位标志数据,生成键图形信息向重放部128输出。重放部128把由接收控制部126输出的图形信息重迭在由AV译码器部124输出的图像数据上,在显示部129显示图75A所示的图像2301。Also, once the reception control unit 126 receives the navigation information table separation notification, it first sets the variable Cus_focus to “0”, refers to the navigation information table 1001 of the navigation information table storage unit 133, and acquires the key display corresponding to the index value “0”. Coordinates, bit flag data corresponding to the index value of "Focused Bitmap", key display coordinates corresponding to the index value "1", bit flag data corresponding to the index value of "Normal Bitmap", generate key graphic information to the heavy output from the output unit 128. The reproduction unit 128 superimposes the graphics information output from the reception control unit 126 on the image data output from the AV decoder unit 124, and displays an image 2301 shown in FIG. 75A on the display unit 129.

在显示显示图像2301的状态下,在用户使用遥控等的操作部件输入“下”的信号情况下,接收控制部126首先通过信号接收部127接受输入“下”的通知,使变量Cur_forcus值增加“1”设定为“1”。接着参照导航信息表存储部133的导航信息表1001,取得对应于索引值“0”的键显示座标、对应于“Normal Bitmap”的索引值的位标志数据、对应于索引值“1”的键显示座标、对应于“Foused Bitamap”的索引值的位标志数据,生成键图形信息向重放部128输出。重放部128在由AV译码器部124输出的图像数据上迭加由接收控制部126输出的图形信息,在显示部129显示在图75B所示的显示图像2302。In the state where the display image 2301 is displayed, when the user inputs a "down" signal using an operating member such as a remote control, the reception control unit 126 first receives a notification of the input "down" through the signal receiving unit 127, and increases the value of the variable Cur_forcus by "" 1" is set to "1". Next, referring to the navigation information table 1001 of the navigation information table storage unit 133, the key display coordinates corresponding to the index value "0", the bit flag data corresponding to the index value "Normal Bitmap", and the key display coordinates corresponding to the index value "1" are obtained. The key display coordinates and the bitmark data corresponding to the index value of "Foused Bitamap" generate key pattern information and output it to the playback unit 128. The playback unit 128 superimposes the graphics information output from the reception control unit 126 on the image data output from the AV decoder unit 124, and displays a display image 2302 shown in FIG. 75B on the display unit 129.

并且,在显示显示图像2301的状态状下,当用户使用遥控等操作部件输入“确定”信号情况下,接收控制部126通过信号接收部127接受输入信号“确定”通知,取得导航信息表存储部133的导航信息表1001目标定义表1002索引值为变量Cur_focus值“0”的键处理程序索引值“0”,参照处理程序定义表1003,取得对应于索引值“0”的原本指令字“goto_contents”以及其指引数索引值“0”。In addition, in the state where the display image 2301 is displayed, when the user inputs an "OK" signal using an operating member such as a remote control, the reception control unit 126 receives a notification of the input signal "OK" through the signal receiving unit 127, and obtains a navigation information table storage unit. The navigation information table 1001 target definition table 1002 index value of 133 is the key handler index value "0" of the variable Cur_focus value "0", referring to the handler definition table 1003, and obtaining the original instruction word "goto_contents" corresponding to the index value "0" ” and its index value of “0”.

接着,接收控制部126参照高连接表1004,取出对应于索引值“0”的连接端目录“VE_id”之值“0X0001”,设定成滤波条件存储部131中流对应表滤波条件的“table_id_extension”。然后,接收控制部126从PMT 1501取得附加在VE_Information_Component_Deseripor上的部分的PID值“0X0083”,同样设定成流对应表滤波条件的“PID”,将流对应表滤波条件作为开始状态。Next, the receiving control unit 126 refers to the high connection table 1004, extracts the value “0X0001” of the connection end directory “VE_id” corresponding to the index value “0”, and sets it as the “table_id_extension” of the filter condition of the flow correspondence table in the filter condition storage unit 131 . Then, the reception control unit 126 acquires the PID value "0X0083" of the part added to the VE_Information_Component_Deseripor from the PMT 1501, and also sets it as the "PID" of the flow correspondence table filter condition, and sets the flow correspondence table filter condition as a start state.

然后接收控制部126取出对应于索引值“0”的连接端目录的“NE_id”值“0X0001”,设定成滤波条件存储部131中的导航信息表滤波条件的“table_id_extension”。接收控制部126从PMT 1501取得附加在NE_Component_Descripor上的部分的PID值“0X0082”,同样设定成导航信息表滤波条件的“PID”,把导航信息表滤波条件作为开始状态。Then the reception control unit 126 fetches the “NE_id” value “0X0001” of the connection end list corresponding to the index value “0”, and sets it as the “table_id_extension” of the navigation information table filter condition in the filter condition storage unit 131 . The reception control unit 126 acquires the PID value "0X0082" of the part added to the NE_Component_Descripor from the PMT 1501, and also sets it as the "PID" of the navigation information table filter condition, and sets the navigation information table filter condition as the start state.

TS译码器部123分离图63B中表示的流对应表1202,存储在流对应信息表存储部132中,通知接收控制部126,同时,分离图62所示的导航信息表1101,使存储在导航信息表存储部133中,通知接收控制部126。The TS decoder unit 123 separates the stream correspondence table 1202 shown in FIG. 63B, stores it in the stream correspondence information table storage unit 132, and notifies the reception control unit 126, and simultaneously separates the navigation information table 1101 shown in FIG. 62 and stores it in the stream correspondence information table storage unit 132. In the navigation information table storage unit 133 , the notification reception control unit 126 is notified.

接收控制部126一旦接受来自TS译码器部123的流对应表的分离通知,则参照流对应表1202,把图像数据的分离指示给TS译码部123。而且,如果接受来自TS译码部123的导航信息表的分离通知,则参照导航信息表1101,生成键图形信息,向重放部128输出。When receiving the separation notification from the stream correspondence table of the TS decoder 123 , the reception control unit 126 refers to the stream correspondence table 1202 and instructs the separation of the image data to the TS decoder 123 . Then, upon receiving a separation notification from the navigation information table from the TS decoding unit 123 , it refers to the navigation information table 1101 to generate key pattern information, and outputs it to the reproduction unit 128 .

重放部128把从接收控制部126输出的图形信息重迭在由AV译码器部124输出的图像数据上,在显示部129显示图75c所示的显示图像2303。The playback unit 128 superimposes the graphics information output from the reception control unit 126 on the image data output from the AV decoder unit 124, and displays a display image 2303 shown in FIG. 75c on the display unit 129.

而且,在显示显示图像2301的状态下,当使用者利用遥控等操作部件输入“确定”信号的情况下,接收控制部126通过信号接收部127接受输入信号“确定”通知,参照导航信息表存储部133的导航信息表1101,取得原本指令字“goto_entry”。接着接收控制部126从存储在系统信息表存储部134中的PMT 1501,取出“entry_VE_id”值“0X0005”,设定成滤波条件存储部131中流对应表滤波条件的“table_id_extension”。Moreover, in the state where the display image 2301 is displayed, when the user inputs a "OK" signal by using an operating part such as a remote control, the reception control unit 126 receives a notification of the input signal "OK" through the signal receiving unit 127, and refers to the navigation information table to store the "OK" signal. The navigation information table 1101 of the unit 133 acquires the original command word "goto_entry". Next, the reception control unit 126 fetches the “entry_VE_id” value “0X0005” from the PMT 1501 stored in the system information table storage unit 134, and sets it as the “table_id_extension” of the flow correspondence table filter condition in the filter condition storage unit 131.

然后,接收控制部126从PMT 1501取得附加在VE_Information_Component_Descrpor上的部分的PID之值“0X0083”,同样设定流对应表滤波条件的“PID”,设流对应表的滤波条件为开始状态。Then, the reception control unit 126 acquires the value "0X0083" of the PID added to the VE_Information_Component_Descrpor from the PMT 1501, similarly sets the "PID" of the filter condition of the stream correspondence table, and sets the filter condition of the stream correspondence table to the start state.

接收控制部126参照PMT 1501,取出“entry_NE_id”值“0X0005”,设定滤波条件存储部131中的导航信息表滤波条件“table_id_extension”。再有,接收控制部126从PMT 1501取得附加在NE_Component_Descripor上的部分的PID值“0X0082”,同样设定导航信息表的滤波条件的“PID”,设导航信息表的滤波条件为开始状态。The reception control unit 126 refers to the PMT 1501, extracts the “entry_NE_id” value “0X0005”, and sets the navigation information table filter condition “table_id_extension” in the filter condition storage unit 131. Furthermore, the reception control unit 126 acquires the PID value "0X0082" of the part added to the NE_Component_Descripor from the PMT 1501, similarly sets the "PID" of the filter condition of the navigation information table, and sets the filter condition of the navigation information table to the start state.

TS译码器部123分离图63A所示的流对应表1201,存储在流对应信息表存储部132中,向接收控制部126通知,同时,分离图61所示的导航信息表1001,存储在导航信息表存储部133上。通知接收控制部126。The TS decoder unit 123 separates the stream correspondence table 1201 shown in FIG. 63A, stores it in the stream correspondence information table storage unit 132, and notifies the reception control unit 126, and at the same time separates the navigation information table 1001 shown in FIG. 61 and stores it in the on the navigation information table storage unit 133 . The reception control unit 126 is notified.

接收控制部126如果从TS译码器部123接收流对应表的分离通知,则参照流对应表1201,向TS译码器部123指出图像数据分离。而且,一旦从TS译码器部123接收导航信息的分离通知,则参照导航信息表1001,生成键图形信息,向重放部128输出。When the reception control unit 126 receives the stream correspondence table separation notification from the TS decoder unit 123 , it refers to the stream correspondence table 1201 and indicates to the TS decoder unit 123 that the image data is separated. Then, upon receiving notification of separation of navigation information from the TS decoder unit 123 , it refers to the navigation information table 1001 to generate key pattern information, and outputs it to the playback unit 128 .

重放部128在从AV译码器部124输出的图像数据上重迭由接收控制部126输出的图形信息,在显示部129显示图75A所示的显示图像2301。The reproduction unit 128 superimposes the graphics information output from the reception control unit 126 on the image data output from the AV decoder unit 124, and displays a display image 2301 shown in FIG. 75A on the display unit 129.

2-3-11.数据接收装置121的工作2-3-11. Operation of the data receiving device 121

以下使用图76~79所示的流程说明数据接收装置121的工作。Next, the operation of the data receiving device 121 will be described using the flow charts shown in FIGS. 76 to 79 .

2-3-11-1.整体工作2-3-11-1. Overall work

首先用图76说明数据接收装置121的整体工作。First, the overall operation of the data receiving unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 .

接收控制部126由使用者接入数据接收装置121的电源,则根据由MPEG2系统规格和DVB-SI规格确定的程序,控制接收部122、TS译码器部123,接收系统信息表,利用重放部128在显示部129显示节目表,使用遥控等操作部件由使用者选择节目。若通过信号接收部127通知来自操作部件的选择信号,则选择使存储在输送流中的发射数据存储部102中的发射数据多路的事件,所述输送流由数据发射装置101的发射部106发射,得到其事件标识符、Original_network_id、transport_stream_id、Service_id、event_id(S2402)。The receiving control unit 126 is connected to the power supply of the data receiving device 121 by the user, then according to the program determined by the MPEG2 system standard and the DVB-SI standard, controls the receiving unit 122 and the TS decoder unit 123, receives the system information table, and uses the repeated The playback unit 128 displays a program list on the display unit 129, and the user selects a program using an operating member such as a remote control. When the selection signal from the operation member is notified through the signal receiving unit 127, an event that multiplexes the transmission data stored in the transmission data storage unit 102 in the transmission stream that is transmitted by the transmission unit 106 of the data transmission device 101 is selected. Transmit to obtain its event identifier, Original_network_id, transport_stream_id, Service_id, event_id (S2402).

接收控制部126一旦选择使存储在发射数据存储部102上的发射数据多路的事件,则根据由MPEG2系统规格及DVB-SI规格规定的程序,参照系统信息表,向接收部122指示由发射部106发射的输送流的接收,把对应于选择的事件的PMT的分离指示给TS译码器部123。接收部122接收从发射部106发射的输送流,向TS译码器部128输出。TS译码器部123分离对应于选择了的事件的PMT,读入接收数据存储部125中系统信息表存储部134内,通知到接收控制部126。接收控制部126如果接受来自TS译码器部123的PMT接收通知,则参照系统信息表存储部134中的PMT,取得PCR的PID,存储在滤波条件存储部131中(S2404)。When the reception control unit 126 selects an event to multiplex the transmission data stored in the transmission data storage unit 102, it refers to the system information table and instructs the reception unit 122 to transmit data according to the procedure specified by the MPEG2 system standard and the DVB-SI standard. Receiving the transport stream transmitted by the unit 106 instructs the TS decoder unit 123 to separate the PMT corresponding to the selected event. The receiving unit 122 receives the transport stream transmitted from the transmitting unit 106 and outputs it to the TS decoder unit 128 . The TS decoder unit 123 separates the PMT corresponding to the selected event, reads it into the system information table storage unit 134 of the reception data storage unit 125 , and notifies the reception control unit 126 . Upon receiving the PMT reception notification from the TS decoder unit 123, the reception control unit 126 refers to the PMT in the system information table storage unit 134, obtains the PCR PID, and stores it in the filter condition storage unit 131 (S2404).

接收控制部126设定变量Cur_Original_network_id中选择了的事件的Original_network_id,设定在变量Cur_transport_stream_id中选择了的事件的transport_Stream_id,设定在变量Cur_VE_Service_id和变量Cur_NE_Service_id中选择的服务Service_id,设定在变量Cur_VE_event_id和变量Cur_NE_event_id中选择的事件的event_id,清除变量Cur_VE_id和变量Cur_NE_id。这些变量表示目前重放着的目录标识符信息(S2406)。接着接收控制部126设定在变量new_original_network_id中选择的事件original_network_id,设定new_transport_stream_id中选择的事件transport_Stream_id设定new_VE_Service_id和变量new_NE_Service_id中选择的服务Service_id,设定变量new_VE_event_id和变量new_NE_event_id中选择的事件的event_id,在变量new_VE_id和变量new_NE_id,参照系统信息表存储部134中PMT,分别设定entry_VE_id和entry_NE_id的值(S2408)。The reception control unit 126 sets the Original_network_id of the event selected in the variable Cur_Original_network_id, sets the transport_Stream_id of the event selected in the variable Cur_transport_stream_id, sets the service Service_id selected in the variable Cur_VE_Service_id and the variable Cur_NE_Service_id, and sets it in the variable Cur_VE_event_id and the variable The event_id of the event selected in Cur_NE_event_id, clears the variable Cur_VE_id and the variable Cur_NE_id. These variables represent the directory identifier information currently being reproduced (S2406). Next, the reception control unit 126 sets the event original_network_id selected in the variable new_original_network_id, sets the event transport_Stream_id selected in the new_transport_stream_id, sets the service Service_id selected in the new_VE_Service_id and the variable new_NE_Service_id, sets the event_id of the event selected in the variable new_VE_event_id and the variable new_NE_event_id, In the variable new_VE_id and the variable new_NE_id, refer to the PMT in the system information table storage unit 134, and set the values of entry_VE_id and entry_NE_id, respectively (S2408).

接着,接收控制部126作目录替换处理,有关目录切换处理在后作详细描述(S2410)。Next, the reception control unit 126 performs directory replacement processing, and the directory switching processing will be described in detail later (S2410).

下面,接收控制部126将表示目录切换为必要状态的目录变更标志清零(S2412)。Next, the reception control unit 126 clears the directory change flag indicating that directory switching is necessary (S2412).

然后,接收控制部126等待由信号接收部127通知的利用者选择操作的信号输入(S2414)。如若有来自信号接收部127的信号输入,接收控制部126则进行对使用者输入信号处理。对于使用者输入信号处理后面详述(S2416)。接着接收控制部126判定是否在目录变更标志上设定“1”(S2418),若设定“1”时,则返回S2110,若不是则返回S2414。Then, the reception control unit 126 waits for the signal input of the user's selection operation notified by the signal reception unit 127 (S2414). If there is a signal input from the signal receiving unit 127, the reception control unit 126 performs signal processing on the user input. The details of the user input signal processing (S2416) will be described later. Next, the reception control unit 126 judges whether "1" is set in the directory change flag (S2418), and if "1" is set, it returns to S2110, and if not, it returns to S2414.

2-3-11-2.目录切换处理2-3-11-2. Directory switching processing

有关S2410目录的切换处理详细目录用图77的流程图说明。The details of the switching process of the directory in S2410 will be described using the flow chart of FIG. 77 .

首先,接收控制部126判定作为本身存储着的变量的new_Original_network_id和Cur_Original_network_id之值是否一样的,而且判定判断变量new_transport_Stream_id和Cur_transport_Stream_id之值是否一样(S2502)。在肯定情况下,图像数据的切换处理(S2504)和导航信息的切换处理(S2506)同时进行,处理终结。当否定时,参照系统信息表,往用变量new_Original_network_id和变量new_transport_Stream_id识别的输送流之切换处理(S2508),在变量Cur_Original_network_id中设定new_orginal_network_id之值,在变量Cur_transport_stream_id中设定new_transport_Stream_id之值,清除变量Cur_VE_service_id、变量Cur_VE_event_id、变量Cur_VE_id、变量Cur_NE_Service_id、变量Cur_NE_event_id、变量Cur_NE_id(S2510)。使用像数据切换处理(S2504)和导航信息的切换处理(S2506)同时进行,处理终止。First, the reception control unit 126 judges whether the values of the variables new_Original_network_id and Cur_Original_network_id stored in itself are the same, and also judges whether the values of the judgment variables new_transport_Stream_id and Cur_transport_Stream_id are the same (S2502). If it is affirmative, the image data switching process (S2504) and the navigation information switching process (S2506) are performed simultaneously, and the process is terminated. When negative, referring to the system information table, to the switching process (S2508) of the transport stream identified by the variable new_Original_network_id and the variable new_transport_Stream_id, the value of new_orginal_network_id is set in the variable Cur_Original_network_id, the value of new_transport_Stream_id is set in the variable Cur_transport_stream_id, and the variable Cur_VE_service_id, clear variable Cur_VE_service_id, Variable Cur_VE_event_id, variable Cur_VE_id, variable Cur_NE_Service_id, variable Cur_NE_event_id, variable Cur_NE_id (S2510). The use image data switching process (S2504) and the navigation information switching process (S2506) are performed simultaneously, and the process is terminated.

2-3-11-3.图像数据的切换处理2-3-11-3. Image data switching processing

下面参照图78的流程详细说明S2504图像数据的切换处理。Next, the switching process of image data at S2504 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78 .

接收控制部126判定本身存储着的变量new_VE_Service_id和Cur_VE_service_id之值是否相同,且判定变量new_VE_event_id和Cur_VE_event_id之值是否一样(S2602)。肯定时,判定变量与new_VE_id和Cur_VE_id之值是否相同(S2604),若肯定时终结处理,否定时转至S2610。当S2602判定为否定时,参照对应于变量new_VE_Service_id、new_VE_event_id的系统信息表,把用new_VE-Service_id及变量new_VE_event_id识别的事件的PMT分离指示给TS译码器部123。TS译码器部123分离指定的PMT,写入接收数据存储部125中的系统信息表存储部134中,通知到接收控制部126。接收控制部126只要接受PMT的分离通知,则参照PMT取得PCR的PID,设定在滤波条件存储部131中(S2606)。接收控制部126在变量Cur_VE_id中设定变量new_VE_Service_id之值,在变量Cur_VE_event_id中设定变量new_VE_event_id之值(S2608)。The reception control unit 126 judges whether the values of the variables new_VE_Service_id and Cur_VE_service_id stored in itself are the same, and also judges whether the values of the variables new_VE_event_id and Cur_VE_event_id are the same (S2602). If affirmative, determine whether the values of the variable and new_VE_id and Cur_VE_id are the same (S2604), if affirmative, terminate the process, and if negative, go to S2610. When the determination in S2602 is negative, it refers to the system information table corresponding to the variables new_VE_Service_id and new_VE_event_id, and instructs the TS decoder unit 123 to separate the PMT of the event identified by the new_VE_Service_id and the variable new_VE_event_id. The TS decoder unit 123 separates the designated PMT, writes it into the system information table storage unit 134 of the reception data storage unit 125 , and notifies the reception control unit 126 of it. Upon receiving the separation notification from the PMT, the reception control unit 126 refers to the PMT to obtain the PID of the PCR, and sets it in the filter condition storage unit 131 (S2606). The reception control unit 126 sets the value of the variable new_VE_Service_id in the variable Cur_VE_id, and sets the value of the variable new_VE_event_id in the variable Cur_VE_event_id (S2608).

接收控制部126参照用系统信息表存储部134中的变量Cur_VE_Service_id、Cur_VE_event_id识别的事件的PNT,取得附加在VE_Information_Component_Descriptor的目录的PID,把变量new_VE_id值作为table_id_extension,设定在流对应表滤波条件中,把该滤波条件设定为开始状态。TS译码器部123根据滤波条件把对应于变量new_VE_id值的流对应表VET从输送流中分离出来,存储在流对应信息表存储部132中,通知到接收控制部126(S2610)。The reception control unit 126 refers to the PNT of the event identified by the variables Cur_VE_Service_id and Cur_VE_event_id in the system information table storage unit 134, obtains the PID of the directory added to the VE_Information_Component_Descriptor, sets the value of the variable new_VE_id as table_id_extension in the stream correspondence table filter condition, Set this filter condition to start state. The TS decoder unit 123 separates the stream correspondence table VET corresponding to the variable new_VE_id value from the transport stream according to the filter condition, stores it in the stream correspondence information table storage unit 132, and notifies the reception control unit 126 (S2610).

接收控制部126解释用流对应信息表存储部132中S2610取得的流对应表VET,在变量first PTS中设定“first_pts”值,在变量last PTS中设定“last_pts”值,取得“Sfream_id”和“Component_tag”值(S2612)。接收控制部126使表示图像数据最初的帧译码是否结束的标志初始化为“0”(S2614)。The reception control unit 126 interprets the stream correspondence table VET acquired in S2610 in the stream correspondence information table storage unit 132, sets the value "first_pts" in the variable first PTS, sets the value "last_pts" in the variable last PTS, and acquires "Sfream_id". and "Component_tag" value (S2612). The reception control unit 126 initializes the flag indicating whether or not the decoding of the first frame of the image data has been completed to "0" (S2614).

接收控制部126参照对应于用系统信息表存储部134中变量Cur_VE_Service_id、VE_event_id识别的事件的PMT,传输的数据种类为图像数据,取得部分的PID,所述部分是附加在与在S2612中“Component_tag”值得到的“Component_tag”值相等的Stream_identifier_descriptor上,与在S2612中取得的“Stream_id”值一起设定在滤波条件存储部131中图像数据之滤波条件中,将该滤波条件设定为开始状态。TS译码器部123根据滤波条件分离图像数据,向AV译码器部124输出(S2616)。The reception control unit 126 refers to the PMT corresponding to the event identified by the variables Cur_VE_Service_id and VE_event_id in the system information table storage unit 134, the type of data to be transmitted is image data, and the PID of the part obtained is added to the "Component_tag" in S2612. On the Stream_identifier_descriptor with the obtained "Component_tag" value equal to the "Stream_id" value obtained in S2612, it is set in the filter condition of the image data in the filter condition storage unit 131, and the filter condition is set to the start state. The TS decoder unit 123 separates the image data according to the filter condition, and outputs it to the AV decoder unit 124 (S2616).

接收控制部126向AV译码器部124指示,取得在TS译码器部123分离了的图像数据专用区域上记述的图像数据标识符值,与变量new_VE_id值比较(S2618)。在一致情况下转移到S2620,在不一致情况下转移到S2619。The reception control unit 126 instructs the AV decoder unit 124 to obtain the image data identifier value described in the image data dedicated area separated by the TS decoder unit 123, and compare it with the value of the variable new_VE_id (S2618). If they match, move to S2620, and if they don't match, move to S2619.

接收控制部1262将滤波条件存储部131中图像数据的滤波条件设定为停止状态(S2619),返回S2610。The reception control unit 1262 sets the filter condition of the image data in the filter condition storage unit 131 to the stopped state (S2619), and returns to S2610.

AV译码器部124当结束从TS译码器部123输出的图像数据的译码时,向接收控制部126通知译码结束。接收控制部126判定是否接收该结束的通知(S2620)。当接收情况下移至S2622,否则移至S2624。When the decoding of the image data output from the TS decoder unit 123 is completed, the AV decoder unit 124 notifies the reception control unit 126 of the completion of decoding. The reception control unit 126 determines whether or not to receive the notification of the end (S2620). When receiving, move to S2622, otherwise move to S2624.

接收控制部126在标志first_flag中设定“1”值(S2622)The reception control unit 126 sets a value of "1" in the flag first_flag (S2622)

接收控制部126参照AV译码器部124的时钟部之值以90000分之一秒单位取得当前时间,与变量first PTS值比较(S2624)。当前时间值在firstPTS以上时移至SZ626,不到时则移至S2628。接收控制部126判定标志first_flag值是否为“1”(S2626)、为“0”时移至S2619,在“1”情况下移至S2628。The reception control unit 126 refers to the value of the clock unit of the AV decoder unit 124 to obtain the current time in units of 90000ths of a second, and compares it with the value of the variable first PTS (S2624). When the current time value is above firstPTS, it moves to SZ626, and when it is less than firstPTS, it moves to S2628. The reception control unit 126 judges whether or not the value of the flag first_flag is "1" (S2626). If it is "0", the process proceeds to S2619, and if it is "1", the process proceeds to S2628.

在S2628,接收控制部126参照AV译码部124的时钟部值,以90000分之一秒单位取得当前时间,与变量last PTS值相比较。当当前时间值为变量last PTS以上时,把滤波条件存储部131中图像数据的滤波条件设定成停止状态(S2630),在变量Cur_VE_id中设定变量new_VE_id值(S2632),结束图像数据重放处理,当当前时间值不足变量last PTS时返回S2620。At S2628, the reception control unit 126 refers to the clock unit value of the AV decoding unit 124 to acquire the current time in units of 90000th of a second, and compares it with the variable last PTS value. When the current time value is more than the variable lastPTS, the filter condition of the image data in the filter condition storage unit 131 is set to a stop state (S2630), and the variable new_VE_id value is set in the variable Cur_VE_id (S2632), and the image data playback ends Processing, return to S2620 when the current time value is less than the variable last PTS.

2-3-11-4.导航信息切换处理2-3-11-4. Navigation information switching processing

下面用图79的流程详细说明S2506的导航信息切换处理。Next, the navigation information switching process of S2506 will be described in detail using the flowchart of FIG. 79 .

接收控制部126判断本身存储着的变量new_NE_Service_id和Cur_NE_Service_id之值是否相同,并且变量new_NE_event_id和Cur_NE_event_id之值是否相等(S2702)。若相等时判定变量new_NE_id和Cur_NE_id之值是否相等(S2704),若相等时则终止处理,不相等时向S2706转移。当S2702的判定为否定时,则参照对应于变量new_NE_service_id、new_NE_event_id的系统信息表,向TS译码器部123指示对应于用变量new_NE_Service_id及变量new_NE_event_id识别的事件的PMT之分离。TS译码等部123分离指定的PMT,记录在接收数据存储部125中系统信息表存储部134中,通知到接收控制部126(S2708)。The reception control unit 126 judges whether the values of the variables new_NE_Service_id and Cur_NE_Service_id stored in itself are the same, and whether the values of the variables new_NE_event_id and Cur_NE_event_id are equal (S2702). If they are equal, it is judged whether the values of variables new_NE_id and Cur_NE_id are equal (S2704), if they are equal, the processing is terminated, and if they are not equal, the process goes to S2706. If the determination in S2702 is negative, the system information table corresponding to the variables new_NE_service_id and new_NE_event_id is referred to, and the separation of the PMT corresponding to the event identified by the variables new_NE_Service_id and variable new_NE_event_id is instructed to the TS decoder unit 123 . The TS decoding unit 123 separates the specified PMT, records it in the system information table storage unit 134 of the reception data storage unit 125, and notifies the reception control unit 126 (S2708).

接收控制部126在变量Cur_NE_Service_id中设定变量new_NE_Service_id值,在变量Cur_NE_event_id中设定变量new_NE_event_id值(S2710)。The reception control unit 126 sets the value of the variable new_NE_Service_id in the variable Cur_NE_Service_id, and sets the value of the variable new_NE_event_id in the variable Cur_NE_event_id (S2710).

在S2706中,接收控制部126参照对应于用系统信息表存储部134中变量Cur_NE_Service_id、Cur_NE_event_id识别的事件的PMT,取得附加在NE_Component_Descriptor上的目录PID,把变量new_NE_id值作为table_id_extension,设定为滤波条件存储条件存储部131的导航信息表的滤波条件,将该滤波条件设定为开始状态。TS译码器部123根据滤波条件把对应于变量new_NE_id值的导航信息表NVT从输送流中分离出,记录在导航信息表存储部133中,通知到接收控制部126(S2706)。In S2706, the reception control unit 126 refers to the PMT corresponding to the event identified by the variables Cur_NE_Service_id and Cur_NE_event_id in the system information table storage unit 134, obtains the directory PID attached to the NE_Component_Descriptor, sets the value of the variable new_NE_id as table_id_extension, and sets it as the filter condition The filter condition of the navigation information table in the condition storage unit 131 is stored, and the filter condition is set to the start state. The TS decoder unit 123 separates the navigation information table NVT corresponding to the value of the variable new_NE_id from the transport stream according to the filter condition, records it in the navigation information table storage unit 133, and notifies the reception control unit 126 (S2706).

接收控制部126参照在导航信息表存储部133中的S2706中取得的导航信息表NVT的目标定义表,取得键目标的显示座标“X”、“Y”,接着取得“Normal Bitmap”的索引值,参照位标志表,取得对应于索引值的位标志数据,以这些为基础生成键的图形信息,向重放部128输出。重放部128在AV译码部124译了码的图像数据上重迭该图形信息,显示在显示部129上(S2712)。The reception control unit 126 refers to the object definition table of the navigation information table NVT acquired in S2706 in the navigation information table storage unit 133, acquires the display coordinates "X" and "Y" of the key object, and then acquires the index of "Normal Bitmap". value, refer to the bit flag table, obtain bit flag data corresponding to the index value, generate key graphic information based on these, and output to the playback unit 128 . The reproducing unit 128 superimposes the graphics information on the image data decoded by the AV decoding unit 124, and displays it on the display unit 129 (S2712).

接收控制部126把表示处于现在选择状态下的键目标索引值的变量Cur_focus初始化为“0”(S2714)。接收控制部126参照在S2706取得的导航信息表NVT的目标定义表,取得索引值等于变量Cur_focus值的键目标显示座标“X”、“Y”,接着取得“Focused Bitmap”索引值,参照位标志表,取得对应于索引值的位标志数据,根据这些生成把具有对应于变量Cur_forcus值的索引值的键位标志设成选择状态的键目标图形信息,向重放部128输出。重放部128在AV译码器部124译码的图像数据上重迭该图形信息,在显示部129上显示(S2716),在变量Cur_NE_id设定变量new_NE_id值(S2718),终止导航信息的切换处理。The reception control unit 126 initializes the variable Cur_focus indicating the key object index value in the currently selected state to "0" (S2714). The reception control unit 126 refers to the object definition table of the navigation information table NVT obtained in S2706, obtains the key object display coordinates "X" and "Y" whose index value is equal to the variable Cur_focus value, and then obtains the index value of "Focused Bitmap", and refers to the bitmap The flag table acquires bit flag data corresponding to the index value, and generates key object graphic information that sets the key bit flag having the index value corresponding to the variable Cur_forcus value to the selected state based on these, and outputs it to the playback unit 128 . The playback unit 128 superimposes the graphic information on the image data decoded by the AV decoder unit 124, displays it on the display unit 129 (S2716), sets the variable new_NE_id value in the variable Cur_NE_id (S2718), and terminates the switching of the navigation information. deal with.

2-3-11-5.用户输入信号处理2-3-11-5. User input signal processing

下面参照图80的流程说明有关用户输入信号的处理。Next, the processing related to the user input signal will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80 .

接收控制部126判定来自信号接收部127通知的用户输入是否为“上”信号。若是“上”信号则移至S2804,若不是则移至S2808(S2802)。在S2804中,接收控制部126使变量Cur_focus之值减“1”。但当变量Cur_focus值为“0”时仍然保持“0”。The reception control unit 126 determines whether or not the user input notified from the signal reception unit 127 is an “up” signal. If it is an "up" signal, move to S2804, if not, move to S2808 (S2802). In S2804, the reception control unit 126 decrements the value of the variable Cur_focus by "1". But when the variable Cur_focus value is "0", it still remains "0".

接收控制部126参照用在导航信息表存储部133中存储着的S2706取得的导航信息表NVT的目标定义表,取得目标值与变量Cur_forcus值相等的键目标的显示座标“X”、“Y”,接着取得“Focused Bitmap”的索引值,参照位标志,取得对应于索引值的位标志数据,根据这些,把具有对应于变量Cur_focus值的索引值的键位标志设定成选择状态的位标志,再同样生成把相应对应变量Cur_forcus值的索引值的键位标志设定成一般状态的位标志的键目标图形信息,向重放部128输出。重放部128在用AV译码器部124译码的图像数上重迭该图形信息,在显示部129上显示(S2806),使使用者输入处理结束。The reception control unit 126 refers to the object definition table of the navigation information table NVT obtained in S2706 stored in the navigation information table storage unit 133, and obtains the display coordinates "X" and "Y" of the key object whose target value is equal to the value of the variable Cur_forcus. ", then obtain the index value of "Focused Bitmap", refer to the bit mark, obtain the bit mark data corresponding to the index value, according to these, set the key bit mark with the index value corresponding to the variable Cur_focus value as the bit of the selected state flag, and similarly generate key object graphic information in which the key bit flag corresponding to the index value of the variable Cur_forcus value is set to the bit flag of the normal state, and outputs it to the playback unit 128 . The reproduction unit 128 superimposes the graphics information on the number of images decoded by the AV decoder unit 124, displays it on the display unit 129 (S2806), and terminates the user input process.

在S2808,接收控制部126判定来自信号接收部127通知的用户输入是否为“下”信号。若为“下”信号则转至S2810,若不是则转至S2812。在S2810中,接收控制部126增加变量Cur_focus值。但是在变量Cur_forcus值等于导航信息表NVT中键目标标识符最大值时照样移至S2806。In S2808, the reception control unit 126 determines whether or not the user input notified from the signal reception unit 127 is a “down” signal. If it is a "down" signal, go to S2810, if not, go to S2812. In S2810, the reception control unit 126 increments the value of the variable Cur_focus. However, when the value of the variable Cur_forcus is equal to the maximum value of the key object identifier in the navigation information table NVT, it still moves to S2806.

在S2812中,接收控制部126判断来自信号接收部127的通知的用户输入是否为“确定”信号。若是则移至S2814,反之使用户输入处理终止。In S2812, the reception control unit 126 judges whether or not the user input of the notification from the signal reception unit 127 is an “OK” signal. If so, move to S2814; otherwise, the user input processing is terminated.

在S2814中,接收控制部126参照导航信息表NVT的目标定义表,取得索引值与变量Cur_focus值相等的键目标的处理器索引值,参照处理器定义表,通过对应索引值的处理器读入指令字。指令字为“goto_contents”情况下进入S2818,否则进入S2824(S2816)。In S2814, the reception control unit 126 refers to the object definition table of the navigation information table NVT, acquires the processor index value of the key object whose index value is equal to the variable Cur_focus value, refers to the processor definition table, and reads in instruction word. Enter S2818 when the instruction word is "goto_contents", otherwise enter S2824 (S2816).

在S2818,接收控制部126通过处理器读入goto_contents指令引数的索引值。In S2818, the reception control unit 126 reads the index value of the argument of the goto_contents instruction through the processor.

接收控制部126参照所述导航信息表的高连接表,把对应于在S2818中读入的索引值的目录标识符的Original_network_id、transport_Stream_id、VE_service_id、VE_event_id、VE_id、VE_service_id、NE_erent_id、NE_id之值分别设定为变量new_orignal_network_id、new_transport_Stream_id、new_VE_service_id、new_VE_event_id、now_VE-id、new_VE_Service_id、new_NE_event_id、new_NE_id。然而,在高连接表中没有设定值,即,对于“-”的标识符没有分别变更原来的值(S2820)。The reception control unit 126 refers to the highly connected table of the navigation information table, and sets the values of Original_network_id, transport_Stream_id, VE_service_id, VE_event_id, VE_id, VE_service_id, NE_erent_id, and NE_id of the directory identifier corresponding to the index value read in S2818 to Defined as variables new_orignal_network_id, new_transport_Stream_id, new_VE_service_id, new_VE_event_id, now_VE-id, new_VE_Service_id, new_NE_event_id, new_NE_id. However, no value is set in the high connection table, that is, the original value is not changed for each identifier of "-" (S2820).

接收控制部126把目录变更标志值设定为“1”(S2822),结束用户信号处理。The reception control unit 126 sets the value of the directory change flag to "1" (S2822), and ends the user signal processing.

在S2824中,接收控制部126判定原本指令字是否为“goto_entrg”,若否定则终止使用者信号处理。若为“goto_entry”时,接收控制部126参照对应于由系统信息表存储部134中变量Cur_NE_Service_id、Cur_NE-event_id识别的事件的PMT,把“entry_VE_id”、“entry_NE_id”值设定为变量new_VE_id、变量new_NE_id,把各变量Cur_NE_Service_id、变量Cur_event_id值分别设定成变量new_VE_service_id、变量new_NE_event_id(S2826),进入S2822。In S2824, the reception control unit 126 determines whether the original command word is "goto_entrg", and if not, terminates the user signal processing. If it is "goto_entry", the reception control unit 126 refers to the PMT corresponding to the event identified by the variables Cur_NE_Service_id and Cur_NE-event_id in the system information table storage unit 134, and sets the values of "entry_VE_id" and "entry_NE_id" as variables new_VE_id, variable new_NE_id, set the values of variables Cur_NE_Service_id and variable Cur_event_id to variable new_VE_service_id and variable new_NE_event_id respectively (S2826), and proceed to S2822.

如上所示,根据用户操作,图75A所示的显示图像2301显示切换成图75C所示的显示图像2303,并返回原处。As described above, according to the user's operation, the display of the display image 2301 shown in FIG. 75A is switched to the display image 2303 shown in FIG. 75C and returns to the original position.

2-3-12.总括2-3-12. Summary

如上所述,本实施例的数据接收装置121在必要时可从输送流提取对于特定目录重放所必需的展示信息和导航信息。以此,根据用户的操作,可适宜重放连接端的目录等,使用单向信道能提供根据用户操作的对话性节目。As described above, the data receiving device 121 of the present embodiment can extract presentation information and navigation information necessary for playback of a specific content from the transport stream as necessary. In this way, according to the user's operation, it is possible to appropriately reproduce the content of the connection terminal, etc., and to provide interactive programs according to the user's operation using the one-way channel.

此外,在本实施例的数据接收装置121中,接收部122、TS译码器部123、AV译码器部124、重放部128、显示部129、声音输出部130及信号接收部127可使用与已有的数字广播电视装置的相同结构。In addition, in the data receiving device 121 of this embodiment, the receiving unit 122, the TS decoder unit 123, the AV decoder unit 124, the playback unit 128, the display unit 129, the sound output unit 130, and the signal receiving unit 127 may be Use the same structure as the existing digital broadcast television equipment.

从而,在构成已有的数字广播接收装置的接收部、TS译码器部、AV译码器部等上仅附加所述的接收控制部126和接收数据存储部125等就能简单地实现完成本发明目的节目对话功能。Therefore, only the reception control unit 126, the reception data storage unit 125, etc. described above can be simply added to the reception unit, TS decoder unit, AV decoder unit, etc. constituting the existing digital broadcast receiving device. The object of the present invention is the program dialogue function.

并且,由于这些已有的结构可不变地应用,所以也可实现形成通常的数字卫星广播接收功能和作为本发明目的节目对话功能之兼容性。And, since these existing structures can be applied unchanged, it is also possible to realize the compatibility of forming the usual digital satellite broadcast receiving function and the program dialogue function which is the object of the present invention.

2-3-13.其他2-3-13. Others

2-3-13-1.2-3-13-1.

此外,在本实施例中,尽管使用如图像数据都为静止图像的例子说明,但即使在图像数据为活动图像情况下,数据接收装置121可与本实施例一样地重放。In addition, in this embodiment, although the example in which the image data is all still images has been described, even when the image data is a moving image, the data receiving device 121 can reproduce it in the same manner as in the present embodiment.

还有在本实施例中,虽然使用各目录图像数据和导航信息的组的情况下的例子进行说明,但也可使声音数据成组。在该情况下,接收控制部126与图像数据切换处理同时作声音数据的切换处理,向声音输出部130输出,只要如上述构成就行。声音数据切换处理可用与图像数据切换处理同样的方法实现。Also, in this embodiment, an example is described using a set of content image data and navigation information, but audio data may also be grouped. In this case, the reception control unit 126 performs switching processing of the audio data simultaneously with the switching processing of the image data, and outputs the audio data to the audio output unit 130 , as long as the configuration is as described above. Audio data switching processing can be realized by the same method as image data switching processing.

在本实施例中,虽然展示记述了在导航信息中处理器定义表中包括的数据接收装置121动作的原本只是指示目录切换的简单原本情况下的例子,但也可以是由多个指令字组成的复杂的原本。In this embodiment, although an example is shown in which the script describing the operation of the data receiving device 121 included in the processor definition table in the navigation information is only a simple script instructing directory switching, it may also be composed of multiple instruction words. complex original.

例如,节目为“购物信息”情况下,也可记载计算原本中视听者选择的商品货款总金额的原本。For example, when the program is "shopping information", the script for calculating the total amount of the goods selected by the viewer in the script may also be described.

因此,可通过在数据接收装置121的接收控制部126中具有原本执行功能来实现。根据该功能计算总金额,将其结果向重放部128输出,只要在显示部129上显示就行。Therefore, it can be realized by having an original execution function in the reception control unit 126 of the data reception device 121 . According to this function, the total amount is calculated, and the result is output to the playback unit 128, and only needs to be displayed on the display unit 129.

再有,在该购物中,也可记录商品定购的原本。为此,通过把该原本例如连接到电话线路上的数据接收装置121的调制解调器(未图示),连到其销售者的计算机系统,只要作成为定购所需商品发射必要数据的目录就行。象这样的结构,用户一边看商品确认定购的商品的总金额一边可实际进行商品定购操作。In addition, in this shopping, the original of the product order may be recorded. For this reason, by connecting the modem (not shown) of the data receiving device 121 originally connected to the telephone line, for example, to the computer system of the seller, it is only necessary to make a catalog for transmitting the necessary data for ordering the desired commodity. With such a structure, the user can actually order the product while confirming the total price of the ordered product while looking at the product.

第3实施形式3rd embodiment

在本实施形式中,就有关可实现流基目录和页基目录并存的对话节目的数字广播装置作说明。In this embodiment, a description will be given of a digital broadcasting apparatus capable of realizing a dialogue program in which a stream-based content and a page-based content coexist.

3-1.数字广播装置81013-1. Digital broadcasting device 8101

图81是表示数字广播装置构成的方框图。在该数字广播装置8101中,与图4的数字广播装置5101及图52的数据发射装置101同样的符号代表相同的构成要素,所以其说明从略,下面主要说明不同点。Fig. 81 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a digital broadcasting apparatus. In this digital broadcasting device 8101, the same reference numerals as those in the digital broadcasting device 5101 in FIG. 4 and the data transmitting device 101 in FIG. 52 denote the same components, so descriptions thereof are omitted, and differences will be mainly described below.

数字广播装置8101与图52所示的数据发射装置101比较,主要区别在于附加图4所示的数据多路化部5103。以下以不同点为中心说明。Compared with the data transmission device 101 shown in FIG. 52, the digital broadcasting device 8101 is mainly different in that the data multiplexing unit 5103 shown in FIG. 4 is added. The following description will focus on the differences.

发射数据存储部102存储流基目录及页基目录的数据(展示信息和导航信息)。并且,结构信息存储部109存储流基目录用结构信息表和页基目录用结构信息表。The transmission data storage unit 102 stores data (presentation information and navigation information) of the stream-based content and the page-based content. Furthermore, the structure information storage unit 109 stores a structure information table for a stream base directory and a structure information table for a page base directory.

数据多路化部5103作存储在发射数据存储部102中的流基目录数据的多路化。而且,数据多路化部103使存储在发射数据存储部102中的页基目录数据(展示信息和导航信息)的多路化。The data multiplexing unit 5103 multiplexes the stream-based content data stored in the transmission data storage unit 102 . Furthermore, the data multiplexing unit 103 multiplexes the page-based content data (presentation information and navigation information) stored in the transmission data storage unit 102 .

数据多路化部5103、103的详细目录在第1、第2实施形式中已作了说明。The details of the data multiplexing units 5103 and 103 have already been described in the first and second embodiments.

发射部106把来自2个数据多路化部5103、103的多路化流多路发射到输送流中。The transmitting unit 106 multiplexes and transmits the multiplexed streams from the two data multiplexing units 5103 and 103 into the transport stream.

3-1-1.结构信息表3-1-1. Structure information table

图82A和图82B分别表示在该情况下在结构信息存储部109中存储的流基目录用的结构信息表8201及页基目录用的结构信息表8301。82A and 82B respectively show the structure information table 8201 for the stream base directory and the structure information table 8301 for the page base directory stored in the structure information storage unit 109 in this case.

在结构信息表8201中,具有记录在“图像数据”栏中的文件名“Video100、m2v”、“Video104.m2v”、“Video106、m2v”的各图像数据存储在展示信息存储部107中。活动图像数据“Video100.m2v”、“Video104.m2v”、“Video106.m2v”的模式图展示在图84A~图84C中。如这些图所示,活动图像数据“Video100、m2v”表示世界旅行指南,在图1~图3的目录100S~103S中共用。活动图像数据“Vide100、m2v”表示世界旅行指南,在图1~图3的目录100S~103S中共用。活动图像数据“Video104.m2v”表示日本旅行指南,在图1~图3的目录104S、105S、105S’、105S”中共用。活动图像数据“Video106.m2v”(其他图)分别表示中国旅行指南。In the structure information table 8201 , each image data having the file names “Video100, m2v”, “Video104.m2v”, and “Video106, m2v” recorded in the “image data” column is stored in the presentation information storage unit 107 . Schematic diagrams of moving image data "Video100.m2v", "Video104.m2v", and "Video106.m2v" are shown in FIGS. 84A to 84C. As shown in these figures, the video data "Video100, m2v" represent a world travel guide, and are shared by the contents 100S to 103S in FIGS. 1 to 3 . The video data "Vide100, m2v" represent a world travel guide, and are shared by the contents 100S to 103S in FIGS. 1 to 3 . The moving image data "Video104.m2v" represents a Japanese travel guide, and is shared among the contents 104S, 105S, 105S', and 105S" in Figs. 1 to 3. The moving image data "Video106.m2v" (other figures) represent a Chinese travel guide respectively .

有关“声音数据”栏也一样。The same applies to the "sound data" column.

具有记载在“导航信息”栏中的文件名“Navi100-0、nif...”的导航信息存储在导航信息存储部108中。图85、图86表示结构信息表8201的导航信息和在图1~图3的场面的对应关系。图85和图86用A-A’线作左右连续。Navigation information having a file name “Navi100-0, nif . . . ” described in the “Navigation Information” column is stored in the navigation information storage unit 108 . 85 and 86 show the correspondence between the navigation information in the structure information table 8201 and the scenes in FIGS. 1 to 3 . Figure 85 and Figure 86 use the A-A' line for left and right continuity.

而且,结构信息表8201的目录号100~104的结构信息表示图85、图86中目录100S~104S。这些目录号和目录是一一对应的例子。Furthermore, the structure information of the directory numbers 100 to 104 in the structure information table 8201 indicates the directories 100S to 104S in FIGS. 85 and 86 . These catalog numbers and catalogs are examples of a one-to-one correspondence.

比如,在目录号100栏中,指定图像数据“Video100.m2v”、声音数据“Audio100.m2a”、导航信息“Navi100-0.nif,Navi100-1.nif,Navi100-2.nif,...”For example, in the catalog number 100 column, specify image data "Video100.m2v", sound data "Audio100.m2a", navigation information "Navi100-0.nif, Navi100-1.nif, Navi100-2.nif, ... "

活动图像数据“Video100.m2v”如图84A所示,表示中国、日本、埃及等世界各国旅行指南。这里成为图1中目录100S基础的活动图像。The moving image data "Video100.m2v", as shown in Fig. 84A, represents travel guidebooks for various countries in the world such as China, Japan, and Egypt. Here is the moving image that becomes the basis of the list 100S in FIG. 1 .

“Audio100.m2a”是1个存储在展示信息存储部107中的声音数据文件名。声音数据“Audio100.m2a”连同活动图像数据“Video100.m2v”表示指引世界各图的声音。“Audio100.m2a” is the name of one audio data file stored in the presentation information storage unit 107 . The audio data "Audio100.m2a" together with the moving image data "Video100.m2v" represent the audio guiding the maps of the world.

导航信息“Navi100-0.nif”表示包括活动图像数据“Video100.m2v”中的图85中所示的场面100S1的中国旅行指南场面用的主菜单。导航信息“Navi100-1.nif”为用于包括场面100S2的日本旅行指南场面的主菜单。导航信息“Navi100-2.nif”为用于埃及旅行指南场面的主菜单。The navigation information "Navi100-0.nif" indicates a main menu for the China travel guide scene including the scene 100S1 shown in FIG. 85 in the moving image data "Video100.m2v". The navigation information "Navi100-1.nif" is the main menu for the Japan travel guide scene including the scene 100S2. The navigation information "Navi100-2.nif" is the main menu for the Egyptian travel guide scene.

根据这些信息,目录号100的结构信息表示图1~图3所示的世界旅行指南(带主菜单)的100的数据。Based on these information, the structure information of catalog number 100 represents the data of 100 of the world travel guide (with main menu) shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 .

并且,结构信息表8201中的目录号105的结构信息表示图1中目录105S、105S’、105S”。其中,目录号105和目录105S、105S’、105”表示对应于1对n(1对3)的例子。即导航信息“Navi105-1.nif”通过用于切换键目标和文字信息显示的原本,对应于目录105S、105S’、105S”。根据原本产生的键目标和文字信息的显示切换与在第1实施形式中的说明是一样的。And, the structure information of the directory number 105 in the structure information table 8201 represents the directory 105S, 105S', 105S" in Fig. 3) Example. That is, the navigation information "Navi105-1.nif" corresponds to the catalogs 105S, 105S', and 105S" through the original used to switch the display of key objects and text information. The display switching of key objects and text information generated according to the original is the same as in the first The description in the implementation form is the same.

图82B的结构信息表8301与第2实施形式中展示的图56一样。在结构信息表8301中指定的图像数据、声音数据存储在展示信息存储部107中,导航信息存储在导航信息存储部108中。The configuration information table 8301 in FIG. 82B is the same as that shown in FIG. 56 in the second embodiment. The image data and audio data specified in the structure information table 8301 are stored in the presentation information storage unit 107 , and the navigation information is stored in the navigation information storage unit 108 .

在结构信息表8301中展示的对话节目加在表示第2实施例中所示的日本天气预报的页基目录上,使包括表示世界天气预报的页基目录。目录100P作成世界天气预报(带用于选择各国的主菜单)。而且存储在结构信息存储部109中的进入信息决定指示目录号100,即是流基目录100S。The dialog program shown in the structure information table 8301 is added to the page base table of contents showing the weather forecast for Japan shown in the second embodiment, so as to include the page base table of contents showing the weather forecast for the world. Contents 100P create world weather forecast (with main menu for country selection). Furthermore, the entry information stored in the configuration information storage unit 109 specifies the directory number 100, that is, the stream base directory 100S.

图85、86中的页基目录包括在结构信息表8301中所示的目录中,尤其是目录104相当于表示第2实施形式中所示的目录号5的日本天气预报(带有用于选择各地的主菜单)的目录。但是,与第2实施形式的目录号5的导航信息(图54)略有区别,附加与流基目录的连接。图83表示本实施形式的目录号5的导航信息。在所述图中与图54比较补充了与目录号100的高连接。85 and 86 are included in the catalog shown in the structure information table 8301, especially the catalog 104 is equivalent to representing the Japanese weather forecast of catalog number 5 shown in the second embodiment (with a directory of the main menu). However, it is slightly different from the navigation information (FIG. 54) of the directory number 5 in the second embodiment, and a link to the stream-based directory is added. Fig. 83 shows navigation information of catalog number 5 in this embodiment. The high connection to catalog number 100 is supplemented in said figure in comparison with FIG. 54 .

3-1-2.导航信息3-1-2. Navigation information

导航信息的详细说明由于在第1、2实施形式中已进行,所以这里对图85、86的关连部分别作说明。Since the detailed description of the navigation information has already been carried out in the first and second embodiments, the relevant parts in Figs. 85 and 86 will be described here.

图87表示所述导航信息“Nari100-n.nif”的具体例子。这里用于包括图85的场面100S1的中国旅行指南场面。导航信息“Navi100-0.nif”在目标定义表中记述3个键目标。这3个键目标对应于图85的场面100S1中的“详细”、“天气”、“中国”的各键。为了记述在高连接表中,“详细”键作为连接端指定目录号101(目录101S)。“天气”键作为连接端指定目录号10(图85箭标线所示的目录100P)。“中国”键作为连接端指定目录号106。此外,目录号106虽然在图85中未展示,但是包括上述活动图像数据“Video106.m2v”的中国旅行指南内用的目录。Fig. 87 shows a specific example of the navigation information "Nari100-n.nif". This is used here for the China Travel Guide scene including the scene 100S1 of FIG. 85 . The navigation information "Navi100-0.nif" describes three key objects in the object definition table. These three key objects correspond to the keys of "Details", "Weather", and "China" in scene 100S1 in FIG. 85 . In order to describe in the high connection table, the "detailed" key designates the directory number 101 (the directory 101S) as the connection destination. The "weather" key specifies the directory number 10 (the directory 100P shown by the arrow line in Fig. 85) as the connection terminal. The "China" key specifies catalog number 106 as the connection terminal. In addition, although the catalog number 106 is not shown in FIG. 85 , it is a catalog used in the China travel guide including the above-mentioned moving image data "Video106.m2v".

图88表示上述导航信息“Navi100-1nif”的具体例子。与导航信息“Navi100-0.nif”虽然相同,但“中国”键变更成“日本”键。其连接端也由目录号106变更为目录号104(图85的目录104S)。其原因是反映修改目录100S的活动图像数据目录从中国旅行指南场面转移至日本旅行指南场面。Fig. 88 shows a specific example of the above-mentioned navigation information "Navi100-1nif". It is the same as the navigation information "Navi100-0.nif", but the "China" key is changed to the "Japan" key. The connection end is also changed from catalog number 106 to catalog number 104 (list 104S in FIG. 85 ). The reason for this is that the moving image data list reflecting the revised list 100S is shifted from the Chinese travel guide scene to the Japanese travel guide scene.

同样,图89表示导航信息“Navi100-2.nif”,图90表示导航信息“Navi101-1.nif”,图91表示导航信息“Navi101-2.nif”,图92表示导航信息“Navi102-1.nif”,图93表示导航信息“Navi103-1.nif”,图94表示导航信息“Navi104-1.nif”。Similarly, Figure 89 shows navigation information "Navi100-2.nif", Figure 90 shows navigation information "Navi101-1.nif", Figure 91 shows navigation information "Navi101-2.nif", and Figure 92 shows navigation information "Navi102-1 .nif", Fig. 93 shows the navigation information "Navi103-1.nif", and Fig. 94 shows the navigation information "Navi104-1.nif".

而且,图95表示导航信息“Navi105-1.nif”的具体例子。导航信息“Navi105-1.nif”在一个导航信息中实现图85的目录105S、105S’、105S”目录105S、105’、105S”的切换根据原本。通过原本的切换与已经说明了的第1实施形式中的图48都一样。Furthermore, FIG. 95 shows a specific example of the navigation information "Navi105-1.nif". The navigation information "Navi105-1.nif" realizes the switching of the directories 105S, 105S', 105S" in Fig. 85 in one navigation information according to the original. The original switching is the same as that in Fig. 48 in the first embodiment already described.

例如处理器索引值0的原本由目录105S的“交通”键启动,消除“交通”、“住宿”、“返回”键和“奈良的”图像(目标索引值0~3),显示“去奈良的交通”图像和“返回”键(目标索引值4.5)。由此从目录105S切换至105S’。For example, the "traffic" key of the directory 105S for the processor index value 0 is originally activated, and the "transportation", "accommodation", "return" key and "Nara's" image (target index value 0~3) are eliminated, and "go to Nara" is displayed. 'traffic' image and 'return' key (target index value 4.5). Thereby switching from directory 105S to 105S'.

而且,处理器索引值3的原本通过目录105S的“返回”键启动,消除“去奈良的交通”图像和“返回”键(目标索引值4.5),显示“交通”、“住宿”、“返回”键(目标索引值0~3)。借此,从目录105S’切换至105S。And, the processor index value 3 is originally activated by the "return" key of the directory 105S, and the image of "traffic to Nara" and the "return" key (target index value 4.5) are eliminated, and "traffic", "accommodation", "return" are displayed. " key (target index value 0~3). Thereby, the directory 105S' is switched to 105S.

3-1-3.导航信息表3-1-3. Navigation information table

所述导航信息通过导航信息表生成部5111或导航信息表生成部113变换成导航信息表。The navigation information is converted into a navigation information table by the navigation information table generation unit 5111 or the navigation information table generation unit 113 .

导航信息表生成部5111、113与第1、2实施形式一样增加生成导航信息表,在连接端目录号为流基目录时给高连接表中“VE-Comptag”、“AE_Comp_tag”、“NE_id”栏设定名标识符,在连接端的目录号为页基目录情况下,给高连接表中的“VE_id”、“AE_id”、“NE_id”栏设定名标识符。The navigation information table generators 5111 and 113 are the same as the first and second embodiments to generate additional navigation information tables, and when the directory number of the connection end is the stream-based directory, add "VE-Comptag", "AE_Comp_tag", and "NE_id" in the high-connection table Set the name identifier in the column, and set the name identifier for the "VE_id", "AE_id", and "NE_id" columns in the high-link table when the directory number of the connection end is the page base directory.

图96表示上述导航信息“Navi104-1.nif”生成的导航信息表NVT(104.1)。导航信息表NVT(104.1)使“Navi104-1.nif”中的高连接表目录号置换成多种标识符。Fig. 96 shows the navigation information table NVT (104.1) generated by the above-mentioned navigation information "Navi104-1.nif". The navigation information table NVT (104.1) replaces the hyperlink table directory number in "Navi104-1.nif" with various identifiers.

所述图的高连接索引值0的栏由于连接端是流目录105S,所以置换成对应目录号105的“VE_comp_tag”、“AE_comp_tag”、“NE_id”的值。高连接索引值2的栏也一样置换成对应于目录号100的“VE_comp_tag”、“AE_comp_tag”、“NE_id”的值。The column of the high connection index value 0 in the figure is replaced with the values of "VE_comp_tag", "AE_comp_tag", and "NE_id" corresponding to the directory number 105 because the connection end is the stream directory 105S. The column of the high connection index value 2 is similarly replaced with the values corresponding to "VE_comp_tag", "AE_comp_tag", and "NE_id" of the catalog number 100 .

高连接索引值1栏由于连接端是页基目录5(目录104P),所以置换成对应于目录号5的“VE_id”、“AE_id”、“NE_id”的值。然而,由于不包括声音数,所以省略该目录。The high link index value 1 column is replaced with the values of "VE_id", "AE_id", and "NE_id" corresponding to the directory number 5 because the link destination is the page base directory 5 (directory 104P). However, since the number of sounds is not included, this directory is omitted.

3-1-4.多路化3-1-4. Multiplexing

通过数据多路化部5103及数据多路化部103,使上述展示信息及导航信息多路化。The presentation information and navigation information described above are multiplexed by the data multiplexing unit 5103 and the data multiplexing unit 103 .

数据多路化部5103根据结构信息表8201与第1实施形式一样使流基目录多路。数据多路化部103根据结构信息表8301与第2实施形式一样使页基目录多路。这两者同时进行。The data multiplexing unit 5103 multiplexes the stream base directory based on the configuration information table 8201 as in the first embodiment. The data multiplexing unit 103 multiplexes the page base directory based on the structure information table 8301 as in the second embodiment. Do both at the same time.

还有利用发射部106使表示流基目录的多路流和表示页基目录的多路流在输送流中多路并发射。Also, the transmission unit 106 multiplexes the stream-based content and the page-based content into the transport stream and transmits them.

图97展示表示利用发射部106多路了的输送流的说明图。图29与图70一样,横轴表示经过时间,纵轴表示同时多路的目录数据及系统信息表。FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing a transport stream multiplexed by the transmission unit 106. FIG. In FIG. 29, as in FIG. 70, the horizontal axis represents elapsed time, and the vertical axis represents simultaneously multiplexed directory data and system information tables.

在所述图中,9701表示利用数据多路化部5103使流基目录数据多路化的部分。9702表示利用数据多路化部103使页基目录数据多路化的部分。9703表示由系统信息表生成部105使生成的系统信息表多路化的部分。In the figure, 9701 denotes a portion where stream-based content data is multiplexed by the data multiplexing unit 5103 . Reference numeral 9702 indicates a portion where the data multiplexing unit 103 multiplexes the page base directory data. 9703 denotes a portion where the system information table generated by the system information table generating unit 105 is multiplexed.

3-2.接收装置91213-2. Receiving device 9121

图98是表示本实施形式的数据接收装置构成的方框图。Fig. 98 is a block diagram showing the structure of the data receiving apparatus of this embodiment.

该接收装置9121与第2实施形式的图52所示的数据接收装置121比较,标以同样符号的构成要素是相同的目录。下面对相同部分说明从略,主要说明不同点。This receiving device 9121 is compared with the data receiving device 121 shown in FIG. 52 of the second embodiment, and the components denoted by the same reference numerals are the same contents. The description of the same parts will be omitted below, and the differences will be mainly explained.

不同处在于,设置TS译码器部9123、接收控制部9126,取代图52的TS译码器部123、接收控制部126。还有TS译码器部9123内的滤波条件存储部9131也不同。The difference is that a TS decoder unit 9123 and a reception control unit 9126 are provided instead of the TS decoder unit 123 and reception control unit 126 of FIG. 52 . Also, the filter condition storage unit 9131 in the TS decoder unit 9123 is also different.

3-2-1.TS译码器部91233-2-1. TS decoder unit 9123

TS译码器部9123同时兼有第1、2实施形式的译码器部5123、123两者功能。这是由于既对应于流基目录也对应于页基目录。因此,滤波条件存储部9131也能够对第1、2实施形式的滤波条件存储部5131、131的每个设定所有可设定的滤波条件。The TS decoder unit 9123 has both the functions of the decoder units 5123 and 123 of the first and second embodiments. This is because it corresponds to both the stream base directory and the page base directory. Therefore, the filter condition storage unit 9131 can also set all settable filter conditions for each of the filter condition storage units 5131 and 131 in the first and second embodiments.

图99表示展示滤波条件存储部9131存储目录的滤波条件表。滤波条件存储部9131存储多个滤波条件。名滤波条件如所述图所示,由“滤波识别号”、“启动/停止”、“PID”、“Stream_id”、“table_id_extension”、“Version_no”、“输出端”组成。有关各项目由于在第1、2实施例中已经作了说明,所以说明从略。FIG. 99 shows a filter condition table showing the contents stored in the filter condition storage unit 9131. The filter condition storage unit 9131 stores a plurality of filter conditions. The filter condition is as shown in the above figure, consisting of "filter identification number", "start/stop", "PID", "Stream_id", "table_id_extension", "Version_no", and "output terminal". Relevant items have already been described in the first and second embodiments, so the description is omitted.

3-2-2.接收控制部91263-2-2. Receive control unit 9126

接收控制部9126兼有第1、2实施形式的接收控制部5126、126的两者功能。这也是由于既对应于流基目录,也对应于页基目录。The reception control unit 9126 has both the functions of the reception control units 5126 and 126 of the first and second embodiments. This is also because it corresponds to both the stream base directory and the page base directory.

图100、101是表示接收控制部9126的控制目录的流程。在图100中,S2402、S2404、S2406、S2405与图76同样符号的步骤都相同。在图101中,S2410、S2412、S2414、S2416、S2418与图76的相同的步骤其处理相同。而且,在图101中,S8110、S8112、S8114与图36相同符号的步骤其处理相同。然而在S2406、S2408中,还处理“Cur_VE_comp_tag”、“Cur_AE_comp_tag”、“new_VE_comp_tag”、“new_AE_comp_tag”。100 and 101 show the flow of the control list of the reception control unit 9126. In FIG. 100 , S2402 , S2404 , S2406 , and S2405 are the same as steps with the same symbols in FIG. 76 . In FIG. 101 , S2410 , S2412 , S2414 , S2416 , and S2418 are the same steps as those in FIG. 76 , and the processing is the same. In addition, in FIG. 101, the steps of S8110, S8112, and S8114 having the same symbols as those in FIG. 36 have the same processing. However, in S2406 and S2408, "Cur_VE_comp_tag", "Cur_AE_comp_tag", "new_VE_comp_tag", and "new_AE_comp_tag" are also processed.

在图100中,接收控制部9126判定在S2405中指定的各种标识符是指流基目录还是指页基目录。具体来说,若包括“new_VE_Comp_tag”则判定为流基目录、若包括“new_VE_id”则判定为页基目录。In FIG. 100 , the reception control unit 9126 determines whether the various identifiers specified in S2405 refer to the stream-based directory or the page-based directory. Specifically, if "new_VE_Comp_tag" is included, it is determined to be a stream-based directory, and if "new_VE_id" is included, it is determined to be a page-based directory.

还有接收控制部9126当判定为流基目录时进行图101的S8110以后的处理;当判定为页基目录时进行图101的S2110以后的处理。有关这些处理的详述与在第1、2实施形式说明的处理相同。Furthermore, the reception control unit 9126 performs the processing after S8110 in FIG. 101 when it determines that it is a stream-based directory, and performs the processing after S2110 in FIG. 101 when it determines that it is a page-based directory. Details of these processes are the same as those described in the first and second embodiments.

3-2-3.其他3-2-3. Others

此外在第3实施形式中,该基目录和页基目录虽然用由“VE_Comp_tag”指定或由“VE_id”指定作区别,但不仅限于此,例如也可由其他途径设置表示其区别的标识符。In addition, in the third embodiment, the base directory and the page base directory are distinguished by specifying "VE_Comp_tag" or "VE_id", but not limited to this, for example, an identifier indicating the difference may be set in other ways.

并且,结构信息存储部109虽然单独存储用于流基目录和用于页基目录的结构表,但也可使混在一个结构信息表中。在其情况下如设置表示流基目录或页基目录的标志,还有多路化部5103、103使由标志分别担任的目录多路化。Furthermore, although the structure information storage unit 109 separately stores the structure tables for the stream-based directory and the page-based directory, they may be mixed in one structure information table. In this case, if a flag indicating a stream-based directory or a page-based directory is set, the multiplexing units 5103, 103 also multiplex the directories assigned by the flags.

而且,在第1、2实施形式中,虽然同时使在各流基目录中包括的活动图像数据开始作多路化,但也可这样多路化,使活动图像的重放时间的局部重迭。Furthermore, in the first and second embodiments, although the moving picture data included in each stream-based directory is started to be multiplexed at the same time, it is also possible to multiplex in such a way that the playback time of the moving picture partially overlaps. .

加之在上述第1、3实施形式中,虽然以流基目录的活动图像数据是接收装置5121的显示画面的实物尺寸为前提,但也可作成比其小的尺寸的活动图像数据。例如由于把活动图像数作成1/4大小,则位速率也可达1/4,所以纵使确定能分配给对话节目的位速率之上限情况下,也可增加目录数量。该情况下,也能得到与由导航信息产生的目标显示组合形成的重放图像。另外,1个目录也可使得同时有2~4个1/4大小的活动图像数据。In addition, in the above-mentioned first and third embodiments, it is assumed that the moving image data of the stream-based content is the actual size of the display screen of the receiving device 5121, but moving image data of a size smaller than that can also be created. For example, if the number of moving pictures is 1/4, the bit rate can also be 1/4, so even if the upper limit of the bit rate that can be assigned to a talk program is determined, the number of directories can be increased. Also in this case, it is possible to obtain a reproduced image combined with an object display based on the navigation information. In addition, one directory can also have 2 to 4 moving image data of 1/4 size at the same time.

在第1、3实施形式中,即便是有关页基目录的静止图像,也可以是比显示画面还要小的图像数据。1个目录也可要有多个图像数据。例如1个目录也可要有2~4个1/4大小的静止图像。In the first and third embodiments, even if it is a still image related to the page base content, it may be image data smaller than the display screen. One directory may have a plurality of image data. For example, one directory may also have 2 to 4 still images of 1/4 size.

把静止图像作为背景,也可把1/4大小的活动图像数据在其上重放。With a still image as the background, 1/4 size moving image data can also be played back on it.

还有在第1~第3实施例中,导航信息中的处理器定义表中的原本除键和图像(文字及图形)的显示切换外,也可记述接收装置的动作。例如根据用户操作也可记述键选择时和确定时和操作错误应时应发声的发声音(检视(ピ-プ)声卡搭声)的指定。而且,在以各种商品购物信息为目录的对话节目的目录中,接收操作者的数字(价格)输入,也可记述作总金额计算的原本。Also, in the first to third embodiments, the scripts in the processor definition table in the navigation information can also describe the operation of the receiving device in addition to the display switching of keys and images (characters and graphics). For example, it is also possible to specify the designation of the sound to be played when a key is selected, when it is confirmed, and when an operation error occurs (view (pi-pu) sound card sound) according to the user's operation. In addition, in the content of the interactive program which includes various commodity shopping information as the content, it is also possible to describe the script for the calculation of the total amount upon receiving the input of numbers (prices) from the operator.

在第1~3实施例中,如使用程序方框说明那样,接收控制部可以软件实现。即是说,通过CPU执行而实现记述其功能的程序。与此相反,接收控制部以外的构成要素因通过硬件实现,所以已有的数字卫星广播调谐器也大体具有同等的硬件。从而,本发明的装置即便把记述接收控制部功能的程序装入已有的数字卫星广播调谐器也能实现。例如通过记录上述程序的记录媒体如ROM卡、只要在已有的数字卫星广播调谐器中装入程序就行,根据该构成,经灵活运用已有的数字卫星广播调谐器,稍加改造就可实施本发明。In the first to third embodiments, as described using program blocks, the reception control unit can be realized by software. That is, the program describing its function is realized by being executed by the CPU. On the other hand, since components other than the reception control unit are realized by hardware, existing digital satellite broadcast tuners also generally have equivalent hardware. Therefore, the apparatus of the present invention can be implemented even if the program describing the function of the reception control unit is incorporated into an existing digital satellite broadcast tuner. For example, by using a recording medium such as a ROM card that records the above program, it is enough to load the program into an existing digital satellite broadcast tuner. According to this configuration, the existing digital satellite broadcast tuner can be used flexibly and slightly modified. this invention.

尽管参照附图举例对本发明作了充分描述,但应指出的是,该领域普通技术人员显然会作出各种变化和改进。因此,除非这样的变化和改进超出本发明范围,否则应认为包括在其中。Although the present invention has been fully described by way of example with reference to the accompanying drawings, it is to be noted that various changes and modifications will be apparent to those skilled in the art. Therefore, unless otherwise such changes and modifications depart from the scope of the present invention, they should be construed as being included therein.

Claims (10)

1. broadcaster, this broadcaster broadcast form the dialogue program a plurality of catalogues by demultiplexing demultiplexing stream,
One catalogue comprises the control information of a plurality of expressions and another or a plurality of directory link;
Described control information with identifying information and version number by demultiplexing in described demultiplexing stream, described identifying information is represented in a plurality of control informations each control information other parameter among the homogeneous turbulence ID and the described control information of expression altogether, and described version number is the version number with the pairing effective time zone of this control information.
2. according to the broadcaster of claim 1, it is characterized in that: by the control information that is comprised in the represented chained representation of described control information another or a plurality of catalogue.
3. according to the broadcaster of claim 1 or 2, it is characterized in that: described stream ID is that each control information that is comprised in the catalogue is total to homogeneous turbulence ID, and described parameter is described each control information other parameter.
4. according to the broadcaster of claim 1 or 2, it is characterized in that: described stream ID is that each control information in a plurality of catalogues is total to homogeneous turbulence ID, and described parameter is described each control information other parameter.
5. according to the broadcaster of claim 1 or 2, it is characterized in that:
Described broadcaster possesses
The demultiplexing device, to described control information give described identifying information and generate demultiplexing stream and
Broadcast device will be stated from digital broadcasting wave by the demultiplexing stream that the demultiplexing device generates and broadcast.
6. according to the broadcaster of claim 5, it is characterized in that:
A described catalogue comprises live image;
Described demultiplexing device carries out demultiplexing with the live image that is comprised in the described catalogue, gives corresponding to the version number of the effective time zone of this live image to each control information that is comprised in the described catalogue simultaneously and carries out demultiplexing.
7. according to the broadcaster of claim 6, it is characterized in that:
Described demultiplexing device carries out demultiplexing with each control information that is comprised in the described catalogue repeatedly between the effective time zone of each control information corresponding to described live image.
8. according to the broadcaster of claim 1 or 2, it is characterized in that: the storage device that possesses the described catalogue of storage.
9. according to the broadcaster of claim 1 or 2, it is characterized in that:
Described stream ID is the Packet Identifier PID by the MPEG2 prescribed by standard, and described parameter is the table_id_extension by the MPEG2 prescribed by standard.
10. the broadcasting method of a broadcaster, this broadcaster broadcast form the dialogue program a plurality of catalogues by demultiplexing demultiplexing stream,
One catalogue comprises the control information of the link of a plurality of expressions another or a plurality of catalogues;
Described control information with identifying information and version number by demultiplexing in described demultiplexing stream, described identifying information is represented in a plurality of control informations each control information other parameter among the homogeneous turbulence ID and the described control information of expression altogether, and described version number is the version number with the pairing effective time zone of this control information.
CNB2005100894791A 1996-08-30 1997-08-30 Digital Broadcasting and Receiving Devices Expired - Lifetime CN100385939C (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP23001596 1996-08-30
JP230015/96 1996-08-30
JP56687/97 1997-03-11

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CNB031229085A Division CN1222167C (en) 1996-08-30 1997-08-30 Digital broadcast apparatus and reception apparatus

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN1722817A CN1722817A (en) 2006-01-18
CN100385939C true CN100385939C (en) 2008-04-30

Family

ID=35912724

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CNB2005100894791A Expired - Lifetime CN100385939C (en) 1996-08-30 1997-08-30 Digital Broadcasting and Receiving Devices

Country Status (1)

Country Link
CN (1) CN100385939C (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5377322A (en) * 1989-07-19 1994-12-27 Hitachi, Ltd. Information handling method and system utilizing multiple interconnected processors and controllers
US5422674A (en) * 1993-12-22 1995-06-06 Digital Equipment Corporation Remote display of an image by transmitting compressed video frames representing background and overlay portions thereof
EP0680216A2 (en) * 1994-04-28 1995-11-02 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Apparatus and method for formulating an interactive signal
US5541662A (en) * 1994-09-30 1996-07-30 Intel Corporation Content programmer control of video and data display using associated data

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5377322A (en) * 1989-07-19 1994-12-27 Hitachi, Ltd. Information handling method and system utilizing multiple interconnected processors and controllers
US5422674A (en) * 1993-12-22 1995-06-06 Digital Equipment Corporation Remote display of an image by transmitting compressed video frames representing background and overlay portions thereof
EP0680216A2 (en) * 1994-04-28 1995-11-02 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Apparatus and method for formulating an interactive signal
JPH0846950A (en) * 1994-04-28 1996-02-16 Thomson Consumer Electron Inc Equipment and method for creating bidirectional television signal and transmission system of bidirectional television signal
US5541662A (en) * 1994-09-30 1996-07-30 Intel Corporation Content programmer control of video and data display using associated data

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN1722817A (en) 2006-01-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR100475261B1 (en) Digital broadcasting system, digital broadcasting appratus and a reception appratus for digital broadcasts
KR100508811B1 (en) Digital broadcasting system, digital broadcasting apparatus, and receiver apparatus for digital broadcast
US20090025051A1 (en) Method of transmitting and receiving broadcast signal and apparatus for receiving broadcast signal
KR19990023650A (en) Information providing apparatus and method, Information receiving apparatus and method and transmission medium
US20070133610A1 (en) Storage type broadcast system, transmitter and receiver
EP1063797A2 (en) Digital broadcast reception apparatus for retrieving broadcast program information, and computer-readable record medium carrying a computer program allowing a computer to function as a digital broadcast reception apparatus
JP3431470B2 (en) Digital broadcasting device, receiving device, digital broadcasting system, program recording medium applied to receiving device
JPH11284968A (en) Digital TV broadcast transmitting apparatus, digital TV broadcast receiving apparatus, digital TV broadcast transmitting / receiving system, and computer-readable recording medium
CN100385939C (en) Digital Broadcasting and Receiving Devices
JP3314012B2 (en) Digital broadcasting device, digital broadcasting receiving device, digital broadcasting system, computer-readable recording medium, digital broadcasting method, and digital broadcasting receiving method
JP3882208B2 (en) Transmitting device and receiving device
JP2001204020A (en) Thumbnail designation information description method
JP3431465B2 (en) Data presentation control device for controlling data presentation, data transmission device for transmitting information used for controlling data presentation
JP3646113B2 (en) BROADCAST DEVICE, RECEPTION DEVICE, BROADCAST METHOD, RECEPTION METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM CONTAINING THE PROGRAM
JP2001359090A (en) Digital broadcasting device, receiving device, digital broadcasting system, program recording medium applied to receiving device
JP3987843B2 (en) Digital broadcast receiving apparatus and method
JP3914078B2 (en) Digital broadcasting apparatus, digital broadcasting method, and recording medium
EP1185011A2 (en) System and method for broadcasting a broadcast signal from a transmitter to a receiver, where the broadcast signal comprises control data for controlling the receiver
HK1005822B (en) Digital broadcasting system, digital broadcasting apparatus, and associated receiver therefor
JP2003298542A (en) Digital broadcast transmitter, digital broadcast transmission method, digital broadcast receiver, and identifier providing apparatus
KR20000010145A (en) Pre-engaged recording device of a digital broadcasting system and a pre-engaged recording method thereof
KR100447299B1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving a broadcasting program information
JP2003198962A (en) Digital TV broadcast transmitting apparatus, digital TV broadcast receiving apparatus, digital TV broadcast transmitting / receiving system, and computer-readable recording medium
HK1005821A (en) Digital broadcasting system
JP2003234991A (en) Data presentation control device for controlling data presentation, data transmission device for transmitting information used for controlling data presentation, and data presentation control information editing device for editing information used for controlling data presentation

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
C06 Publication
PB01 Publication
C10 Entry into substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
C14 Grant of patent or utility model
GR01 Patent grant
ASS Succession or assignment of patent right

Owner name: MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC (AMERICA) INTELLECTUAL PROPERT

Free format text: FORMER OWNER: MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL CO, LTD.

Effective date: 20140724

C41 Transfer of patent application or patent right or utility model
TR01 Transfer of patent right

Effective date of registration: 20140724

Address after: Seaman Avenue Torrance in the United States of California No. 20000 room 200

Patentee after: PANASONIC INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Address before: Osaka Japan

Patentee before: Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.,Ltd.

CX01 Expiry of patent term
CX01 Expiry of patent term

Granted publication date: 20080430